Home

High -Performance AC Drive

Contents

1. 212 Group FC Multi Reference and Simple PLC 215 Group FD User defined Paramielters 2 ere entere e ta o 219 Group FE User Defined Function Codes sess 219 Group d seda ope M M 220 Group 0 Torque Control and Restricting 222 Group 1 Virtual DI VDI Virtual DO VDO iienaa 224 Group A2 to A4 Motor 2 to Motor 4 Parameters 228 Group A5 Control Optimization Parameters 232 Gro p Ao Al Gurve Selllrig corte oto ore trc EISE dee SE ESAE IS E S EET EATE 234 Group 7 User Programmable Function esee nnne 236 Group A8 Point point recae ea etie Ere rua 236 Group AC Al AO COFFGCHOT as cetero i rcr ee Eae PEE EE LE 239 Group U0 2 a dn eo 240 Chapter EMC ak i iet aie aie E Ania 248 LA nep ete veep 248 7 2 Introductionito EMO Standard cocotte terror orit a ox reader durae ders e d 248 7 3 Selection of Peripheral
2. Auxiliary F0 05 6 source Y F0 06 ie Target running frequency Amplitude limit 2 F F0 02 Command frequency source selection 19 209196 ys The operation between the main frequency source and the auxiliary frequency source can be used for closed loop speed control For example using the main frequency source for setting the required frequency and the auxiliary frequency source for automatic adjustment in conjunction with switchover performed by the external DI terminal signal the required closed loop control can be implemented 4 8 3 Binding Command Source to Frequency Source The three command sources can be separately bound to frequency sources as shown in Figure 4 19 When the specified command source F0 02 is bound to a frequency source corresponding digit in the value of F0 27 the frequency is determined by the frequency setting channel set in F0 27 In this case both main and auxiliary frequency sources are ineffective 62 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 8 4 Al as the Frequency Source The Al terminal can be used as the frequency source The MD380 provides two Al terminals Al1 and Al2 on the control board and the optional I O extension card provides another Al terminal AI3 The following figures show
3. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 15 Proportional gain Kp2 0 0 100 0 20 0 FA 16 Integral time Ti2 0 01 10 00s 2 00s FA 17 Differential time Td2 0 000 10 0005 0 0005 0 switchover PID parameter switchover 1 Switchover via DI FA 18 diti 0 condition 2 Automatic switchover based on deviation 4 PID parameter switchover 6 19 deviation 1 0 096 to FA 20 20 096 FA 20 FID parameter switchover FA 19 to 100 0 80 0 deviation 2 In some applications PID parameters switchover is required when one group of PID parameters cannot satisfy the requirement of the whole running process These parameters are used for switchover between two groups of PID parameters Regulator parameters FA 15 to FA 17 are set in the same way as FA 05 to FA 07 The switchover can be implemented either via a DI terminal or automatically implemented based on the deviation If you select switchover via a DI terminal the DI must be allocated with function 43 PID parameter switchover If the DI is OFF group 1 FA 05 to FA 07 is selected If the DI is ON group 2 FA 15 to FA 17 is selected If you select automatic switchover when the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is smaller than the value of FA 19 group 1 is selected When the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is higher than the value of FA 20 group 2 is selected
4. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 12 Frequency upper limit to 50 00 Hz This parameter is used to set the frequency upper limit Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 13 pe upper limit to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz If the source of the frequency upper limit is analog input or pulse setting the final frequency upper limit is obtained by adding the offset in this parameter to the frequency upper limit set in FO 11 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 14 Frequency lower limit 0 00 Hz to frequency upper limit F0 12 0 00 Hz If the frequency reference is lower than the value of this parameter the AC drive can stop run at the frequency lower limit or run at zero speed determined by F8 14 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 15 Carrier frequency 0 5 16 0 kHz Model dependent It is used to adjust the carrier frequency of the AC drive helping to reduce the motor noise avoiding the resonance of the mechanical system and reducing the leakage current to the earth and interference generated by the AC drive If the carrier frequency is low output current has high harmonics and the power loss and temperature rise of the motor increase If the carrier frequency is high power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines However the AC drive has a
5. Host y Communication Hof H1000 register 9 computer configuration Communication setting 60 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example According to the preceding figure the running frequency of the AC drive can be set by means of function codes manual adjustment analog input multi speed terminal external feedback signal internal PID regulator or the host computer Set the corresponding function codes of each frequency setting mode as shown in the preceding figure 4 8 2 Frequency Setting by the Auxiliary Frequency Source The frequency setting by the auxiliary frequency source is the same as the frequency setting by the main frequency source You can set the auxiliary frequency source in F0 04 Figure 4 18 Frequency set by the auxiliary frequency source 08 Digital setting Retentive at 4 power failure 2 Auxilia XH o v F4 33 N ry TV e P8 8 frequency 2 Hor F433 dug L source Y riens R2 r3 77 F4 33 l extension teed DETTO VIVE FO 04 F0 08 Auxilia os KHERI H nns reo sett e frequency I Di Drto F400 toF 4 09 re source Y Frequency 12 13 45 frequency Multi Switchover 7 4 00 to F4 09 Group gt gt gt e 40 AM AI2
6. Table 8 12 Models and dimensions of the TNR series cable lugs MD380 User Manual 91 Cable Range Current impi Model olalelelalewl L AWG MCM TNRO 75 4 22 16 0 25 1 0 2 8 1 3 4 5 6 6 8 0 4 3 15 0 10 RYO 8 TNR1 25 4 22 16 0 25 1 65 3 4 17 45 7 3 8 53 158 19 AK 1M Figure 8 14 Dimensions of recommended GTNR series cable lugs 274 MD380 User Manual Table 8 13 Models and dimensions of the GTNR series cable lugs Selection and Dimensions Model XEM H ai F L R 069 Tool GTNR1 5 5 4 0 2 2 5 0 5 0 2 0 8 0 53 10 16 0 GTNR2 5 4 5 0 43 18 0 8 0 1 0 GTNR2 5 5 45 2 9 7 0 2 0 5 3 6 0 20 0 GTNR2 5 6 102 64 08 GTNR4 5 5 3 20 0 E 5 2 3 6 7 0 60 2 0 10 0 1 0 nies GTNR4 6 6 4 YYT 8 GTNR6 5 6 0 53 23 0 14 GTNR6 6 6 0 4 2 9 0 3 0 64 7 75 26 0 GTNR6 8 12 0 84 1 0 GTNR10 6 6 4 26 5 7 0 5 0 90 80 3 5 12 4 1 3 GTNR10 8 8 4 27 5 GTNR16 6 6 4 7 8 5 8 120 80 40 124 13 31 0 GTNR16 8 8 4 GTNR25 6 8 0 14 0 64 2 0 32 0 GTNR25 8 9 5 75 120 9 0 45 15 5 84 1 6 340 CT 38 GTNR25 10 10 5 17 5 10 5 14 37 0 CT 100 GTNR35 6 6 4 9 0 15 5 2 8 3
7. Function Code Parameter Name Description It displays the status of all DI terminals when the latest fault occurs The sequence is as follows F9 20 DI status upon 3rd fault DIO DIS Dis 07 016 015 DI2 DM If a Dl is ON the setting is 1 If the DI is OFF the setting is 0 The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI status It displays the status of all output terminals when the latest fault occurs The sequence is as follows Output terminal status BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO 9 21 upon 3rd fault 002 DOT REL FMP If an output terminal is ON the setting is 1 If the output terminal is OFF the setting is 0 The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI statuses F9 22 AC drive status upon 3rd Raserved fault Power on time upon 3rd It displays the present power on time when the F9 23 fault latest fault occurs Running time upon 3rd It displays the present running time when the F9 24 fault latest fault occurs F9 27 Frequency upon 2nd fault F9 28 Current upon 2nd fault F9 29 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault F9 30 DI status upon 2nd fault Output terminal status Same as 9 17 9 24 F9 31 upon 2nd fault F9 32 Frequency upon 2nd fault F9 33 Current upon 2nd fault F9 34 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault F9 37 DI status upon 1st fault F9 38 Output terminal status upon 1st fault F9 39 Frequency upon 1st fault F9 40 Current upon 1st fault Same as 9 17 9 24
8. deceleration short Increase the deceleration time 4 The braking unit and braking resistor re not installed 4 Install the braking unit and braking resistor 1 The input voltage is too high T Adjust th voltage t Overvoltage at Eror o Anext i eh normal range constant speed FAN lores Crves 2 Cancel the external force motor during deceleration or install the braking resistor Control power The input voltage is not within the Adjust the input voltage to supply fault ene allowable range the allowable range 1 Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power supply 2 The AC drive s input voltage is 1 Reset the fault not within the FLOWS range 2 Adjust the voltage to Undervoltage 09 3 The bus voltage is abnormal normal range 4 The rectifier bridge and buffer 3 Contact the agent or resistor are faulty Inovance 5 The drive board is faulty 6 The main control board is faulty 1 The load is too heavy or locked 1 Reduce the load and check the motor and rotor occurs on the motor s AC drive overload Err10 mechanical condition 2 The AC drive model is of too 2 Select an AC drive of small power class i higher power class 289 Maintenance and Troubleshooting MD380 User Manual Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions 1 F9 01 is set improperly 1 Sethe OP calrectly
9. 0 9 same as unit s digit It is used to bind the three running command sources with the nine frequency sources facilitating to implement synchronous switchover For details on the frequency sources see the description of F0 03 Main frequency source X selection Different running command sources can be bound to the same frequency source 147 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual If a command source has a bound frequency source the frequency source set in F0 03 to F0 07 no longer takes effect when the command source is effective Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Modbus protocol 1 PROFIBUS DP bridge 0 2 CANopen bridge F0 28 Serial communication protocol The MD380 supports Modbus PROFIBUS DP bridge and CANopen bridge Select a proper protocol based on the actual requirements Group F1 Motor 1 Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Common asynchronous motor F1 00 Motor type 1 Variable frequency asynchronous motor 1 selection 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor F1 01 ONT 0 1 1000 0 kW power dependent F4 02 Rated motor 1 2000 V Model voltage dependent F1 03 Rated motor 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power x 55 kW Model current 0 1 6553 5 A AC drive power 55 kW dependent F1 04 Rated motor 0 01 Hz to maximum frequency Model frequency dependent F1 05 nated motor 1 65535 RPM rota
10. 282 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Recommended Recommended Model Power Resistance Braking Unit Remark MD380 5T37G 3 7 kW 216 0 2 External MDBUN 45 5T MD380 5T45G 4 5 kw 216 2 External MDBUN 45 5T MD380 5T55G 5 5 kW 280 External MDBUN 60 5T MD380 5T75G 7 5 kW 280 External MDBUN 90 5T MD380 5T90G 4 5 kW x2 280x2 External MDBUN 90 5T MD380 5T110G 5 5kWx2 280x2 External MDBUN 60 5T x 2 MD380 5T132G 6 5 kW x2 280x2 Externa MDBUN 90 5T x 2 MD380 5T160G 16 kW 22590 External MDBUN 90 5T x 2 MD380 5T200G 20 kW 22590 External MDBU 200 D MD380 5T220G 22 kW 22590 External MDBU 200 D MD380 5T250G 12 5 kW x2 2250x2 External MDBU 200 D x 2 MD380 5T280G 14kW x2 2250x2 External MDBU 200 D x2 MD380 5T315G 16 kW x2 2250x2 External MDBU 200 D x 2 MD380 5T355G 17 kW x2 2250x2 External MDBU 200 D x 2 MD380 5T400G 14 kW x 3 22 5 0x3 External MDBU 200 D x 3 Note x2 indicates that two braking units with their respective braking resistor are connected in parallel Xx 3 means the same 283 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual 284 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintenance and Troubleshooting MD380 User Manual Chapter 9 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9 1 Routine Repair and Maintenance of the MD380 9 1 1 Routine Maintenance The influence of the ambient temperature humidity dust and vibra
11. 50 60Hz o 12 MD380 o lt Three phase 22 50 60 Hz T o OR Braking resistor MCCB 1 vd S PB ul _ MD380 Ww 2 Three phase 220 18 5 30 kW Three phase 220 V 37 kW and Above Braking resistor MDBUN Braking unit MCCB R Three phase 9 9 0 220V s Y Is WO MD380 s T 9 o oT IMD380 External Braking resistor reactor MDBUN Braking unit MCCB R d E Three phase 90 Qu 220 S o 40 s 50 60 Hz Three phase 380 480 V 30 kW and Below Three phase 380 480 V 37 55 kW Braking resistor MCCB Three phase R 79 9 78 O vo 50 60 Hz 89 0 0 5 MD380 w T D 380 480 V 50 60 Hz MCCB Braking resistor MDBUN Braking unit Three phase Ry 7 R 3 0 08 a A T MD380 Three phase 380 480 V 75 kW and Above Three phase 690 V External Braking resistor reer MDBUN Braking unit MCCB Three phaseR 5 RP Ou 380 480 V m s060Hz 2 9 75 v e T w MD380 Three R 275 iR P v hase 690 V 50 60 z gt 0 Extern
12. Frequency running 1 H F4 084 gt frequency source selection frequency 0110 H 09 In the preceding figure DI7 DI4 DI8 and DI2 are used as the multi frequency input terminals each of which has a bit value The state combinations of these terminals correspond to multiple frequencies When 017 014 DI8 012 0 0 1 0 the state combination value is 2 corresponding to the value set in FC 02 The target running frequency is automatically calculated by FC 02 x F0 10 The MD380 supports a maximum of four DI terminals to be used as the multi frequency input terminals You can also use less than four DI terminals and the empty bit is considered to be 0 65 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 4 8 9 Setting the Motor Rotating Direction After the AC drive restores the default settings press to drive the motor to rotate In this case the rotating direction is regarded as the forward rotation If the rotating direction is reverse to the direction required by the equipment power off the AC drive and exchange any two of the output UVW cables wait until the main capacitor of the AC drive is completely discharged In some applications where both forward rotation and reverse rotation are required enable the reverse control F8 13 0 default value and meanwhile reverse the rotating direction by setting F0 09 to 1 Then press to make
13. PID setting is smaller than the value of 09 PID control stops The small deviation between PID feedback and PID setting will make the output frequency stabilize effective for some closed loop control applications Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 10 PID differential limit 0 00 100 00 0 10 It is used to set the PID differential output range In PID control the differential operation may easily cause system oscillation Thus the PID differential regulation is restricted to a small range Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 11 PID setting change time 0 00 650 005 0 005 The PID setting change time indicates the time required for PID setting changing from 0 0 to 100 0 The PID setting changes linearly according to the change time reducing the impact caused by sudden setting change on the system 209 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 12 PID feedback filter time 0 00 60 00s 0 00s FA 13 PID output filter time 0 00 60 005 0 005 12 is used to filter the PID feedback helping to reduce interference on the feedback but slowing the response of the process closed loop system FA 13 is used to filter the PID output frequency helping to weaken sudden change of the AC drive output frequency but slowing the response of the process closed loop system
14. gt AD PU ON 0010 Curve selection 1 5 7 F calculation value gt 00 11 Hundred s digit AI3 4 EON AI3 internal Curve selection 1 57 calculation value Al terminal Sampling F4 33 Al curve selection The sampling of Al terminals can be queried in 00 09 to 00 11 The calculation value is for internal subsequent calculation and cannot be directly read by the user 4 13 Use of AO Terminals The AC drive supports a total of two AO terminals among which AO1 is provided by the control board and AC2 is provided on the extension card Terminal Output Signal Characteristic If J5 is connected to the position with V mark it outputs the signal of 0 10 VDC If J5 is connected to the position with I mark it outputs the signal of 0 20 mA AO1 GND AO2 GND Itis provided on the extension card and outputs the signal of 0 10 VDC AO1 and 2 can be used to indicate the internal running parameters in the analog mode The property of indicated parameters can be defined by F5 07 and F5 08 The designated running parameters can be rectified before output The rectification feature is Y kX b among which X indicates the running parameters to be output and and b of AO1 can be set by F5 10 and F5 11 Figure 4 33 Setting of k and b of AO1 AO1 output Y after rectification F5 11 ddnde on output X before rectification 74
15. 0 1 Reverse action 0 Forward action When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting the AC drive s output frequency rises For example the winding tension control requires forward PID action 1 Reverse action When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting the AC drive s output frequency reduces For example the unwinding tension control requires reverse PID action Note that this function is influenced by the DI function 35 Reverse PID action direction Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 04 PID setting feedback range 0 65535 1000 This parameter is a non dimensional unit It is used for PID setting display U0 15 and PID feedback display 00 16 Relative value 10096 of PID setting feedback corresponds to the value of FA 04 If FA 04 is set to 2000 and PID setting is 100 096 the PID setting display 00 15 is 2000 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 05 FA 06 Proportional gain Kp1 Integral time Ti1 0 0 100 0 0 01 10 005 20 0 2 005 07 Differential time Td1 0 00 10 000 0 000s 208 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes FA 05 Proportional gain Kp1 It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator The higher the Kp1 is the larger the regulating intensity is The value 100 0 indicates when the deviation between PID f
16. Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 00 10 57 V 00 10 12 voltage V current mA 0 00 20 00 mA When F4 40 is set to 0 Al2 samplin g data is displayed in the unit of V When F4 40 is set to 1 Al2 sampling data is displayed in the unit of mA Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 14 Load speed 0 65535 For more details see the description of F7 12 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 15 PID setting 0 65535 00 16 PID feedback 0 65535 They display the PID setting value and PID feedback value PID setting PID setting percentage x FA 04 PID feedback PID feedback percentage x FA 04 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 18 Input pulse frequency 0 00 100 00 kHz It displays the high speed pulse sampled frequency of DI5 in minimum unit of 0 01 kHz Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 320 00 320 00 Hz U0 19 Feedback speed 3200 0 3200 0 Hz It displays the actual output frequency of the AC drive If F0 22 Frequency reference resolution is set to 1 the display range is 3200 00 3200 00 Hz If F0 22 Frequency reference resolution is set to 2 the display range is 320 00 2 320 00 Hz Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 20 Remaining running time 0 0 6500 0 min It displays the remaining running time when the timing operation is enabled For details
17. Inovance V0 0 Data code 19010180 MD380 User Manual Preface Preface Thank you for purchasing the MD380 series AC drive developed by Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co Ltd The MD380 series AC drive is a general purpose high performance current vector control AC drive It is an upgrade product based on MD320 and can implement the control of asynchronous motor and permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM It increases the user programmable function background monitoring software and communication bus function and supports multi kind PG cards It is used to drive various automation production equipment involving textile paper making wiredrawing machine tool packing food fan and pump This manual describes the correct use of the MD380 series AC drive including selection parameter setting commissioning maintenance amp inspection Read and understand the manual before use and forward the manual to the end user Notes The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first and then perform operations in accordance with the instructions The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product you purchased The instructions are subject to change without notice due to product upgrade specification modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience
18. Only DI5 can be allocated with the function Length count input An automatic stop system can be implemented if the length reached signal output by the DO is fed back to the AC drive input terminal with the stop function Figure 4 28 Common application example of the fixed length control function MD380 FB 05 Set length COM _ _ RUN button Fo 02 1 F4 00 1 Stop button 012 4 01 3 4 02 4 JOG button F4 11 2 Button for amp F403 26 F404 27 clearing length FB 07 Number of Length pulses input DIS pulses per meter 001 504 10 Length detection Winding sensor motor 67 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 4 8 11 Use of the Counting Function The count value needs to be collected by the DI terminal that is allocated with function 25 When the count value reaches FB 08 Set count value the DO terminal allocated with function 8 Set count value reached becomes ON Then the counter stops counting When the count value reaches FB 09 Designated count value the DO terminal allocated with function 9 Designated count value reached becomes ON The counter continues to count until Set count value is reached Figure 4 29 Parameter setting in the counting mode After the designated Designated counting value is cou
19. switchover terminal 2 Source is terminal control the system will switch over to communication control after this terminal becomes ON After this terminal becomes ON the integral adjustment 38 PID integral pause function pauses However the proportional and differentiation adjustment functions are still valid Switchover between main After this terminal becomes ON the frequency source X 39 frequency source X and is replaced by the preset frequency set in F0 08 preset frequency Switchover DEERD After this terminal is enabled the frequency source Y is 40 auxiliary frequency source replaced by the preset frequency set F0 08 Y and preset frequency 41 Motor selection terminal 1 Switchover among the four groups of motor parameters can be implemented through the four state combinations 42 Motor selection terminal 2 Of these two terminals If the PID parameters switchover performed by means of DI terminal FA 18 1 the PID parameters are FA 43 PID parameter switchover 05 to FA 07 when the terminal becomes OFF the PID parameters are FA 15 to FA 17 when this terminal becomes ON 44 User defined fault 1 If these two terminals become ON the AC drive reports Err27 and Err28 respectively and performs fault protection actions based on the setting in F9 49 45 User defined fault 2 This terminal enables the AC drive to switch over Speed conirol Teraue between speed control and torque control When this 46 p q terminal
20. v Front cover Bottom cover terminals AC drive nameplate Grommet 19 Product Information The housing types of the MD380 models with different voltage and power classes are listed in the following table Table 2 1 Housing types for different voltage and power classes Voltage amp Power Class Housing Type Single phase 220 V 0 4 2 2 kW Plastic housing Three phase 220 V 0 4 7 5 kW Plastic housing 11 75 kw Sheet metal housing Three phase 380 V 0 75 15 kW Plastic housing 18 5 400 kW Sheet metal housing Three phase 480 V 0 75 15 kW Plastic housing 18 5 400 kW Sheet metal housing Three 55 500 kW phase 690 V Sheet metal housing 2 3 Technical Specifications Table 2 2 Technical specifications of the MD380 Item Specifications Maximum Vector control 0 300 Hz frequency VIF control 0 320 Hz 0 5 16 kHz Carrier frequency The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted based on the load features Input frequency Digital setting 0 01 Hz resolution Analog setting maximum frequency x 0 02596 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC Standard Control mode Closed loop vector control CLVC functions Voltage Frequency V F control G type 0 5 Hz 150 SFVC 0 Hz 180 CLVC Startup torque P t
21. 0 Control board of f controller the AC drive HMM 1 eae 43 Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3 Wiring of DO terminal When the digital output terminal needs to drive the relay an absorption diode shall be installed between two sides of the relay coil Otherwise it may cause damage to the 24 VDC power supply The driving capacity is not more than 50 mA Do not reverse the polarity of the absorption diode during installation as shown in Figure 3 11 Otherwise the 24 VDC power supply will be damaged immediately once there is digital output Note MD380 User Manual Figure 3 20 DO terminal wiring diagram MD380 24 V DO TX Diode Relay e CME 3 2 5 Electric Wiring of the MD380 Figure 3 21 Electric wiring of the MD380 Braking uni COM Braking resistor it MDBUN Out Circular breakerContador _ neon g MCCB MC Filter L1 T R Three phase 5 U AC power mU 5 v M M 3 V T MD380 69 aS D Main circuit Forward RU
22. Alt voltage V AI2 voltage V AI3 voltage V Count value Length value Load speed display PID setting PID feedback PLC stage Pulse setting frequency kHz Running frequency2 Remaining running time 11 voltage before correction AI2 voltage before correction LED display voltage before correction F7 04 running parameters 2 Linear speed Current poweron time Hour Current running time Minute Pulse setting frequency Hz Communication setting value Encoder feedback speed Hz Main frequency X display Hz Auxiliary frequency Y display Hz 53 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual When the AC drive is powered on again after power failure the parameters that are selected before power failure are displayed Select the required parameters by pressing 5 Set the values of the parameters by referring to the following example 1 Determine the parameters to be displayed Running frequency Bus voltage Output voltage Output current Output frequency Output torque PID feedback Encoder feedback speed 2 Set the binary data F7 03 0000 0000 0111 1101B F7 04 0010 0000 0000 0001B 3 Convert the binary data to hexadecimal data F7 03 007DH F7 04 2001H The values displayed on the operation p
23. DevViceS ccccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaaeeeseaaeesteaeeeeseaeees 249 TA Shielded Cable ntn tended 256 7 5 Solutions to Common Interference 258 Chapter 8 Selection and 260 8 1 Electrical Specifications of the 380 444 4 0 11 260 8 2 Physical Appearance and Overall Dimensions of the 380 263 8 3 Recommended Cable Diameter and Installation Dimensions of Power Terminals 267 8 4 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices 276 8 5 Selection and Installation of External DC 278 8 6 Physical Dimensions of External Operation 280 8 7 Selection of Braking Unit and Braking 280 Chapter 9 Maintenance and 286 9 1 Routine Repair and Maintenance of the 0380 286 9 2 Warranty Agfeemelt is ree eene eden Dac CELER ce Lade d Sd e 287 973 Faults and SOUNS 287 9 4 Common Faults and 292 Safety Information and Precautions Safety Infor
24. 0 No field weakening Field weakening mode of F2 18 1 Direct calculation 1 synchronous motor 2 Automatic adjustment F2 19 Field weakening depth of 509650096 100 synchronous motor F2 20 Maximum field weakening 1 300 50 current 2 21 FI weakening eger 600 100 adjustment gain 2 22 Field weakening integral 2 40 2 multiple Group F3 V F Control Parameters 0 Linear V F 1 Multi point V F 2 Square V F 3 1 2 power V F 4 6 8 1 4 power V F 1 6 power V F 1 8 power V F Reserved F3 00 V F curve setting 10 V F complete separation 11 V F half separation 0 0 fixed torque boost Model F3 01 Torque boost 0 1 30 0 dependent Cut off frequency of torque 0 00 Hz to maximum output F3 02 50 00 Hz boost frequency F3 03 2 VIF frequency 1 00 Hz to F3 05 0 00 Hz F3 04 Multi point V F voltage 1 0 0 100 0 0 0 X V1 86 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Ed Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F3 05 Pa V F frequency 2 es na to F3 07 0 00Hz F3 06 ViFvoltage2 0 100 0 0 0 F3 05 to rated motor frequency F1 04 Multi point V F frequency Note The rated frequencies 0 00 Hz x F3 of motors 2 3 and 4 are respectively set in A2 04 A3 04 and A4 04 F3 08 2 VIF 3 0 100 0
25. Conte Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Output phase loss protection 0 Disabled F9 13 selection Enabled 1 F9 14 1stfault type No fault Reserved Overcurrent during deceleration Overcurrent at constant speed Overvoltage during acceleration 1 0 1 2 Overcurrent during acceleration 3 4 5 6 Overvoltage during deceleration 7 Overvoltage at constant speed 8 Buffer resistance overload 9 Undervoltage 10 AC drive overload 11 Motor overload 12 Power input phase loss 13 Power output phase loss 14 Module overheat 15 External equipment fault F9 15 2 fault type 16 Communication fault _ e 17 Contactor fault 18 Current detection fault 19 Motor auto tuning fault 20 Encoder PG card fault 21 EEPROM read write fault 22 AC drive hardware fault 23 Short circuit to ground 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Accumulative running time reached 27 User defined fault 1 28 User defined fault 2 29 Accumulative power on time reached Load becoming 0 31 PID feedback lost during running 102 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F9 16 3rd latest fault type 40 With wave current limit fault 41 Motor switchover fault during running 42 Too large speed deviation 43 Motor over speed 45 Motor overheat 51 Initial positio
26. F5 02 Relay function T A T B T C 0 Pulse output FMP 1 Switch signal output FMR 0 No output 1 AC drive running 2 Fault output stop 3 Frequency level detection FDT1 output 4 Frequency reached 5 Zero speed running no output at stop 6 Motor overload pre warning 7 AC drive overload pre warning 8 Set count value reached 9 Designated count value reached 10 Length reached 11 PLC cycle complete 12 Accumulative running time reached 13 Frequency limited 92 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F5 03 Extension card relay function P A P B P C F5 04 O1 function selection open collector output terminal F5 04 DO1 function selection open collector output terminal F5 05 Extension card DO2 function 14 Torque limited 15 Ready for RUN 16 AI larger than Al2 17 Frequency upper limit reached 18 Frequency lower limit reached no output at stop 19 Undervoltage state output 20 Communication setting 21 Reserved 22 Reserved 23 Zero speed running 2 having output at stop 24 Accumulative power on time reached 25 Frequency level detection FDT2 output 26 Frequency 1 reached 27 Frequency 2 reached 28 Current 1 reached 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Module temperature reached 36 Software current limit exceeded
27. Product Information Item Specifications Standard 1 high speed pulse output terminal open collector that supports 0 100 kHz square wave signal output 1 digital output DO terminal 1 relay output terminal RUN Output terminal 1 analog output AO terminal that supports 0 20 mA current output or 0 10 V voltage output Expanding capacity 1 DO terminal 1 relay output terminal 1 AO terminal that supports 0 20 mA current output or 0 10 V voltage output LED display It displays the parameters Key locking and It can lock the keys partially or completely and define the function selection function range of some keys so as to prevent mis function Motor short circuit detection at power on input output Display and Protection mode phase loss protection overcurrent protection overvoltage operation on the operation panel protection undervoltage protection overheat protection and overload protection Optional parts LCD operation panel braking unit I O extension card 1 I O extension card 2 user programmable RS485 communication card PROFIBUS DP communication card communication card CANopen communication card differential input PG card UVW differential input PG card resolver PG card and OC input PG card Environment Installation Indoor free from direct sunlight dust corrosive gas location combustible gas oil smoke vapour drip or salt Altitu
28. Same as unit s digit Thousand s digit External equipment fault Err15 Same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit Communication fault Err16 Same as unit s digit Unit s digit Encoder fault Err20 0 Coast to stop 1 Switch over to V F control stop according to the stop mode Fault protection 2 Switch over to V F control F9 48 continue to run 00000 action selection 2 Ten s digit EEPROM read write fault Err21 0 Coast to stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode Hundred s digit reserved Thousand s digit Motor overheat Err25 Fault protection action Same as unit s digit in F9 47 selection 2 F9 48 00000 Ten thousand s digit Accumulative running time reached Same as unit s digit in F9 47 104 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F9 49 Fault protection action selection 3 Unit s digit User defined fault 1 Err27 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten s digit User defined fault 2 Err28 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Hundred s digit Accumulative power on time reached Err29 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Thousand s digit Load becoming 0 Err30 00000 0 Coast to stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 Continue to run at 7 of rated motor frequency and resume to the set frequency if the load
29. The extension card and functions are described in the following table Table 4 4 Extension cards and functions card 2 Size B Modbus Name Model Function Remark It extends five 015 an analog voltage input AI3 isolation analog connected 2 MD38I01 to PT100 PT1000 a relay output 7 DO It supports RS485 and CAN protocols lO extension MD38102 It extends three DI terminals Applied to all models RS485 communication card with encoder card communication MD38TX1 Applied to all models card isolation CANIink communication MD38CAN1 CANIink communication card Applied to all models extension card CANopen communication MD38CAN2 CANopen communication card Applied to all models extension card Profibus DP dies del 2 TRER me pplied to the models communication MD38DP Profibus DP communication card of 3 7 kW and above card User User programmable extension card programmable MD38PC1 completely compatible with Inovance s Applied te thesmadels of 3 7 kW and above card H1U series PLC Differential encoder MD38PG1 Differential encoder interface card Applied to all models interface card requiring 5 V power supply UVW encoder Applied to UVW differential encoder MD38PG3 and used on PMSM requiring 5 V Applied to all models interface card power supply Resolver Applied to resolver excitation int
30. frequency lower limit 2 Run at zero speed F8 15 Droop control 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz F8 16 Accumulative power on time 065000 h Oh de threshold 8 17 Accumulative running time 0 65000 h Oh de threshold 0 No F8 18 Startup protection 0 1 Yes F8 19 detection value o 00 Hz to maximum frequency 50 00Hz Frequency detection o F8 20 hysteresis FDT hysteresis 1 0 0 100 0 FDT1 level 5 096 Fg 2 Detection range of frequency 00 100 maximum frequency 0 096 reached Feo ump frequency during 0 Disabled1 Enabled 0 acceleration deceleration Frequency switchover point F8 25 between acceleration time 1 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz and acceleration time 2 Frequency switchover point F8 26 between deceleration time 1 0 00 to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz and deceleration time 2 F8 27 Terminal JOG preferred 0 Disabled1 Enabled 0 99 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property 28 Frequency detection value oot maximum frequency 50 00Hz x FDT2 Frequency detection oL o o F8 29 hysteresis FDT hysteresis 2 0 0 100 0 FDT2 level 5 096 Faso ANY frequency reaching 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 50 00 Hz x detection value 1 7S F8 31 Any frequency reaching 0 0 100 0 maximum 0 0 detection amplitude 1 frequency Any fre
31. 1 40 Refer to function selection of 0 physical DO in group F5 0 Short with physical Dix internally A1 15 VDOS function selection 1 40 Refer to function selection of 0 physical DO in group F5 A1 16 VDO1 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 17 VDO2 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 18 VDO3 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 19 VDO4 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 20 VDO5 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 227 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit VDO1 0 Positive logic 1 Reverse logic Ten s digit VDO2 0 1 Same as unit s digit A1 21 VDO state selection Hundred s digit VDO3 00000 0 1 Same as unit s digit Thousand s digit VDO4 0 1 Same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit VDO5 0 1 same as unit s digit VDO functions are similar to the DO functions on the control board The VDO can be used together with VDIx to implement some simple logic control If VDO function is set to 0 the state of VDO1 to VDO5 is determined by the state of DI1 to DI5 on the control board In this case VDOx and DIx are one to one mapping relationship If VDO function is set to non 0 the function setting and use of VDOx are the same as DO in group F5 The VDOx state can be set in A1 21 The application examples of VDIx involve the use of VDOx and see the examples for your reference Grou
32. 1 Eliminate external faults 2 Install a reactor or an output filter 3 Check the air filter and the deceleration protection 4 The internal connections cooling fan become loose 4 Connect all cables 5 The main control board is faulty properly 6 The drive board is faulty Contact Me agenton Inovance 7 The inverter module is faulty 1 The output circuit is grounded 1 Eliminate external faults or short circuited 2 Perform the motor auto 2 Motor auto tuning is not tuning performed 3 Increase the acceleration 3 The acceleration time is too time short 4 Adjust the manual torque Overcurrent 4 Manual torque boost or V F boost or V F curve during Err02 curve is not appropriate 5 Adjust the voltage to acceleration 5 The voltage is too low normal range 6 The startup operation is 6 Select rotational speed performed on the rotating motor tracking restart or start the 7 A sudden load is added during Motor after it stops acceleration 7 Remove the added load 8 The AC drive model is of too 8 Select an AC drive of small power class higher power class output ecules grounded 1 Eliminate external faults or short circuited 2 Motor auto tuning is not 2 Perform the motor aut tuning performed Overcurrent 3 The deceleration time is too the deceleration during Err03 short 4 The voltage is too low 5 A sudden load is added during deceleration
33. 14 frequency 0 05 iva 1 0 06 H XY Frequency TH Mex 2 switchover 4 00 to F4 09 limit 3 m AES arn DI1 to D110 141 Set frequency Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 08 Preset frequency 9 00 to maximum frequency valid Wan 50 Hz frequency source is digital setting If the frequency source is digital setting or terminal UP DOWN the value of this parameter is the initial frequency of the AC drive digital setting Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Same direction F0 09 Rotation direction 0 1 Reverse direction You can change the rotation direction of the motor just by modifying this parameter without changing the motor wiring Modifying this parameter is equivalent to exchanging any two of the motor s U V W wires Note The motor will resume running in the original direction after parameter initialization Do not use this function in applications where changing the rotating direction of the motor is prohibited after system commissioning is complete Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 10 Maximum frequency 50 00 320 00 Hz 50 00 Hz When the frequency source is Al pulse setting 015 or multi reference 100 of the input corresponds to the value of this parameter The
34. Current 2 reached Timing reached input limit exceeded Load becoming 0 Reverse running Zero current state 37 Frequency lower limit reached having output at stop 38 Alarm output 39 Motor overheat warning 40 Current running time reached 41 Fault output There is no output if it is the coast to stop fault and undervoltage occurs 93 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property F5 06 FMP function selection 0 Running frequency 0 5 07 1 function selection 1 Set frequency 0 2 Output current 3 Output torque absolute value 4 Output power 5 Output voltage 6 Pulse input 7 AM 8 AI2 F5 08 AO2 function selection 9 1 10 Length 11 Count value 12 Communication setting 13 Motor rotational speed 14 Output current 15 Output voltage 16 Output torque actual value F5 09 a 0 01 100 00 kHz 50 00kHz gt F5 10 AO 1 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 0 5 11 1 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 5 12 2 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 00 5 13 2 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 F5 17 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 F5 18 Relay 1 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 F5 19 2 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 5 20 DO1 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 F5 21 DO2 output delay time 0 0 3
35. i q y 0 setting mode 1 Relative to the maximum frequency This parameter is used to select the base value of the swing amplitude 0 Relative to the central frequency F0 07 frequency source selection It is variable swing amplitude system The swing amplitude varies with the central frequency set frequency 1 Relative to the maximum frequency F0 10 maximum output frequency It is fixed swing amplitude system The swing amplitude is fixed Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FB 01 Swing frequency amplitude 0 0 100 0 0 0 02 Jump frequency amplitude 0 0 50 0 0 0 This parameter is used to determine the swing amplitude and jump frequency amplitude The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit If relative to the central frequency 00 0 the actual swing amplitude AW is the calculation result of F0 07 Frequency source selection multiplied by FB 01 If relative to the maximum frequency FB 00 1 the actual swing amplitude AW is the calculation result of F0 10 Maximum frequency multiplied by FB 01 Jump frequency Swing amplitude AW x FB 02 Jump frequency amplitude If relative to the central frequency FB 00 0 the jump frequency is a variable value If relative to the maximum frequency 00 1 the jump frequency is a fixed value The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit
36. 0 Decided by state of VDOx 1 Decided by A1 06 Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 Hundred s digit VDI3 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDI5 0 1 same as VDI1 00000 A1 06 VDI state selection Unit s digit VDI1 0 Invalid 1 Valid digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 Hundred s digit VDI3 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDI5 0 1 same as VDI1 00000 A1 07 Function selection for Al1 used as DI A1 08 Function selection for AI2 used as DI A1 09 Function selection for AI3 used as DI A1 10 State selection for Al used as DI Unit s digit 1 0 High level valid 1 Low level valid Ten s digit 12 0 1 Same as unit s digit Hundred s digit 0 1 Same as unit s digit 000 146 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property A1 11 VDO 1 function selection 0 Short with physical DIx internally 1 40 Refer to function selection of physical DO in group F5 A1 12 VDO2 function selection 0 Short with physical DIx internally 1 40 Refer to function selection of physical DO in group F5 A1 13 VDO3 function selecti
37. 1 Display The setting of parameter display mode aims to facilitate you to view different types of parameters based on actual requirements The MD380 provides the following three parameter display modes Table 6 9 Three parameter display modes provided by MD380 Name Description AC drive parameter display Display function codes of the AC drive in sequence of FO to FF AO to AF and UO to UF User defined para meter display Display a maximum of 32 user defined parameters included in group FE User modified par ameter display Display the parameters that are modified If one digit of FP 03 is set to 1 you can switch over to different parameter display modes by pressing key The display codes of different parameter types are shown in the following table default the AC drive parameter display mode is used Table 6 10 Display codes of different parameter types Parameter Type Display Code AC drive parameter hH A User defined parameter GE User modified parameter E 221 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual The MD380 provides display of two types of individualized parameters user defined parameters and user modified parameters You defined parameters included group FE You can add maximum of 32 parameters convenient for commissioning In user defined parameter mode symbol u i
38. 2 TM Model F0 17 Acceleration time 1 0 0 6500 05 F0 19 1 dependent 0 65000s F0 19 0 0 00 650 00s F0 19 2 F0 18 Deceleration time 1 0 0 6500 0s F0 19 1 0 65000s F0 19 0 Model dependent Acceleration time indicates the time required by the AC drive to accelerate from 0 Hz to Acceleration Deceleration base frequency F0 25 that is t1 in Figure 6 2 Deceleration time indicates the time required by the AC drive to decelerate from Acceleration Deceleration base frequency F0 25 to 0 Hz that is t2 in Figure 6 2 144 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Figure 6 2 Acceleration Deceleration time Output frequency Hz Acceleration Deceleratio base frequency Set frequency Actual acceleration time I Actual deceleration time 1 1 Set acceleration time t 12 Set deceleration time The MD380 provides totally four groups of acceleration deceleration time for selection You can perform switchover by using a DI terminal Group 1 F0 17 F0 18 Group 2 F8 03 F8 04 Group 3 F8 05 F8 06 Group 4 F8 07 F8 08 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 1s F0 19 Acceleration Deceleration time unit 1 0 1s 1 2 0 015 To satisfy requirements of different applications the MD380 provides three acceleration deceleration time units 1s 0 15 and 0 015 N
39. 220 2 MD380T2 2GB 250 W 2200 2 a MD380T3 7GB 300 W 2130 2 iUd No special description standard MD380T5 5GB 400 W 290 2 MD380T7 5GB 500 W 2650 MD380T11GB 800 W 2430 MD380T15GB 1000 W 2320 MD380T18 5G 1300 W 2250 MD380122G 1500 W RSEN optional braking unit is needed MD380T30G 2500 W 2160 MD380T37G 3 7 kW 216 0 0 External MDBUN 45 T MD380T45G 4 5 kW 2160 External MDBUN 60 T MD380T55G 5 5 kW 280 External MDBUN 60 T MD380T75G 7 5 kW 280 External MDBUN 90 T MD380T90G 4 5 kW x2 280x2 External MDBUN 60 T x 2 MD380T110G 5 5 kW x2 280x2 External MDBUN 60 T x 2 MD380T132G 6 5kWx2 280x2 External MDBUN 90 T x 2 MD380T160G 16 kw 2250 External MDBUN 90 T x2 MD380T200G 20 kW 2250 External MDBU 200 B MD380T220G 22 kW 2250 External MDBU 200 B MD380T250G 12 5 kW x 2 2250x2 External MDBU 200 B x 2 MD380T280G 14 kW x2 gt 2 5 0 2 External MDBU 200 B x 2 MD380T315G 16 kW x2 gt 2 5 0 2 External MDBU 200 B x 2 MD380T355G 17 kW x2 gt 2 5 0 2 External MDBU 200 B x 2 MD380T400G 14 kW x 3 22 5 0x3 External MDBU 200 B x 3 Three phase 480 V MD380 5T0 7GB 150 W gt 300 Q MD380 5T1 5GB 150 W gt 220 Q MD380 5T2 2GB 250 W 2200 2 Buttm MD380 5T3 7GB 300 W 2130 2 No special description standard MD380 5T5 5GB 400 W 290 Q MD380 5T7 5GB 500 W 2650 MD380 5T11GB 800 W 2430 MD380 5T15GB 1000 W 2320 MD380 5T18 5G 1300 W 225 Q Buin 1500W LL RS optional braking unit is needed MD380 5T30G 2500 W 2160
40. 30 0 curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6 12 Al curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6 10 to A6 14 6 00 V Corresponding setting of Al 5 A6 13 curve 5 inflexion 1 input 100 0 100 0 60 0 A6 14 Al curve 5 maximum input A6 14 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 15 Corresponding setting of Al 400 10009 100 096 curve 5 maximum input JUMP point of A11 input 100 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting Jump amplitude of AI1 input 8 8 A6 17 corresponding setting 0 0 100 0 0 5 As 18 MT point of Al2 input 100 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting as 19 ump amplitude of AIZ input 0 co aos 0 0 5 corresponding setting Ag MP point of AI3 input 100 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting as 21 PUMP amplitude of AI3 input 0 996 ane 0 0 5 corresponding setting Group A7 User Programmable Function i 0 Disabled 7 00 User programmable function 0 129 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Gente Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Unit s digit FMR FM used as digital output 0 Controlled by the AC drive 1 Controlled by the user programmable card Ten s digit relay T A T B T C Selection of control mode of Same as unit s digit 7 01 output terminals on the Hundred s digit DO1 0 control board Same as unit s digit Thousand s digit FMR FM used as pulse output Same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit AO1 S
41. 6 The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed 4 Adjust the voltage to normal range 5 Remove the added load 6 Install the braking unit and braking resistor 288 MD380 User Manual Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions 1 The output circuit is grounded or short circuited 1 Eliminate external faults 2 Perform the motor auto 2 Motor auto tuning is not tuning performed Overcurrent at Em04 3 The voltage is too low 3 Adjust the voltage to constant speed normal range 4 A sudden load is added during 4 Remove ihe added load operation 5 The AC drive model is of too ANAC drive of higher power class small power class 1 Adjust the voltage to normal range 2 Cancel the external force 1 The input voltage is too high 2 An external force drives the Overvoltage motor during acceleration or inetall a braking resistor during Err05 3 The acceleration time is too ih ieran acceleration short Increase the acceleration time 4 The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed 4 Install the braking unit and braking resistor 1 Adjust the voltage to normal range 2 Cancel the external force 1 The input voltage is too high 2 An external force drives the Overvoltage motor during deceleration or install the braking resistor during Err06 3 The deceleration time is too au
42. AI3 0 1 same as unit s digit The functions of these parameters are to use Al as DI When Al is used as DI the Al state is high level if the Al input voltage is 7 V or higher and is low level if the Al input voltage is 3 V or lower The Al state is hysteresis if the Al input voltage is between 3 V and 7 V A1 10 is used to determine whether high level valid or low level valid when Al is used as DI The setting of Als used as DI function is the same as that of Dls For details see the descriptions of group F4 The following figure takes Al input voltage as an example to describe the relationship between Al input voltage and corresponding DI state MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Figure 6 33 Relationship of Al input voltage and corresponding DI status Al input voltage 7 VDC 3 VDC ON ON l Al terminal state Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Short with physical DIx internally A1 11 VDO1 function selection 1 40 Refer to function selection of 0 physical DO in group F5 0 Short with physical DIx internally A1 12 VDO2 function selection 1 40 Refer to function selection of 0 physical DO in group F5 0 Short with physical Dix internally A1 13 VDO3 function selection 1 40 Refer to function selection of 0 physical DO in group F5 0 Short with physical Dix internally A1 14 VDOA function selection
43. DAR Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC 1 Closed loop vector control A2 61 Motor 2 control mode CLVC 0 2 Voltage Frequency V F control 0 Same as motor 1 1 Acceleration Deceleration time 1 A2 62 Matar Hccelenatlon 2 Acceleration Deceleration time 2 0 deceleration time 3 Acceleration Deceleration time 3 4 Acceleration Deceleration time 4 0 096 Automatic torque boost A2 63 Motor 2 torque boost 0 1 30 0 dependent 2 65 2 oscillation 0 100 Model e suppression gain dependent Group A3 Motor 3 Parameters 0 Common asynchronous motor 1 Variable frequency A3 00 Motor type selection asynchronous motor 0 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor A3 01 Rated motor power 0 1 1000 0 kw Mode dependent A3 02 Rated motor voltage 1 2000 V Mode dependent 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW A3 03 Rated motor current Mogel 0 1 6553 5 A AC drive power gt 55 kW A3 04 Rated motor frequenc 0 01 Hz to maximum frequenc Model q y q y dependent A3 05 Rated motor rotational 1 65535 RPM Model X speed dependent 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A3 06 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Rotor resistance lt 55 kW Model A3 07 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dep
44. F9 41 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault F9 42 DI status upon 1st fault F9 43 Output terminal status upon 1st fault F9 44 Frequency upon 1st fault 202 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Motor overload Err11 0 Coast to stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 Continue to run Ten s digit Power input phase loss Err12 Fault protection Same as unit s digit nd action selection 1 Hundred s digit Power output phase loss Err13 eee Same as unit s digit Thousand s digit External equipment fault Err15 Same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit Communication fault Err16 Same as unit s digit Unit s digit Encoder fault Err20 0 Coast to stop 1 Switch over to V F control stop according to the stop mode 2 Switch over to V F control continue to run Ten s digit EEPROM read write fault Err21 F9 48 Fault protection 0 Coast to stop 00000 action selection 2 1 Stop according to the stop mode Hundred s digit reserved Thousand s digit Motor overheat Err25 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten thousand s digit Accumulative running time reached Same as unit s digit in F9 47 203 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code F9 49 F9 50 Parameter Name Fault protection action selection 3 Fault protectio
45. F9 64 Voltage rally judging time at 0 00_100 00s 0 50s instantaneous power failure E F9 62 Action judging voltage at 60 0 100 0 standard bus 80 0 instantaneous power failure voltage i 0 Disabled 9 63 Protection upon load 0 becoming 0 1 Enabled i of 0 F9 64 Detection level of load 0 0 100 0 rated motor 10 096 se becoming 0 current F9 65 Detection time of load 0 0 60 0s 1 05 3 becoming 0 Of i 0 1 F9 67 Over speed detection value S 20 0 requency F9 68 Over speed detection time 0 0 60 05 1 0s E 9 69 Detection value of too large 0 0 50 0 maximum 20 0 speed deviation frequency F9 70 Detection time of too large 0 0 60 0s 50s speed deviation Group FA Process Control PID Function 0 FA 01 1 AM 2 AI2 FA 00 PID setting source 3 AIS 0 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting 6 Multi reference FA 01 digital setting 0 0 100 0 50 0 106 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 AM 1 AI2 2 3 Al1 AI2 FA 02 PID feedback source 4 Pulse setting DI5 0 5 Communication setting 6 AI1 AI2 7 MAX 11 AI2 8 MIN AH 12 FA 03 PID action direction action 0 1 Reverse action 04 PID setting feedback range 0 65535 1000 FA 05 Propor
46. For the motor temperature detection see F9 56 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 35 Target torque 200 0 200 0 It displays the current torque upper limit Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 36 Resolver position 0 4095 It displays the current resolver position Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 37 Power factor angle It displays the current power factor angle Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 38 ABZ position 0 65535 It displays the phase A and B pulse counting of the current ABZ or UVW encoder This value is four times the number of pulses that the encoder runs For example if the display is 4000 the actual number of pulses that the encoder runs is 4000 4 1000 The value increase when the encoder rotates in forward direction and decreases when the encoder rotates in reverse direction After increasing to 65535 the value starts to increase from 0 again After decreasing to 0 the value starts to decrease from 65535 again You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing 00 38 Parameter Name Target voltage upon V F separation Output voltage upon V F separation Function Code U0 39 U0 40 Display Range 0 V to rated motor voltage 0 V to rated motor voltage They display the target output voltage and current actual output voltage in the V F separation state For V F sepa
47. Forward F1 30 0 incremental encoder 1 Reserve This parameter is valid only for ABZ incremental encoder F1 28 0 and is used to set the phase sequence of the ABZ incremental encoder It is valid for both asynchronous motor and synchronous motor The A B phase sequence can be obtained through Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning or Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1 31 Encoder installation angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 This parameter is applicable only to synchronous motor It is valid for ABZ incremental encoder UVW incremental encoder resolver and wire saving UVW encoder but invalid for SIN COS encoder It can be obtained through synchronous motor no load auto turning or with load auto tuning After installation of the synchronous motor is complete the value of this parameter must be obtained by motor auto tuning Otherwise the motor cannot run properly Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default U V W phase sequence of UVW 0 Forward F1 32 0 encoder 1 Reverse F1 33 UVW encoder angle offset 0 0 359 9 0 0 These two parameters are valid only when the UVW encoder is applied to a synchronous motor They can be obtained by synchronous motor no load auto tuning or with load auto tuning After installation of the synchronous motor is complete the values of these two parameters must be
48. The AC drive will drive the motor to accelerate decelerate and run in the forward reverse direction and the RUN indicator is ON The auto tuning lasts approximately 2 minutes When the preceding display information disappears and the operation panel returns to the normal parameter display status it indicates that the auto tuning is complete The AC drive will automatically calculate the following motor parameters Motor Parameter Motor 1 F1 06 Stator resistance asynchronous motor F1 07 Rotor resistance asynchronous motor F1 08 Leakage inductive reactance asynchronous motor F1 09 Mutual inductive reactance asynchronous motor F1 10 No load current asynchronous motor Motor 2 A2 06 to A2 10 defined the same as F1 06 to F1 10 Motor3 A3 06 to A3 10 defined the same as F1 06 to F1 10 Motor 4 A4 06 to A4 10 defined the same as F1 06 to F1 10 If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load set F1 37 Auto tuning selection to 1 Asynchronous motor static tuning and then press the operation panel The motor auto tuning starts Note In the synchronous motor system driven by MD380 and encoder for signal feedback is required Therefore you need to set the encoder parameters correctly before the auto tuning During the synchronous motor auto tuning the synchronous motor must rotate and the best auto tuning mode is no load dynamic auto tuning If it is not allowed you can
49. kHz Running frequency2 Remaining running time 11 voltage before correction Al2 voltage before correction Al3 voltage before correction LED display 1 F7 04 running 0 parameters 2 L Linear speed Current poweron time Hour Current running time Minute t Pulse setting frequency Hz Communication setting value Encoder feedback speed Hz Main frequency X display Hz Auxiliary frequency Y display Hz If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running set the corresponding bit to 1 and set F7 03 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number These two parameters are used to set the parameters that can be viewed when the AC drive is in the running state You can view a maximum of 32 running state parameters that are displayed from the lowest bit of F7 03 185 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Parameter 0000 FFFF 7 6 5 4 31 2 Set frequency Hz Bus voltage V Dl input status DO output status Al voltage V 12 voltage V AI3 voltage V Count value LED display stop parameters Length value PLC stage Load speed PID setting Pulse settin frequency kHz Reserved Reserved Reserved If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running set the corresponding
50. of the MD380 all support the corresponding setting jump function which fixes the Al input corresponding setting at the jump point when Al input corresponding setting jumps around the jump range For example 11 input voltage jumps around 5 00 V and the jump range is 4 90 5 10 minimum input 0 00 V corresponds to 0 0 and maximum input 10 00 V corresponds to 100 096 The detected 11 input corresponding setting varies between 49 096 and 51 096 If you set A6 16 to 50 0 and A6 17 to 1 096 then the obtained AI1 input corresponding setting is fixed to 50 096 eliminating the fluctuation effect Group AT User Programmable Function Group A8 Point point Communication Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default e 0 Disabled A8 00 Point point communication selection 0 1 Enabled It is used to decide whether to enable point point communication Point point communication indicates direct communication between two or more MD380 AC drives by using CANlink The master gives target frequency or target torque to one or multiple slaves according to its own frequency or torque signal If multiple AC drives are connected by using CANlink cards the terminal resistor of the CANlink card connected to the end AC drive shall be switched on If point point communication is enabled the CANlink communication addresses of the AC drives are automatically matched without special setting The point point
51. recovers Ten thousand s digit PID feedback lost during running Err31 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 F9 50 Fault protection action selection 4 Unit s digit Too large speed deviation Err42 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten s digit Motor over speed Err43 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Hundred s digit Initial position 00000 fault Err51 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Thousand s digit Speed feedback fault Err52 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten thousand s digit Reserved F9 54 Frequency selection for continuing to run upon fault 0 Current running frequency 1 Set frequency 2 Frequency upper limit 3 Frequency lower limit 4 Backup frequency upon abnormality 105 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Be Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 1 F9 55 Backup frequency upon 0 0 100 0 maximum 100 096 abnormality frequency 0 No temperature sensor F9 56 Type of motor temperature 4 PT400 4 28 2 1000 9 57 Motor overheat protection 0 200 110 threshold F9 58 Motor overheat warning 0 200 90 threshold 0 Invalid F9 59 selection 1 Decelerate 0 instantaneous power failure 2 Decelerate to stop Action pause judging voltage F9 60 instantaneous power 80 0 100 0 90 0 failure
52. size F Rated Input Recommended Torque of Output Power Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model MD380 2T37G 157 00 70 GTNR70 8 MD380 2T45G 180 00 95 GTNR95 10 MD380 2T55G 214 00 120 GTNR120 12 MD380T37G 76 00 25 GTNR25 8 MD380T45G 92 00 35 10 5 GTNR35 8 MD380T55G 113 00 50 GTNR50 8 MD380 5T37G 76 00 25 GTNR25 8 MD380 5T45G 92 00 35 GTNR35 8 MD380 5T55G 113 00 50 GTNR50 8 Figure 8 8 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size G im M10 combination scew IT n R IS T i C POWER MOTOR E re Table 8 8 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size G Rated Input Torque of p Output Power Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model MD380 2T75G 307 00 150 GTNR150 10 MD380T75G 157 00 70 GTNR70 10 MD380T90G 180 00 95 20 GTNR95 10 MD380 5T75G 157 00 70 GTNR70 10 MD380 5T90G 180 00 95 GTNR95 10 270 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Figure 8 9 Dimensions of power te
53. the digital setting frequency value resumes to the value of F0 08 Preset frequency after the AC drive stops The modification by using keys or the terminal UP DOWN function is cleared If F0 23 is set to 1 the digital setting frequency value is the set frequency at the moment when the AC drive stops The modification by using keys or the terminal UP DOWN function remains effective Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Motor parameter group 1 Motor parameter group 1 Motor parameter group 2 F0 24 Selection 2 Motor parameter group 3 3 Motor parameter group 4 The MD380 can drive four motors at different time You can set the motor nameplate parameters respectively independent motor auto tuning different control modes and parameters related to running performance respectively for the four motors Motor parameter group 1 corresponds to groups F1 and F2 Motor parameter groups 2 3 and 4 correspond to groups A2 A3 and A4 respectively You can select the current motor parameter group by using F0 24 or perform switchover between the motor parameter groups by means of a DI terminal If motor parameters selected by means of F0 24 conflict with those selected by means of DI terminal the selection by DI is preferred 146 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Maximum frequency F0 10 Acceleration Dec
54. 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h 41 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 11 FC 42 Running time of simple PLC reference 12 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple PEAS PLC reference 12 os d FC 44 Running time of simple PLC reference 13 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h 45 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 13 FC 46 Running time of simple PLC reference 14 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple POST PLC reference 14 0 3 0 48 Running time of simple PLC reference 15 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h 49 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 15 0 5 50 Time unit of simple PLC running 0 1 h hour Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Set by FC 00 1 Al 2 AI2 FC 51 Reference 0 source 0 4 Pulse setting 5 PID 6 Set by preset frequency F0 08 modified via terminal UP DOWN It determines the setting channel of reference 0 You can perform convenient switchover between the setting channels When multi reference or simple PLC is used as frequency Source the switchover between two frequency sources can be realized easily 218 MD380 User Manual Group FD User defined Parameters Group FE User Defined Function Codes Description of Function Codes Func
55. 01 DI2 function selection 12 Multi reference terminal 1 13 Multi reference terminal 2 14 Multi reference terminal 3 15 Multi reference terminal 4 F4 02 DI3 function selection 16 Terminal T foracceleration 9 deceleration time selection 17 Terminal 2 for acceleration deceleration time selection 18 Frequency source switchover 19 UP and DOWN setting clear terminal operation panel 20 Command source switchover terminal 1 21 Acceleration Deceleration F4 03 DIA function selection prohibited 12 22 PID pause 23 PLC status reset 24 Swing pause 25 Counter input 26 Counter reset 27 Length count input F4 04 015 function selection 28 Length reset 13 29 Torque control prohibited 88 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 30 Pulse input enabled only for DI5 31 Reserved 32 Immediate DC braking F4 05 016 function selection 33 Normally closed NC input of 0 external fault 34 Frequency modification forbidden 35 Reverse PID action direction 36 External STOP terminal 1 37 Command source switchover terminal 2 F4 06 017 function selection 38 PID integral pause 0 39 Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency 40 Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency F4 07 DI8 function selecti
56. 13 Al curve 1 minimum input 0 00 V to F4 15 0 00 V F4 14 of Al 100 00 100 0 0 0 curve 1 minimum input F4 15 Al curve 1 maximum input F4 13 to 10 00 V 10 00 V F4 16 Corresponding setting GIAI 100 00 100 0 100 0 curve 1 maximum input F4 17 Alt filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 These parameters used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage the corresponding setting When the analog input voltage exceeds the maximum value F4 15 the maximum value is used When the analog input voltage is less than the minimum value F4 13 the value set in F4 34 Setting for Al less than minimum input is used When the analog input is current input 1 mA current corresponds to 0 5 V voltage F4 17 Al1 filter time is used to set the software filter time of Al1 If the analog input is liable to interference increase the value of this parameter to stabilize the detected analog input However increase of the Al filter time will slow the response of analog detection Set this parameter properly based on actual conditions 168 MD380 User Manual In different applications 100 of analog input corresponds to different nominal values For Description of Function Codes details refer to the description of different applications Two typical setting examples are shown in the following figure Figure 6 11 Corresponding relationship between analog input and set v
57. 2 CANopen bridge Group F1 Motor 1 Parameters F1 00 Motor type selection 0 Common asynchronous motor 1 Variable frequency asynchronous motor 1 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor F1 01 Rated motor power Model 0 1 1000 0 kW dependent F1 02 Rated motor voltage Model dependent F1 03 Rated motor current 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW Model 0 1 6553 5 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW F1 04 Rated motor frequency Model 0 01 Hz to maximum frequency dependent F1 05 Rated motor rotational speed Model 1 65535 RPM dependent 83 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual pe Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model F1 06 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Rotor resistance lt 55 kW Model F1 07 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Leakage inductive reactance 5 55 kW Model F1 08 asynchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power 55 kW 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power Mutual inductive reactance lt 55 kW Model F1 09 asynchronous motor 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 to F1 03
58. 2T3 7GB 8 9 14 6 13 3 7 5 0 132 MD380 2T5 5GB 17 26 25 5 5 7 5 0 214 MD380 2T7 5GB 21 35 32 7 5 10 0 288 MD380 2T11G 30 46 5 45 11 15 0 489 MD380 2T15G 40 62 60 15 20 0 608 MD380 2T18 5G 57 76 75 18 5 25 0 716 MD380 2T22G 69 92 91 22 30 0 887 MD380 2T30G 85 113 112 30 40 1 11 MD380 2T37G 114 157 150 37 50 1 32 MD380 2T45G 134 180 176 45 60 1 66 MD380 2T55G 160 214 210 55 75 1 98 MD380 2T75G 231 307 304 75 100 2 02 Three phase 380 V 50 60 Hz MD380T0 7GB 1 5 3 4 2 1 0 75 1 0 027 MD380T1 5GB 5 3 8 1 5 2 0 050 MD380T2 2GB 5 8 5A 2 2 3 0 066 MD380T3 7GB 5 9 10 5 9 3 7 5 0 120 MD380T5 5GB 8 9 14 6 13 5 5 7 5 0 195 MD380T7 5GB 11 20 5 17 7 5 10 0 262 260 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Power Input Output Adaptable Thermal Power Model Capacity Current A Current Motor Consumption kVA A kW HP kW MD380T11GB 17 26 25 11 15 0 445 MD380T15GB 21 35 32 15 20 0 553 MD380T18 5G 24 38 5 37 18 5 25 0 651 MD380T22G 30 46 5 45 22 30 0 807 MD380T30G 40 62 60 30 40 1 01 MD380T37G 57 76 75 37 50 1 20 MD380T45G 69 92 91 45 60 1 51 MD380T55G 85 113 112 55 75 1 80 MD380T75G 114 157 150 75 100 1 84 MD380T90G 134 180 176 90 125 2 08 MD380T110G 160 214 210 110 150 2 55 MD380T132G 192 256 253 132 200 3 06 MD380T160G 231 307 304 160 250 3 61 MD380T200G 250 385 377 200 300 4 42 MD380T220G 280 430 426 220 300 4 87 MD3
59. 4 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 MD380 5T1 5GB 5 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 MD380 5T2 2GB 5 8 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 MD380 5T3 7GB 10 5 MD ACL 10 4T 372 2 MD380 5T5 5GB 14 6 MD ACL 15 4T 552 2 MD380 5T7 5GB 20 5 MD ACL 30 4T 113 2 MD380 5T 11GB 26 MD ACL 30 4T 113 2 MD380 5T 15GB 35 MD ACL 40 4T 153 2 MD380 5T 18 5G 38 5 MD ACL 40 4T 153 2 MD380 5T22G 46 5 MD ACL 50 4T 183 2 MD380 5T30G 62 MD ACL 80 4T 303 2 MD380 5T37G 76 MD ACL 80 4T 303 2 MD380 5T45G 92 MD ACL 120 4T 453 2 MD380 5T55G 113 MD ACL 120 4T 453 2 MD380 5T75G 157 MD ACL 200 4T 753 2 252 MD380 User Manual AC Drive Model Rated Input Current A AC Input Reactor Model Inovance MD380 5T90G 180 MD ACL 200 4T 753 2 MD380 5T 110G 214 MD ACL 250 4T 114 2 MD380 5T132G 256 MD ACL 330 4T 164 2 MD380 5T160G 307 MD ACL 330 4T 164 2 MD380 5T200G 385 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380 5T220G 430 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380 5T250G 468 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380 5T280G 525 MD ACL 660 4T 304 2 MD380 5T315G 590 MD ACL 660 4T 304 2 MD380 5T355G 665 MD ACL 800 4T 384 2 MD380 5T400G 785 MD ACL 800 4T 384 2 Three phase power 690 V 50 60 Hz MD380 7T55G 70 ACL 0080 EISC EM19B MD380 7T75G 90 ACL 0090 EISC EM19B MD380 7T90G 105 ACL 0120 EISH EM13B MD380 7T110G 130 ACL 0120 EISH EM13B MD380 7T132G 170 ACL 0150 EISH EM11B MD380 7T160G 200 ACL 0200 EISH E80UB MD380 7T200G 235 ACL 0
60. 5 Via communication 6 MIN AI1 AI2 7 MIN AI1 AI2 230 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Digital setting of A2 48 torque upper limit in 0 0 200 0 150 0 speed control mode A2 51 Excitation adjustment 020000 2000 proportional gain A2 52 Excitation adjustment 0 20000 1300 integral gain A2 53 Torque adjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain A254 Torque adjustment 6_20000 1300 integral gain Unit s digit Integral separated a2 55 Speed loop integral Disabled 0 property 1 Enabled 0 No field weakening A2 56 weakening moue 1 Direct calculation 0 of synchronous motor 2 Adjustment Field weakening A2 57 degree of 50 500 100 synchronous motor Asso 1 300 50 weakening current Field weakening A2 59 automatic adjustment 10 500 100 gain 2 60 Field weakening 2 40 2 integral multiple 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC 0 A2 61 Motor 2 control mode 1 Closed loop vector control CLVC 2 Voltage Frequency V F control 0 Same as motor 1 1 Acceleration Deceleration time 1 A2 62 Motor 2 Acceleration Deceleration time 2 0 deceleration time 3 Acceleration Deceleration time 3 4 Acceleration Deceleration time 4 0 0 Automatic torque boost A2 63 Motor 2 torque boost j E Mogel 0 1 30 0 dependent 2 65 2 oscilla
61. 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft D inductance lt 55 kW Model A2 17 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft Q inductance lt 55 kW Model A2 18 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 2 20 Back EMF synchronous 0 1 6553 5 V Model 79 motor dependent Aor Encoder pulses per 1 65535 1024 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder A2 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN COS encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder 0 Forward 2 30 phase sequence of ABZ 0 incremental encoder 1 Reserve A2 31 Encoder installation angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 0 Forward 2 32 U V W phase sequence of 0 fe UVW encoder 1 Reverse A2 33 UVW encoder angle offset 0 0 359 9 0 0 2 34 Number of pole pairs of 165535 1 resolver ire 0 0s No action A2 36 Encoder wire break fault 0 0s X detection time 0 1 10 05 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete A2 37 Auto tuning selection auto tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning 2 38 n loop proportional gain 0 100 30 A2 39 Speed loop integral time 1 0 01 10 00s 0 50s A2 40 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to A2 43 5 00 Hz 2 41 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0 100 15 119 Function Code Table MD380 User Manu
62. 75 C 0 Fan working during runnin F8 48 Cooling fan control 9 a B 0 1 Fan working continuously Dormant frequency 8 51 to F8 49 Wakeup frequency maximum frequency FO 10 0 00 Hz F8 50 Wakeup delay time 0 0 6500 0s 0 0s F8 51 Dormant frequency ur Hz to wakeup frequency F8 0 00 Hz F8 52 Dormant delay time 0 0 6500 05 0 05 Fco running ume 0 0 6500 0 min 0 0 min reached 8 54 OUtput power correction 200 0 100 0 x coefficient Group F9 Fault and Protection i 0 Disabled F9 00 Motor overload protection 1 selection 1 Enabled F9 01 Motor overload protection 0 20 10 00 1 00 Je gain Motor overload waming 50 100 80 coefficient F9 03 Overvoltage stall gain 0 no stall overvoltage 100 0 9 04 Overvoltage stall protective 120 150 130 voltage F9 05 Overcurrent stall gain 0 100 20 F9 06 Overcurrent stall protective 4009520096 150 X current 9 97 Short circuit to ground upon 0 Disabled power on 1 Enabled F9 09 Fault auto reset times 0 20 0 i i 0 Not act F9 10 DO action during fault auto 0 reset 1 Act 9 11 Time interval of fault auto 0 1s 100 0s 1 0s reset Unit s digit Input phase loss protection Input phase loss protection rens digit Contactor energizing F9 12 contactor energizing 11 protection selection protection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 101 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function
63. AC drive The motor must be disconnected from the AC drive during the insulation test A 500 V mega Ohm meter is recommended for the test The insulation resistance must not be less than 5 Input terminals U V W ofthe motor UND L_ Ground Thermal protection of motor If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the AC drive especially when the AC drive s rated power is greater than the motor s adjust the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the AC drive or install a thermal relay in the motor circuit for protection Running at over 50 Hz The AC drive provides frequency output of 0 to 3200 Hz Up to 300 Hz is supported if the AC drive runs in CLVC and SFVC mode If the AC drive is required to run at over 50 Hz consider the capacity of the machine Vibration of mechanical device The AC drive may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency Motor heat and noise The output of the AC drive is pulse width modulation PWM wave with certain harmonic frequencies and therefore the motor temperature noise and vibration are slightly greater than those when the AC drive runs at power frequency 50 Hz 13 Safety Information and Precautions MD380 User Manual 8 Voltage sensitive device or capacitor on output side of the AC drive Do not ins
64. AC drive power lt No load current 55 kW Model F1 10 asynchronous motor 0 1 to F1 03 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model F1 16 synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft D inductance lt 55 kW Model F1 17 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft Q inductance lt 55 kW Model F1 18 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW F4 20 Back EMF synchronous 0 1 6553 5 V Model motor dependent 1 2 pulses 1 65535 1024 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder F1 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN COS encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder 0 Forward F4 30 AIB phase sequence of ABZ 0 X incremental encoder 1 Reserve 84 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table ee Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F1 31 Encoder installation angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 U V W phase sequence of 0 Forward F1 32 UVW encoder 1 Reverse F1 33 UVW encoder angle offset 0 0 359 9 0 0 F1 34 Number of pole pairs of 1 65525 1 resolver ire 0 0s No action 1 36 Encoder wire break fault 0 0s re detection time 0 1 10 05 0 N
65. Allocate corresponding DI terminal with function 27 Length count input in applications If the pulse frequency is high DI5 must be used Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FB 08 Set count value 1 65535 1000 FB 09 Designated count value 1 65535 1000 The count value needs to be collected by DI terminal Allocate the corresponding DI terminal with function 25 Counter input in applications If the pulse frequency is high DI5 must be used When the count value reaches the set count value FB 08 the DO terminal allocated with function 8 Set count value reached becomes ON Then the counter stops counting When the counting value reaches the designated counting value FB 09 the DO terminal allocated with function 9 Designated count value reached becomes ON Then the counter continues to count until the set count value is reached FB 09 should be equal to or smaller than FB 08 214 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Figure 6 31 Reaching the set count value and designated count value Count pulses input n Ul Ul st lo 12 Count value 12 3 10 1 12 19 20 21 12 Count pulses input 00 12 0 Fb 09 111 Designated count 00 12 11 value reached output Fb 08 20 Set count value 00 12 20 reached output Grou
66. DI5 f Core Te DI to D110 ion FD 00 to FD 05 _ 9 computer Communication gt H1000 register Emana 1 setting The relationship between the target running frequency and the main frequency source and auxiliary frequency source is set in F0 07 as follows 1 Main frequency source X The main frequency source is directly used to set the target running frequency 2 Auxiliary frequency source Y The auxiliary frequency source is directly used to set the target running frequency 3 X and Y operation There are four operation methods namely X Y X Y maximum of X and Y and minimum of X and Y 4 Frequency switchover A DI terminal is used to switch over between the preceding three frequency setting channels 61 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual The following figure shows how to set the relationship in F0 07 in which the bold line indicates the default setting Figure 4 19 Relationship between the target running frequency and main and auxiliary frequency sources Frequency Frequency source Frequency source Binding command Target running Source pose operation _____ Switchover ___ _ source frequency ___ frequency selection F source Y F0 07 unit s digit Main frequency source X F0 27 default value 000 Hundreds digit Ten s digit Unit s digit Communication Terminal Operation panel Y F0 07 er s digi
67. F0 00 G P type display 2 P type variable torque load e g fan dependent and pump This parameter is used to display the delivered model and cannot be modified 1 Applicable to constant torque load with rated parameters specified 2 Applicable to variable torque load fan and pump with rated parameters specified Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC F0 01 hdd 1 Closed loop vector control CLVC 0 2 Voltage Frequency V F control 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC It indicates open loop vector control and is applicable to high performance control applications such as machine tool centrifuge wire drawing machine and injection moulding machine One AC drive can operate only one motor 1 Closed loop vector control CLVC It is applicable to high accuracy speed control or torque control applications such as high speed paper making machine crane and elevator One AC drive can operate only one motor An encoder must be installed at the motor side and a PG card matching the encoder must be installed at the AC drive side 2 Voltage Frequency control It is applicable to applications with low load requirements or applications where AC drive operates multiple motors such as fan and pump Note f vector control is used motor auto tuning must be performed because the advantages of vector control can
68. Setting Range Default F8 38 Any current reaching 1 0 0 300 0 rated motor current 100 096 F8 39 Any current reaching 1 5 oo 460 0 rated motor current 0 0 amplitude F8 40 Any current reaching 2 0 0 300 0 rated motor current 100 096 F8 41 Any current reaching 2 4 oec 300 0 rated motor current 0 096 amplitude If the output current of the AC drive is within the positive and negative amplitudes of any current reaching detection value the corresponding DO becomes ON The MD380 provides two groups of any current reaching detection parameters including current detection value and detection amplitudes as shown in the following figure 195 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Figure 6 24 Any current reaching detection Output current Any current reaching amplitude Any current reaching amplitude Any current emm reaching ON ON ON Any guent reaching or or letection signal DO or relay Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default C 0 Disabled 8 42 Timing function 0 1 Enabled 0 F8 44 1 AI F8 43 Timing duration source ibis 0 3 AIS 10096 of analog input corresponds to the value of F8 44 F8 44 Timing duration 0 0 6500 0 min 0 0 min These parameters are used to implement the AC drive timing function If F8 42 is set to 1 the AC drive starts to time at startup When the set timing duration is reac
69. Terminal 1 Acceleration Deceleration Time Selection Corresponding Parameters OFF OFF Acceleration Deceleration time 1 F0 17 F0 18 OFF ON Acceleration Deceleration time 2 F8 03 F8 04 ON OFF Acceleration Deceleration time 3 F8 05 F8 06 ON ON Acceleration Deceleration time 4 F8 07 F8 08 Two motor selection terminals have four state combinations corresponding to four motors as listed in the following table Table 6 4 State combinations of two motor selection terminals Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Selected Motor Corresponding Parameters OFF OFF Motor 1 Group F1 Group F2 OFF ON Motor 2 Group A2 ON OFF Motor 3 Group A3 ON ON Motor 4 Group A4 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 10 DI filter time 0 000 1 000s 0 010s It is used to set the software filter time of DI terminal status If DI terminals are liable to interference and may cause malfunction increase the value of this parameter to enhance the anti interference capability However increase of DI filter time will reduce the response of DI terminals Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Two line mode 1 1 Two line mode 2 Terminal command mode 0 2 Three line mode 1 3 Three line mode 2 F4 11 This parameter is used to set the mode in which the AC drive is controlled by external terminals The following uses DI1 DI2 and DI3 among
70. When the deviation is between FA 19 and FA 20 the PID parameters are the linear interpolated value of the two groups of parameter values 210 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Figure 6 28 PID parameters switchover PI parameters Group 1 of PID parameters FA 05 FA 06 FA 07 Group 2 of PID parameters FA 15 FA 16 FA 17 FA 19 FA 20 PID deviation Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 21 PID initial value 0 0 100 0 0 0 22 PID initial value holding time 0 00 650 00s 0 00s When the AC drive starts up the PID starts closed loop algorithm only after the PID output is fixed to the PID initial value FA 21 and lasts the time set in FA 22 Figure 6 29 PID initial value function Output frequency PID initial value __ __ FA 21 Time PID initial value holding time FA 22 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 23 Maximum deviation between two PID 0 00 100 00 4 0096 outputs in forward direction FA 24 Maximum deviation between two PID 0 00 100 00 1 00 outputs in reverse direction This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID outputs 2 ms per PID output to suppress the rapid change of PID output and stabilize the running of the AC drive FA 23 and FA 24 respectively correspond to the maximum absolute value of the output deviation in forward direction and in reverse
71. a braking resistor braking resistor U V W AC drive output terminals Connect to a three phase motor ay Grounding terminal Must be grounded Description of Main Circuit Terminals of Three phase AC drive 1 E Table 3 2 Description of main circuit terminals of three phase AC drive Terminal Name Description RSi Three phase power supply Connect to the three phase AC power supply input terminals Common DC bus input point Positive and negative Connect the external braking unit to the AC drive of terminals of DC bus 18 5 kW and above 220 V and 37 kW and above other voltage classes Connectinatenninals of Connect to the braking resistor for the AC drive of PB 9 15 kW and below 220 V and 30 kW below braking resistor other voltage classes AGE Connecting Connect to an external reactor external reactor U V W AC drive output terminals Connect to a three phase motor Grounding terminal Must be grounded 36 MD380 User Manual 3 2 2 Wiring of AC Drive Main Circuit Table 3 3 Wiring of the AC drive main circuit Mechanical and Electrical Installation Single phase 220 V Three phase 220 V 15 kW and Below Braking resistor MCCB Singlephase z 220v OL ET
72. and are obtained by means of motor auto tuning Only F1 06 to F1 08 can be obtained through static motor auto tuning Through complete motor auto tuning encoder phase sequence and current loop PI can be obtained besides the parameters in F1 06 to F1 10 Each time Rated motor power F1 01 or Rated motor voltage F1 02 is changed the AC drive automatically restores values of F1 06 to F1 10 to the parameter setting for the common standard Y series asynchronous motor If it is impossible to perform motor auto tuning onsite manually input the values of these parameters according to data provided by the motor manufacturer Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1 16 Stator resistance 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 O AC drive power 55 kW dependent 1 17 Shaft D inductance 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent F1 18 Shaft Q inductance 0 01 655 35 mH drive power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive power 55 kW dependent 22 motor 155520 F1 16 to F 20 are synchronous motor parameters These parameters are unavailable on the nameplate of most synchronous motors and can be obtained by means of Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Through Synchronous motor with load auto tunin
73. and frequency lower limit 213 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FB 03 Swing frequency cycle 0 0 3000 05 10 05 04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient 0 0 100 0 50 0 03 specifies the time of a complete swing frequency cycle FB 04 specifies the time percentage of triangular wave rising time to FB 03 Swing frequency cycle Triangular wave rising time FB 03 Swing frequency cycle x FB 04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient unit s Triangular wave falling time FB 03 Swing frequency cycle x 1 04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient unit s Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FB 05 Set length 0 65535 m 1000 m FB 06 Actual length 0 65535 m 0m FB 07 Number of pulses per meter 0 1 6553 5 100 0 The preceding parameters are used for fixed length control The length information is collected by DI terminals FB 06 Actual length is calculated by dividing the number of pulses collected by the DI terminal by FB 07 Number of pulses each meter When the actual length FB 06 exceeds the set length in FB 05 the DO terminal allocated with function 10 Length reached becomes ON During the fixed length control the length reset operation can be performed via the DI terminal allocated with function 28 For details see the descriptions of F4 00 to F4 09
74. and valid when being disconnected from COM Group F6 Start Stop Control Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Direct start F6 00 Start mode 1 Rotational speed tracking restart 0 2 Pre excited start asynchronous motor 0 Direct start Ifthe DC braking time is set to 0 the AC drive starts to run at the startup frequency Ifthe DC braking time is not 0 the AC drive performs DC braking first and then starts to run at the startup frequency It is applicable to small inertia load application where the motor is likely to rotate at startup 1 Rotational speed tracking restart The AC drive judges the rotational speed and direction of the motor first and then starts at the tracked frequency Such smooth start has no impact on the rotating motor It is applicable to the restart upon instantaneous power failure of large inertia load To ensure the performance of rotational speed tracking restart set the motor parameters in group F1 correctly 2 Pre excited start asynchronous motor It is valid only for asynchronous motor and used for building the magnetic field before the motor runs For pre excited current and pre excited time see parameters of F6 05 and F6 06 Ifthe pre excited time is 0 the AC drive cancels pre excitation and starts to run at startup frequency If the pre excited time is not 0 the AC drive pre excites first before startup improving the dynamic response of the
75. as FE 00 F0 00 FE 26 User defined function code 26 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 27 User defined function code 27 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 28 User defined function code 28 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 29 User defined function code 29 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE is user defined parameter group You can select the required parameters from all MD380 functions codes and add them into this group convenient for view and modification 219 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Group FE provides a maximum of 30 user defined parameters If FE 00 is displayed it indicates that group FE is null After you enter user defined function code mode the displayed parameters are defined by FE 00 to FE 31 and the sequence is consistent with that in group FE Group FP User Password Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FP 00 User password 0 65535 0 If it is set to any non zero number the password protection function is enabled After password has been set and taken effect you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu If the entered password is incorrect you cannot view or modify parameters If FP 00 is set to 00000 the previously set user password is cleared and the password protection function is disabled Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No operation 1 Restore factory settings except motor FP 01 Restore default parameters 0 settings 2 Clear records
76. bit to 1 and set F7 05 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F7 06 Load speed display coefficient 0 0001 6 5000 1 0000 This parameter is used to adjust the relationship between the output frequency of the drive and the load speed For details see the description of F7 12 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F7 07 Heatsink temperature of inverter module 0 0 100 0 C It is used to display the insulated gate bipolar transistor IGBT temperature of the inverter module and the IGBT overheat protection value of the inverter module depends on the model Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F7 08 Temporary software version 0 0 100 0 C used to display the temporary software version of the control board 186 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name F7 09 Setting Range Default 0 65535 h Accumulative running time It is used to display the accumulative running time of the AC drive After the accumulative running time reaches the value set in F8 17 the terminal with the digital output function 12 becomes ON Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F7 10 Product number AC drive product number F7 11 Software version Software version of control
77. cable must be used and the cable length must be less than 20 m as shown in following figure Figure 3 15 Wiring mode of Al terminals Potentiometer lt 20m 11 L GND PE MD380 A 10 41 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual In applications where the analog signal suffers severe interference install filter capacitor or ferrite magnetic core at the analog signal source Figure 3 16 Install filter capacitor or ferrite magnetic core Cross or wind two or three coils in the same direction MD380 Alt Lc 710 022 uF 50 V GND Ferrite magnetic core 2 Wiring of DI terminals Generally select shielded cable no longer than 20 m When active driving is adopted necessary filtering measures shall be taken to prevent the interference to the power supply It is recommended to use the contact control mode a SINK wiring Figure 3 17 Wiring in SINK mode 5 lt vcc i Signal x DA 24k c EE H Control board 1 ofthe AC drive External controller This is the most commonly used wiring mode To apply external power supply remove jumpers between 24 V and OP and between COM and CME and connect the positive pole of external power supply to OP and negative pole to CME In such wiring mode the DI terminals of different AC drives cannot be connected in p
78. contactor Do not use it to Fault reset contactor start or stop the AC drive because such Multi reference operation reduces the service life of the terminal 1 AC drive Multi reference AC input Suppress the high order harmonic aa i terminal 2 reactor to improve the power factor Noise filter on input side Reduce the electromagnetic interference on the input side Reliably ground the motor and the AC drive to prevent electric shock Braking unit Braking resistor 2 3 AC output reactor P t 24 MD380 User Manual Product Information 2 4 1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices Table 2 3 Description of peripheral electrical devices Part Mounting Location Function Description MCCB Power receiving side Interrupt the power supply when overcurrent occurs on downstream devices Start and stop the AC drive Contactor Between MCCB and Do not start and stop the AC drive frequently by switching AC drive input side the contactor on and off less than twice per minute nor use it to directly start the AC drive Improve the power factor of the input side Eliminate the higher harmonics of the input side AC input oa effectively and prevent other devices from being reactor ACidriveunput side damaged due to distortion of the vo
79. direction 211 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Integral separated 0 Invalid 1 Valid FA 25 PID integral property Ten s digit Whether to stop integral 00 operation when the output reaches the limit 0 Continue integral operation 1 Stop integral operation Integral separated If it is set to valid the PID integral operation stops when the DI allocated with function 38 PID integral pause is ON In this case only proportional and differential operations take effect If it is set to invalid integral separated remains invalid no matter whether the DI allocated with function 38 PID integral pause is ON or not Whether to stop integral operation when the output reaches the limit If Stop integral operation is selected the PID integral operation stops which may help to reduce the PID overshoot Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default i 0 0 Not judging feedback loss FA 26 Detection value of PID judging 0 0 feedback loss 0 1 100 0 FA 27 Detection time of PID 0 0 20 0s 0 0s feedback loss These parameters are used to judge whether PID feedback is lost If the PID feedback is smaller than the value of FA 26 and the lasting time exceeds the value of FA 27 the AC drive reports Err31 and acts according to the selected fault protection action F
80. drive starts DC braking when the running frequency is lower than the value set in F6 11 F6 12 Waiting time of stop DC braking When the running frequency decreases to the initial frequency of stop DC braking the AC drive stops output for a certain period and then starts DC braking This prevents faults such as overcurrent caused due to DC braking at high speed F6 13 Stop DC braking current This parameter specifies the output current at DC braking and is a percentage relative to the base value Ifthe rated motor current is less than or equal to 80 of the rated AC drive current the base value is the rated motor current Ifthe rated motor current is greater than 80 of the rated AC drive current the base value is 8096 of the rated AC drive current 181 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual F6 14 Stop DC braking time This parameter specifies the holding time of DC braking If it is set to 0 DC braking is cancelled The stop DC braking process is shown in the following figure Figure 6 14 Stop DC braking process Output frequency Hz Initial frequency of stop DC braking Effective value of output voltage Time t Waiting time of braking Stop DC braking 1 1 Time t gt Stog DC RUN braking time command Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6 15 Brake use ratio 0 100 100 It is valid only for the A
81. how to use the Al as the frequency source Figure 4 20 Voltage input of Al1 connected to the potentiometer as the frequency source 2 10 V corresponding to 10 40 Hz z i Frequency Frequenc Terminal Function code 4 y default value feature setting source selection Corresponding MM F4 33 1 vale 0 10 50 00 Hz Analog F4 16 lt 80 0 F0 07 0 5 10V F4 13 0 00 V 3 35 Eod 600 Running Ea IF Alt F4 14 0 0 frequency 8 F4 15 10 00 V gt 5 GND F4 16 100 F4 14 lt 20 0 F4 17 0 15 9 4 00 6 00 8 00 10 00 Al 0 Default 0 10 V corresponding to0 50 Hz 2 10 V corresponding to 10 40 Hz F4 33 Al curve selection F4 13 to F4 17 relationship between 11 setting and corresponding value Figure 4 21 Current input of AI2 connected to 4DA module of the PLC as the frequency source 4 20 mA corresponding to 0 50 Hz 7 Frequency Frequency Terminal pb value feature setting source selection Carpi F4 33 10 Analog setting 100 se Selection 77770 0 07 0 AD A module using jumper 1 B F4 18 0 00 V 800 1 i 1 Running 2 4 19 0 0 60 0 frequency PL v F4 20 10 00 V gt 400 1 gt F0 03 2 GND F4 21 100 20 0 4 22 0 15 V Unit mA 4 19 lt 0 0 Sele
82. if the heatsink temperature is higher than 40 C and stops working if the heatsink temperature is lower than 40 If this parameter is set to 1 the cooling fan keeps working after power on Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default _ Dormant frequency F8 51 to F8 49 Wakeup frequency maximum frequency F0 10 0 00 Hz F8 50 Wakeup delay time 0 0 6500 0s 0 0s F8 51 Dormant frequency 0 00 Hz to wakeup frequency F8 49 0 00 Hz F8 52 Dormant delay time 0 0 6500 05 0 05 These parameters used to implement the dormant and wakeup functions the water supply application When the AC drive is in running state the AC drive enters the dormant state and stops automatically after the dormant delay time F8 52 if the set frequency is lower than or equal to the dormant frequency F8 51 When the AC drive is in dormant state and the current running command is effective the AC drives starts up after the wakeup delay time F8 50 if the set frequency is higher than or equal to the wakeup frequency F8 49 Generally set the wakeup frequency equal to or higher than the dormant frequency If the wakeup frequency and dormant frequency are set to 0 the dormant and wakeup functions are disabled When the dormant function is enabled if the frequency source is PID whether PID operation is performed in the dormant state is determined by FA 28 In this case select PID operation enabled in the stop sta
83. it is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency As V F separated voltage source it is a percentage relative to the rated motor voltage As process PID setting source it does not require conversion Multi reference can be switched over based on different states of DI terminals For details see the descriptions of group F4 215 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Stop after the AC drive runs one cycle Simple PLC 1 Keep final values after the AC drive runs running mode one cycle 2 Repeat after the AC drive runs one cycle 0 Stop after the AC drive runs cycle The AC drive stops after running one cycle and will not start up until receiving another command 1 Keep final values after the AC drive runs one cycle The AC drive keeps the final running frequency and direction after running one cycle 2 Repeat after the AC drive runs one cycle The AC drive automatically starts another cycle after running one cycle and will not stop until receiving the stop command Simple PLC can be either the frequency source or V F separated voltage source When simple PLC is used as the frequency source whether parameter values of FC 00 to FC 15 are positive or negative determines the running direction If the parameter values are negative it indicates that the AC drive runs in reverse direction Figure 6 32 Simple PLC when used as frequency sour
84. motor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 From frequency at stop Rotational speed Feo tracking mode 1 From zero speed 0 2 From maximum frequency To complete the rotational speed tracking process within the shortest time select the proper mode in which the AC drive tracks the motor rotational speed 177 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual 0 From frequency at stop It is the commonly selected mode 1 From zero frequency It is applicable to restart after a long time of power failure 2 From the maximum frequency It is applicable to the power generating load Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6 02 Rotational speed tracking speed 1 100 20 In the rotational speed tracking restart mode select the rotational speed tracking speed The larger the value is the faster the tracking is However too large value may cause unreliable tracking Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6 03 Startup frequency 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz F6 04 Startup frequency holding time 0 0 100 0s 0 0s To ensure the motor torque at AC drive startup set a proper startup frequency In addition to build excitation when the motor starts up the startup frequency must be held for a certain period The startup frequency F6 03 is not restricted by the frequency lower limit If the set target frequency is lower
85. must be tied to the same common ground Otherwise the EMC effect will be affected seriously EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the AC drive The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters for the MD380 series AC drive Select a proper one based on actual requirements Table 7 1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters Power pee Model Caec Qu AC input Three phase 380 V 50 60 Hz MD380T0 7GB 1 5 3 4 DL 5EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380T1 5GB 3 5 DL 5EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380T2 2GB 4 5 8 DL 10EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380T3 7GB 5 9 10 5 DL 16EBK5 FN 3258 16 33 MD380T5 5GB 8 9 14 6 DL 16EBK5 FN 3258 16 33 249 MD380 User Manual Power Ac Drive Mode Mods AC Fie Mode kVA A MD380T7 5GB 11 20 5 DL 25EBK5 FN 3258 30 33 MD380T11GB 17 26 DL 35EBK5 FN 3258 30 33 MD380T15GB 21 35 DL 35EBK5 FN 3258 42 33 MD380T18 5G 24 38 5 DL 50EBK5 FN 3258 42 33 MD380T22G 30 46 5 DL 50EBK5 FN 3258 55 34 MD380T30G 40 62 DL 65EBK5 FN 3258 75 34 MD380T37G 57 76 DL 80EBK5 FN 3258 100 35 MD380T45G 69 92 DL 100EBK5 FN 3258 100 35 MD380T55G 85 113 DL 130EBK5 FN 3258 130 35 MD380T75G 114 157
86. not be achieved In automatic adjustment mode the best demagnetized current is selected automatically This may influence the system dynamic performance or cause instability The adjustment speed of the field weakening current can be changed by modifying the values of F2 21 and F2 22 A very quick adjustment may cause instability Therefore generally do not modify them manually 155 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Group F3 V F Control Parameters Group F3 is valid only for V F control The V F control mode is applicable to low load applications fan or pump or applications where one AC drive operates multiple motors or there is a large difference between the AC drive power and the motor power Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Linear V F Multi point V F Square V F 1 2 power V F 1 4 power V F 1 6 power V F 1 8 power V F 9 Reserved F3 00 V F curve setting BR WN A 10 V F complete separation 11 V F half separation 0 Linear V F It is applicable to common constant torque load 1 Multi point V F It is applicable to special load such as dehydrator and centrifuge Any such V F curve can be obtained by setting parameters of F3 03 to F3 08 2 Square V F It is applicable to centrifugal loads such as fan and pump 3 to 8 V F curve between linear V F and square V F 10 V F complete separation In this mode the output f
87. obtained by motor auto tuning Otherwise the motor cannot run properly 150 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1 34 Number of pole pairs of resolver 1 65535 1 If a resolver is applied set the number of pole pairs properly Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default ire i 0 0s No action F1 36 Encoder wire break fault detection 0 05 time 0 1 10 0s This parameter is used to set the time that a wire break fault lasts If it is set to 0 0s the AC drive does not detect the encoder wire break fault If the duration of the encoder wire break fault detected by the AC drive exceeds the time set in this parameter the AC drive reports Err20 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning Auto tuning F1 37 selection 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning 0 No auto tuning Auto tuning is prohibited 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning It is applicable to scenarios where complete auto tuning cannot be performed because the asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load Before performing static auto tuning properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of F1 00 to F1 05 first The AC drive will obtai
88. only be utilized after correct motor parameters are obtained Better performance can be achieved by adjusting speed regulator parameters in group F2 or groups A2 A3 and A4 respectively for motor 2 3 and 4 Forthe permanent magnetic synchronous motor PMSM the MD380 does not support SFVC CLVC is used generally In some low power motor applications you can also use V F 186 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Operation panel control LED off Command F0 02 1 Terminal control LED on 0 source selection 2 Communication control LED blinking It is used to determine the input channel of the AC drive control commands such as run stop forward rotation reverse rotation and jog operation You can input the commands in the following three channels 0 Operation panel control LOCAL REMOT indicator off Commands are given by pressing keys the operation panel 1 Terminal control LOCAL REMOT indicator on Commands are given by means of multifunctional input terminals with functions such as FWD REV JOGF and JOGR 2 Communication control LOCAL REMOT indicator blinking Commands are given from host computer If this parameter is set to 2 a communication card Modbus RTU PROFIBUS DP card CANlink card user programmable card or CANopen card must be installed If a PROFIBUS DP ca
89. pause swing frequency function pauses 25 Counter input This terminal is used to count pulses 26 Counter reset This terminal is used to clear the counter status 27 Length count input This terminal is used to count the length 28 Length reset This terminal is used to clear the length 162 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Value Function Description 29 Torque control prohibited The AC drive is prohibited from torque control and enters the speed control mode Pulse input enabled only 30 for DI5 DI5 is used for pulse input 31 Reserved Reserved After this terminal becomes ON the AC drive directly 92 Immediate DC braking switches over to the DC braking state Normally closed NC input After this terminal becomes ON the AC drive reports 33 of external fault Err15 and stops 34 Frequency modification After this terminal becomes ON the AC drive does not forbidden respond to any frequency modification 35 Reverse PID action After this terminal becomes ON the PID action direction direction is reversed to the direction set in FA 03 In operation panel mode this terminal can be used to 36 External STOP terminal 1 stop the AC drive equivalent to the function of the STOP key on the operation panel It is used to perform switchover between terminal Command source control and communication control If the command 37
90. perform with load dynamic auto tuning 4 9 3 Setting and Switchover of Multiple Groups of Motor Parameters The AC drive supports switchover between four groups of motor parameters namely groups F1 F2 motor 1 parameters and encoder parameters and group A2 motor 2 parameters group A3 motor 3 parameters and group A4 motor 4 parameters You can select the current effective motor parameter group by means of function code F0 24 or DI terminals with functions 41 and 42 When the DI terminals with functions 41 and 42 become ON they are privileged and the setting of F0 24 becomes invalid 71 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Examples Figure 4 30 Driving multiple motors In V F control mode multiple motors can be driven simultaneously Je Je In the vector control mode multiple motors cannot be driven simultaneously li F0 01 00r1 IM j 5 24 D co 24 24 20 1 2 3 Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 In the vector control mode up to 4 motors can be driven at different time The motor parameters are restored respectively G 4 10 Use of DI Terminals The control board provides five DI terminals DI1 to DI5 You can obtain another DI terminals DI6 to 0110 by installing an I O extension card The internal hardware of DI terminals are configured with 24 VDC power supply for detection You can input a signal
91. performances contact the technical support personnel of Inovance to ensure correct use CE Mark The CE mark on the MD380 declares that the AC drive complies with the European low voltage directive LVD and EMC directive CE The MD380 series AC drive complies with the following LVD and EMC directives and standards Directive Directive Code Standard EN 61800 3 EMC Directive 2004 18 EC EN 55011 EN 61000 6 2 LVD Directive 2006 95 EEC EN 61800 5 1 The MD380 series AC drive complies with the requirements of standard IEC EN 61800 3 on the condition of correct installation and use by following the instructions in chapter 7 Contents PrefaCe PM 1 laete HE 2 Chapter 1 Safety Information and 10 1 Safety Information iecit d cc rie ii tee ee dh ate 10 1 2 Genieral Precautions norana deiae nbi denen 12 Chapter 2 Product Information enne inn 18 2 1 Designation Rules and Nameplate of the 380 18 2 2 Components Ofthe MD380 petet eret tpa ete ei rct bai pa 18 2 3 Technical Specifications 20 2 4 Peripheral Electrical Devices and System Configuration 2
92. setting of torque A3 48 upper limit in speed control 0 0 200 0 150 096 mode PS ul 0 20000 2000 proportional gain pss 020000 1300 integral gain 123 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property A M Oraue adjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain A3 54 2 adjustment integral 0 20000 1300 X Unit s digit Integral separated A3 55 Speed loop integral property 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled 0 No field weakening A3 56 Field weakefilfid mede ot 1 Direct calculation 0 synchronous motor 2 Adjustment Field weakening degree of S 5 57 synchronous motor 50 500 100 X A3 58 Maximum field weakening 1 300 50 Je current A3 59 Field weakening automatic 109650096 100 X adjustment gain A3 60 Field weakening integral 2 40 2 multiple 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC 1 Closed loop vector control A3 61 Motor 2 control mode CLVC 0 2 Voltage Frequency V F control 0 Same as motor 1 1 Acceleration Deceleration time 1 A3 62 Mater s acceleration 2 Acceleration Deceleration time 2 0 deceleration time 3 Acceleration Deceleration time 3 4 Acceleration Deceleration time 4 0 0 Automatic torque boost 63 Motor 2 torque boost q Mogel 0 1 30 0 dependent A3 65 Motor 2 oscillation 0 100 Model suppression gain dependent Group A
93. than the startup frequency the AC drive will not start and stays in the standby state During switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation the startup frequency holding time is disabled The holding time is not included in the acceleration time but in the running time of simple PLC Example 1 F0 03 0 The frequency source is digital setting F0 08 2 00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 2 00 Hz F6 03 5 00 Hz The startup frequency is 5 00 Hz F6 04 2 05 The startup frequency holding time is 2 05 In this example the AC drive stays in the standby state and the output frequency is 0 00 Hz Example 2 F0 03 0 The frequency source is digital setting F0 08 10 0 0 Hz The digital setting frequency is 10 00 Hz F6 03 5 00 Hz The startup frequency is 5 00 Hz F6 04 2 05 The startup frequency holding time is 2 05 In this example the AC drive accelerates to 5 00 Hz and then accelerates to the set frequency 10 00 Hz after 2s 178 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6 05 Startup DC braking current Pre excited current 0 100 0 F6 06 Startup DC braking time Pre excited time 0 0 100 05 0 05 Startup DC braking is generally used during restart of the AC drive after the rotating motor stops Pre excitation is used to make the AC drive build magnetic field for the asynchronous m
94. the terminal outputs the alarm signal If the motor temperature reaches the temperature set in Motor overheat F9 58 Motor overheat warning threshold the terminal 39 warning becomes ON You can view the motor temperature by using U0 34 40 Current running time If the current running time of AC drive exceeds the value of reached F8 53 the terminal becomes ON 174 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Default F5 06 FMP function selection 0 F5 07 1 function selection 0 F5 08 2 function selection 1 The output pulse frequency of the FMP terminal ranges from 0 01 kHz to Maximum FMP output frequency F5 09 The value of F5 09 is between 0 01 kHz and 100 00 kHz The output range of AO1 and AC2 is 0 10 V or 0 20 mA The relationship between pulse and analog output ranges and corresponding functions is listed in the following table Table 6 6 Relationship between pulse and analog output ranges and corresponding functions Value Function 9 Range 00 1000 0 Running frequency 0 to maximum output frequency 1 Set frequency 0 to maximum output frequency 2 Output current 0 to 2 times of rated motor current 3 Output torque absolute value 0 to 2 times of rated motor torque 4 Output power 0 to 2 times of rated power 5 Output voltage 0 to 1 2 times of rated AC drive voltage 6 Puls
95. to a DI terminal of the AC drive only by shorting the DI terminal and COM By default F4 38 0000 and F4 39 0000 When a DI terminal is shorted to COM it is active logic 1 When a DI terminal is not shorted to COM it is inactive logic 0 You can change the DI terminal active mode That is a DI terminal is inactive logic 0 when being shorted with COM and active logic 1 when being not shorted to COM In this case it is necessary to change the corresponding bit in F4 38 and F4 39 these two parameters respectively specifying the active mode setting of DI1 to DI5 and DI16 to DI10 to 1 The AC drive also provides F4 10 DI filter time for the DI signal to improve the anti interference level For DI1 to DI3 the AC drive provides the DI signal delay function convenient for some applications requiring delay Figure 4 31 DI delay setting 1 delay set in F4 35 Ie DI2 delay set in F4 36 DI3 delay set in F4 37 T 1 DI hardware Internal signal signal The preceding 10 DI terminals can be defined in function codes F4 00 to F4 09 Each DI can be allocated with their respective function from the 50 functions For details see descriptions of F4 00 to F4 09 The hardware design allows only DI5 to receive high speed pulse signal If high speed pulse count is required use DI5 72 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 11 Use of DO Terminals The control board pr
96. torque control linearity is high 2 Optimization mode 2 It is used for the requirement on speed stability is high 233 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A5 08 Dead zone time adjustment 100 200 150 It is only valid for 1140 V voltage class You can modify the value of this parameter to improve the voltage utilization rate Too small value may system instability Do not modify it generally Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A5 09 Overvoltage threshold 200 0 2500 0 V 2000 0 V It is used to set the overvoltage threshold of the AC drive The default values of different voltage classes are listed in the following table Table 6 12 Overvoltage thresholds for different voltage classes Voltage Class Default Overvoltage Threshold Single phase 220 V 400 0 V Three phase 220 V 400 0 V Three phase 380 V 810 0 V Three phase 480 V 890 0 V Three phase 690 V 1300 0 V Note The default value is also the upper limit of the AC drive s internal overvoltage protection voltage The parameter becomes effective only when the setting of A5 09 is lower than the default value If the setting is higher than the default value use the default value Group A6 Al Curve Setting Function Code Name
97. 0 MD380 7T250G 315 315 150 150 1 0 MD380 7T280G 350 400 150 150 1 0 MD380 7T315G 400 400 185 185 1 0 MD380 7T355G 400 400 185 185 1 0 MD380 7T400G 500 500 240 240 1 0 MD380 7T450G 630 630 120 x2 120 x2 1 0 MD380 7T500G 630 630 150 x 2 150 x 2 1 0 8 5 Selection and Installation of External DC Reactor 8 5 1 Installation Mode of External DC Reactor The MD380 series AC drives of over 75 kW power 2T is 37 kW are configured with an external DC reactor as standard The DC reactor is packed in separate wooden box for delivery When installing the DC reactor remove the shorting copper busbar between the main circuit connection terminals P and Then connect the DC reactor between terminals P and no polarity requirement The copper busbar is not used any longer after the installation is complete Note Customized models can be provided for special requirements 278 MD380 User Manual 8 5 2 Physical Dimensions of External DC Reactor Figure 8 15 Physical dimensions of external DC reactor Table 8 15 Adaptable AC drive models Selection and Dimensions Adaptable AC Drive Model MD380 2T37G 45G MD380T75G 90G MD380 5T75G 90G MD380 2T55G MD380T 110G 132P MD380 5T 110G 132P MD380 2T75G MD380T132G 160G MD380 5T 132G 160G MD380T200G 220G MD380 5T 200G 220G MD380T250G 280G MD380 5T250G 280G Diameter of the Ho
98. 0 0 F3 09 V F slip compensation gain 0 200 0 0 096 F3 10 V F over excitation gain 0 200 64 11 oscillation suppression 0 100 Model gain dependent 0 Digital setting F3 14 1 AI 2 12 3 4 Pulse setting DI5 F3 13 a for V F 5 Multi reference 0 separeuon 6 Simple PLC 7 PID 8 Communication setting 100 0 corresponds to the rated motor voltage F1 02 A4 02 A5 02 A6 02 F3 14 Voltage digital setting for V 0 V to rated motor voltage 0v F separation 0 0 1000 05 3 15 Voltage rise time of V F It indicates the time for the 0 0s de separation voltage rising from 0 V to rated motor voltage 0 0 1000 05 16 Voltage decline time of V F It indicates the time for the 0 0s de separation voltage to decline from rated motor voltage to 0 V 0 Frequency and voltage F3 17 Stop mode selection upon declining to 0 independently 0 separation 1 Frequency declining after voltage declines to 0 87 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Group F4 Input Terminals No function Forward RUN FWD Reverse RUN REV Three line control 1 Forward JOG FJOG Reverse JOG RJOG Terminal UP F4 00 011 function selection Terminal DOWN Coast to stop Fault reset RESET 10 RUN pause 11 Normally open NO input of external fault AN F4
99. 0 0 100 0 curve 2 maximum input 4 22 AI2 filter time 0 00 10 00s 0 10s F4 23 curve minimum input 0 00 V to F4 25 0 00 V Corresponding setting of Al 5 A F4 24 curve 3 minimum input 100 00 100 0 0 0 F4 25 Al curve maximum input 4 23 10 00 V 10 00 V 26 COrresponding setting of Al ooo 100 0 100 0 curve 3 maximum input 4 27 AI3 filter time 0 00 10 00s 0 10s F4 28 Pulse minimum input 0 00 kHz to F4 30 0 00 kHz F4 29 Corresponding setting oo 100 gor 0 0 pulse minimum input F4 30 Pulse maximum input F4 28 to 50 00 kHz 50 00 kHz 1 Corresponding setting of 00 100 0 100 0 pulse maximum input F4 32 Pulse filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 90 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Setting Range Default Property Function Code Parameter Name F4 33 Al curve selection Setting for Al less than minimum input F4 34 Unit s digit 11 curve selection Curve 1 2 points see F4 13 to F4 16 Curve 2 2 points see F4 18 to F4 21 Curve 3 2 points see F4 23 to F4 26 Curve 4 4 points see A6 00 to A6 07 Curve 5 4 points see A6 08 to A6 15 Ten s digit Al2 curve selection Curve 1 to curve 5 same as Al1 Hundred s digit curve selection Curve 1 to curve 5 same as Al1 Unit s digit Setting for 11 less than minimum input 0 Minimu
100. 0 5T2 2GB 5 80 0 75 TNRO 75 4 267 Selection and Dimensions Figure 8 4 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size C 9 6 11 1 M4 combination screw j 8 9 98 1 ji Ta il yd Table 8 4 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size C MD380 User Manual Rated Input d Torque of p Output Power que c Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model A inn Nm MD380 2T3 7GB 14 60 2 5 GTNR2 5 4 MD380 2T5 5GB 26 00 4 TNR4 5 MD380T3 7GB 10 50 1 5 in TNR1 5 4 MD380T5 5GB 14 60 2 5 GTNR2 5 4 MD380 5T3 7GB 10 50 1 5 TNR1 5 4 MD380 5T5 5GB 14 60 2 5 GTNR2 5 4 Figure 8 5 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size D 10 9 14 5 5 combination screw 5 ae vIw es R PB 16 Table 8 5 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size Recommended Rated Input Torque of AC Drive Model p RNC E Tas Driver Eo us A hae N m MD380 2T7 5GB 35 00 6 GTNR
101. 0 EISH E12U 7 4 Shielded Cable 7 4 1 Requirements for Shielded Cable The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements of CE marking Shielded cables are classified into three conductor cable and four conductor cable If conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient add an independent PE cable or use a four conductor cable of which one phase conductor is PE cable The three conductor cable and four conductor cable are shown in the following figure PE conductor and shield Shield Shield 69 63 PE To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively the shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid The braided density of the cooper braid should be greater than 9096 to enhance the shielding efficiency and conductivity as shown in the following figure Insulation jacket Copper shield Copper braid j Internal insulation Cable core 6 The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable Figure 7 1 Grounding of the shielded cable The shield must be grounded 256 MD380 User Manual EMC The installation precautions are as follows Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended The four conductor shielded cable can also be used as an input cable The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire twisted shielded should be as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray curren
102. 00 Hz F0 17 7 nN Accelerati 7 F6 04 0 0s ti M F6 07 0 F6 04 P4 Acceleration Startup frequency iy time holding time Pd X e anm c N F6 06 Pre F6 06 Pre n F6 03 excited time A Startup frequency r n 2 gt Time 0 gt Time t Running Running command command 57 Operation Display and Application Examples 4 7 3 Stop Mode MD380 User Manual The AC drive supports two stop modes decelerate to stop and coast to stop set in F6 10 Figure 4 12 Diagram of two stop modes decelerate to stop and coast to stop Frequency f A Running frequency F6 10 0 Decelerate to stop D 120 18 gt eceleration time a F6 12 Waiting time of Di braking F6 12 Stop DC braking time A No output F6 11 Initial frequency of stop DC braking F6 13 Stop DC Stop Eos 4 7 4 Timing Stop eX gt Time t braking current Frequenc eq y f Running F6 10 1 Coast to stop frequency IN Rotational speed under rN load coast to stop by inertia i x gt Time t Stop command The MD380 supports timing stop This function is enabled by F8 42 and the timing duration is determined by F8 43 and F8 44 Figure 4 13 Setting of the timing stop function Running state F8 42 1 timing function enabled F8 43 0 timing duration determined by
103. 05 A3 00 A3 01 to A3 05 A4 00 A4 01 to A4 05 Asynchronous motor variable frequency asynchronous motor synchronous motor Model parameters manual input A2 06 to A2 20 A3 06 to A3 20 A4 06 to A4 20 Auto tuning parameters A2 27 A2 28 A2 34 A3 27 A3 28 A3 34 A4 27 A4 28 A4 34 Encoder parameters 69 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 4 9 2 Motor Auto tuning To obtain the motor parameters the AC drive can perform dynamic auto tuning or static auto tuning For the asynchronous motor that cannot be disconnected from the load you can input the motor parameters of the same model that was successfully auto tuned before Auto tuning Application Result No load dynamic It is applied to applications where the motor synchronous motor Best auto tuning or asynchronous motor can be disconnected from the load With load dynamic It is applied to applications where the motor synchronous motor OK auto tuning or asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load It is applied to applications where the motor asynchronous Static auto tuning motor only cannot be disconnected from the load and dynamic Poor auto tuning is not allowed It is applied to applications where the motor asynchronous motor only cannot be disconnected from the load Input the motor parameters of the same model that was successfully auto tune
104. 1 Three phase 690 V 50 60 Hz MD380 7T55G 84 70 65 55 70 1 22 MD380 7T75G 107 90 86 75 100 1 63 MD380 7T90G 125 105 100 90 125 1 96 MD380 7T110G 155 130 120 110 150 2 39 MD380 7T132G 192 170 150 132 175 3 00 MD380 7T160G 231 200 175 160 210 3 32 MD380 7T200G 250 235 215 200 260 4 20 MD380 7T220G 280 247 245 220 300 4 91 MD380 7T250G 355 265 260 250 350 5 08 MD380 7T280G 396 305 299 280 370 5 86 MD380 7T315G 445 350 330 315 420 6 42 MD380 7T355G 500 382 374 355 470 7 38 MD380 7T400G 565 435 410 400 530 7 83 MD380 7T450G 630 490 465 450 600 8 93 MD380 7T500G 700 595 550 500 660 10 76 262 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions 8 2 Physical Appearance and Overall Dimensions of the MD380 Figure 8 1 Physical appearance and overall dimensions of the MD380 plastic housing itil pii 5 3 2 D 4 Table 8 2 Overall dimensions and mounting hole dimensions of the MD380 Overall Dimensions ole eig pipe mm m Diameter kg A B H H1 Ww D mm Single phase 220 V MD380S0 4GB MD380S0 7GB 113 172 186 125 164 05 0 1 1 MD38081 5GB MD3808S2 2GB 263 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Overall Dimensions Mounting ede ole mm Hole Weight mm Diameter kg A B H H1 w D mm Three phase 220 V MD380 2T0 4G
105. 2 The load is too heavy or locked 2 load and check the motor and the Motor overload Err11 rotor occurs on the motor mechanical condition 3 The AC drive model is of too 8 Selact ar AC drive of small power class higher power class 1 The three phase power input is abnormal 1 Eliminate external faults ower inpu phase MU Erri2 2 ae He IS pd 2 Contact the agent or 3 The lightening board is faulty Inovance 4 The main control board is faulty 1 The cable connecting the AC 2 drive and the motor is faulty 1 Eliminate external faults 2 The AC drive s three phase 2 Check whether the motor Power output Em13 outputs are unbalanced when the three phase winding is phase loss motor is running normal 3 The drive board is faulty 3 Contact the agent or Inovance 4 The module is faulty 1 The ambient temperature is too 1 Lower the ambient high temperature 2 The air filter is blocked 2 Clean the air filter Module overheat Err14 3 The fan is damaged 3 Replace the damaged fan 4 The thermally sensitive resistor 4 Replace the damaged of the module is damaged thermally sensitive resistor 5 The inverter module is 5 Replace the inverter damaged module 1 External fault signal is input via DI 15 Reset the operation equipment fault 2 External fault signal is input via virtual I O 1 The host computer is in 1 Check the cabling of host abnorm
106. 250 EISH E65UB MD380 7T220G 247 ACL 0250 EISH E65UB MD380 7T250G 265 ACL 0290 EISH E50UB MD380 7T280G 305 ACL 0330 EISH E50UB MD380 7T315G 350 ACL 0330 EISH E50UB MD380 7T355G 382 ACL 0390 EISH E44UB MD380 7T400G 435 ACL 0490 EISH E35UB MD380 7T450G 490 ACL 0490 EISH E35UB MD380 7T500G 595 ACL 0600 EISH E25UB 7 3 3 Installation of AC Output Reactor on Power Output Side EMC Whether to install an AC output reactor on the power output side is dependent on the actual situation The cable connecting the AC drive and the motor should not be too long capacitance enlarges when an over long cable is used and thus high harmonics current may be easily generated If the length of the output cable is equal to or greater than the value in the following table install an AC output reactor on the power output side of the AC drive 253 MD380 User Manual Table 7 3 Cable length threshold when an AC output reactor is installed AC Drive Power Rated Voltage Cable Length Threshold kW V m 4 200 500 50 5 5 200 500 70 7 5 200 500 100 11 200 500 110 15 200 500 125 18 5 200 500 135 22 200 500 150 230 280 690 150 The following table lists the recommended manufacturer and models of AC output reactors Table 7 4 Recommended manufacturer and models of AC output reactors AC Drive Model Rated us Cu
107. 380 5T200G MD380 5T220G MD380 5T250G MD380 5T280G MD380 5T315G MD380 5T355G MD380 5T400G MD380 7T55G MD380 7T75G MD380 7T90G MD380 7T 110G MD380 7T132G MD380 7T160G MD380 7T200G MD380 7T220G MD380 7T250G MD380 7T280G MD380 7T315G 2 1 OCL 0005 EISC E1M4 3 8 OCL 0005 EISC E1M4 5 1 OCL 0007 EISC E1MO 9 OCL 0010 EISC EM70 13 OCL 0015 EISC EM47 17 OCL 0020 EISC EM35 25 OCL 0030 EISC EM23 32 OCL 0040 EISC EM18 37 OCL 0050 EISC EM14 45 OCL 0060 EISC EM12 60 OCL 0080 EISC E87U 75 OCL 0090 EISC E78U 91 OCL 0120 EISC E58U 112 OCL 0150 EISH E47U 150 OCL 0200 EISH E35U 176 OCL 0200 EISH E35U 210 OCL 0250 EISH E28U 253 OCL 0290 EISH E24U 304 OCL 0330 EISH E21U 377 OCL 0490 EISH E 14U 426 OCL 0490 EISH E 14U 465 OCL 0530 EISH E13U 520 OCL 0600 EISH E12U 585 OCL 0660 EISH E4U0 650 OCL 0800 EISH E5U0 725 OCL 0800 EISH E5U0 Three phase 690 V 50 60 Hz 65 ACL 0080 EISC EM19B 86 OCL 0080 EISC E87U 100 OCL 0120 EISC E58U 120 OCL 0150 EISH E47U 150 OCL 0200 EISH E35U 175 OCL 0200 EISH E35U 215 OCL 0250 EISH E28U 245 OCL 0290 EISH E24U 260 OCL 0290 EISH E24U 299 OCL 0330 EISH E21U 330 OCL 0390 EISH E18U 255 MD380 User Manual AC Drive Model Rated Pi Current AC Geico MD380 7T355G 374 OCL 0490 EISH E14U MD380 7T400G 410 OCL 0490 EISH E14U MD380 7T450G 465 OCL 0530 EISH E13U MD380 7T500G 550 OCL 060
108. 380T200G 385 00 185 GTNR185 16 MD380T220G 430 00 240 GTNR240 16 MD380T250G 468 00 120x2 GTNR120 16 MD380T280G 525 00 120x2 GTNR120 16 MD380T315G 590 00 150x2 GTNR150 16 MD380 5T200G 385 00 185 GTNR185 16 MD380 5T220 430 00 240 GTNR240 16 MD380 5T250G 468 00 120 x2 GTNR120 16 MD380 5T280G 525 00 120 x2 GTNR120 16 MD380 5T315G 590 00 150 x 2 GTNR150 16 272 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Figure 8 11 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size J Table 8 11 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size 1 Recommended nude lieul Output Power Torpe i Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model A N m mm2 MD380T355G 665 00 185 x2 GTNR185 16 MD380T400G 785 00 240x2 T GTNR240 16 MD380 5T355G 665 00 185 x2 GTNR185 16 MD380 5T400G 785 00 240x2 GTNR240 16 Reference information about the recommended cable lug Suzhou Yuanli Metal Enterprise is provided in the following part The following figure shows appearance of recommended cable lugs Figure 8 12 Appearance of recommended cable lugs P Qo CTNR series TNR series 273 Selection and Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of recommended cable lugs Figure 8 13 Dimensions of recommended TNR series cable lugs
109. 38PG4 10 kHz excitation frequency DB9 It applies to all models interface Open collector It is the open collector encoder interface card with 1 1 frequency encoder MD38PG5 division output It applies to all models interface card It is adaptable to 15 V power supply External LED It applies to the MD operation MDKE display series AC drives with panel the RJ45 interface It is a standard 8 core cable and Extension MDCAB can be connected to MDKE The standard length is cable 3 meters 27 Product Information MD380 User Manual 28 Mechanical and Electrical Installation Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3 1 Mechanical Installation 3 1 1 Installation Environment Requirements Item Requirements Ambient temperature 10 C to 50 C Install the AC drive on the surface of an incombustible object and Heat dissipation ensure that there is sufficient space around for heat dissipation Install the AC drive vertically on the support using screws Free from direct sunlight high humidity and condensation Mounting location Free from corrosive explosive and combustible gas Free from oil dirt dust and metal powder Less than 0 6 g Far away from the punching machine or the like Vibration The MD380 series AC drives of plastic housing are the whole unit built in products operated through
110. 4 Chapter Mechanical and Electrical 30 3 T Mechanical 30 3 2 35 Chapter 4 Operation Display and Application 46 4 1 Operation Palhel osuere trea rot 46 4 2 Viewing and Modifying Function 00 48 4 3 Structure of Function Codes onte re mtr ree rene 49 4 4 Quick View of Function ERR ie eI 50 4 5 Definition and Operation of the Multifunction Key 52 4 6 Viewing Status Paramleters onec inerat eise cedet ene esu 52 4 7 Starting or Stopping the AC Drive eer tite cett tia doas eee Dedi cs 54 4 8 Setting the Running Frequency iet et cete tee det Ad 60 4 9 Setting and Auto tuning of Motor Parameters 2 2 2 4440 000 000 69 4 10 Use of DI Terminal Siss ssri tritt tener eerte Fette eR rer 72 4 411 056 eer rorem oett be Yea eve SEP 73 4 12 USE Termitials s s cocer roter ore or 73 413 5 8 ator 74 4 14 Useof the PG Terimirial rrt nre rnc i ite re
111. 4 Motor 4 Parameters 0 Common asynchronous motor 1 Variable frequency A4 00 Motor type selection asynchronous motor 0 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor A4 01 Rated motor power 0 1 1000 0 kw Mogel dependent 124 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Parameter Setting Range Default Property Model A4 02 Rated motor voltage 1 2000 V dependent 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW A4 03 Rated motor current Model 0 1 6553 5 A AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW A4 04 Rated motor frequency 0 01 Hz to maximum frequency Model d dependent A4 05 Rated motor rotational 165535 RPM Model speed dependent 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A4 06 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent Rotor resistance power gt 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model Bear asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Leakage inductive reactance S 55 kW Model A4 08 asynchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power Mutual inductive reactance lt 55 kW Model A4 09 asynchronous motor 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power dependent gt 55 kW 0 01 A to A2 03 AC drive power No load current lt 55 kW Model A4 10 asynchronous
112. 4 Restore user backup parameters 501 Back up current user parameters 1 Restore default settings except motor parameters If FP 01 is set to 1 most function codes are restored to the default settings except motor parameters frequency reference resolution F0 22 fault records accumulative running time F7 09 accumulative power on time F7 13 and accumulative power consumption F7 14 2 Clear records If FP 01 is set to 2 the fault records accumulative running time F7 09 accumulative power on time F7 13 and accumulative power consumption F7 14 are cleared 501 Back current user parameters If FP 01 is set to 501 the current parameter settings are backed up helping you to restore the setting if incorrect parameter setting is performed 4 Restore user backup parameters If FP 01 is set to 4 the previous backup user parameters are restored 220 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Group U display selection 0 Not display AC drive 1 Display FP 02 parameter display ae 11 property Ten s digit Group A display selection 0 Not display 1 Display Unit s digit User defined parameter display selection 0 Not display Individualized 4 Display FP 03 parameter display NEN 00 property Ten 5 digit User modified parameter display selection 0 Not display
113. 4 32 Pulse filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 These parameters are used to set the relationship between DI5 pulse input and corresponding settings The pulses can only be input by DI5 The method of setting this function is similar to that of setting AI1 function Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 33 Unit s digit Al1 curve selection Al curve selection Curve 1 2 points see F4 13 to F4 16 Curve 2 2 points see F4 18 to F4 21 Curve 3 2 points see F4 23 to F4 26 Curve 4 4 points see A6 00 to A6 07 Curve 5 4 points see A6 08 to A6 15 321 Ten s digit Al2 curve selection Curve 1 to curve 5 same as AI1 Hundred s digit curve selection Curve 1 to curve 5 same as AI1 The unit s digit ten s digit and hundred s digit of this parameter are respectively used to select the corresponding curve of AI1 AI2 and Any of the five curves can be selected for Al1 AI2 and AI3 Curve 1 curve 2 and curve 3 are all 2 point curves set in group F4 Curve 4 and curve 5 are both 4 point curves set in group A6 The MD380 provides two AI terminals as standard AI3 is provided by an optional extension card Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Setting for 11 less than minimum input 0 Minimum value 1 0 096 F4 34 Setting for Al less Ten s digit Setting for AI2 less than 000 than minimum input
114. 4 5 MD380 2T11G 46 50 10 GTNR10 6 MD380 2T15G 62 00 16 GTNR16 6 MD380T7 5GB 20 50 4 GTNR4 5 MD380T11GB 26 00 4 2 5 GTNR6 5 MD380T15GB 35 00 6 GTNR6 5 MD380 5T7 5GB 20 50 4 GTNR4 5 MD380 5T11GB 26 00 4 GTNR6 5 MD380 5T15GB 35 00 6 GTNR6 5 268 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Figure 8 6 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size E 20 17 M6 combination screw Table 8 6 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size Rated Input Seedy stele Tor of f pu Output Power quec Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model A 2 N m mm MD380 2T18 5G 76 00 25 GTNR25 6 MD380 2T22G 92 00 35 GTNR35 6 MD380 2T30G 113 00 50 GTNR50 8 MD380T18 5G 38 50 10 GTNR10 6 MD380T22G 46 50 10 4 GTNR10 6 MD380T30G 62 00 16 GTNR16 6 MD380 5T18 5G 38 50 10 GTNR10 6 MD380 5T22G 46 50 10 GTNR10 6 MD380 5T30G 62 00 16 GTNR16 6 Figure 8 7 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size F nee et IIT ML t p 8 combination screw R S T UJVIW 1 m 269 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Table 8 7 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model
115. 520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 216 200 MD380T400G Three phase 480 V MD380 5T0 7GB MD380 5T1 5GB 113 172 186 125 164 25 0 1 1 MD380 5T2 2GB MD380 5T3 7GB 148 236 248 160 183 25 0 2 5 MD380 5T5 5GB MD380 5T7 5GB MD380 5T 11GB 190 305 322 208 192 26 6 5 MD380 5T15GB MD380 5T18 5G MD380 5T22G 235 447 432 463 285 228 26 5 20 MD380 5T30G MD380 5T37G MD380T45G 260 580 549 600 385 265 010 32 MD380T55G 265 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Overall Dimensions Mounting Model oe mm Hole Weight mm Diameter kg A B H H1 w D mm MD380 5T75G 343 678 660 700 473 307 010 47 MD380 5T90G MD380 5T110G MD380 5T132G 449 903 880 930 579 380 210 90 MD380 5T160G MD380 5T200G MD380 5T220G MD380 5T250G MD380 5T280G MD380 5T315G MD380 5T355G 520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 216 200 MD380 5T400G 420 1030 983 1060 650 377 012 130 Three phase 690 V MD380 7T55G MD380 7T75G MD380 7T90G 250 570 557 600 400 330 210 47 MD380 7T110G MD380 7T132G MD380 7T160GH MD380 7T200GH MD380 7T220GH MD380 7T250GH MD380 7T280G MD380 7T315G 420 1030 983 1060 650 377 012 130 MD380 7T355G MD380 7T400G MD380 7T450G 520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 216 200 MD380 7T500G 320 1166 1090 1192 440 310 210 90 266 MD380 User Manual Selection
116. 600 05 0 05 94 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table mode deceleration A 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Unit s digit FMR valid mode 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Ten s digit Relay 1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Hundred s digit Relay 2 valid mode F5 22 DO valid mode selection 00000 0 1 same as FMR Thousand s digit 001 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Ten thousand s digit DO2 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR 0 Voltage signal F5 23 1 output signal selection 0 1 Current signal Group F6 Start Stop Control 0 Direct start 1 Rotational speed tracking F6 00 Start mode restart 0 2 Pre excited start asynchronous motor 0 From frequency at stop F6 01 a speed tracking 1 From zero speed 0 2 From maximum frequency F6 02 Rotational speed tracking 41 100 20 speed F6 03 Startup frequency 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz Fe o4 Startup frequency holding 00 105 05 0 0s time F6 05 Startup DC braking current 09610094 0 k Pre excited current 6 Startup DC braking time as sog 0 05 Pre excited time 0 Linear acceleration deceleration F6 07 Acceleration Deceleration 1 S curve acceleration 0 95 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Paramet
117. 7017H U0 24 Linear speed 1 m Min 7018H 00 25 Accumulative power on time 1 Min 7019 U0 26 Accumulative running time 0 1 Min 701AH U0 27 Pulse input frequency 1 Hz 701BH U0 28 Communication setting value 0 01 701CH U0 29 Encoder feedback speed 0 01 Hz 701DH U0 30 Main frequency X 0 01 Hz 701EH U0 31 Auxiliary frequency Y 0 01 Hz 701FH U0 32 Viewing any register address value 1 7020H U0 33 Synchronous motor rotor position 0 19 7021 00 34 Motor temperature 1 C 7022H U0 35 Target torque 0 1 7023H U0 36 Resolver position 1 7024H U0 37 Power factor angle 0 1 7025H U0 38 ABZ position 1 7026H U0 39 Target voltage upon V F separation 1V 7027H U0 40 Output voltage upon V F separation 1V 7028H 00 41 DI state visual display 1 7029H U0 42 DO state visual display 1 702AH U0 43 DI function state visual display 1 1 702BH U0 44 DI function state visual display 2 1 702CH U0 45 Fault information 1 702DH U0 58 Phase Z counting 1 703AH U0 59 Current set frequency 0 01 703BH U0 60 Current running frequency 0 01 703CH U0 61 AC drive running state 1 703DH U0 62 Current fault code 1 703EH U0 63 eee 0 01 703FH does sem U0 65 Torque upper limit 0 1 7041H 134 Description of Function Codes Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Chapter 6 Description of Function Codes Group FO Basic Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 1 G type constant torque load Model
118. 8 0 10 GTNR35 8 11 4 8 6 15 0 5 0 8 4 GTNR35 10 10 5 17 5 10 5 2 5 40 5 GTNR50 8 8 4 12 6 9 6 16 0 11 0 6 0 18 0 2 8 43 5 GTNR50 10 10 5 GTNR70 8 8 4 GTNR70 10 15 0 12 0 18 0 13 0 7 0 21 0 10 5 28 50 0 CT 100 GTNR70 12 13 0 14 GTNR95 10 10 5 17 4 13 5 20 0 130 90 25 0 3 9 55 0 GTNR95 12 13 0 GTNR 120 12 14 0 13 0 60 0 19 8 15 0 22 0 10 0 28 0 4 7 16 GTNR 120 16 16 0 17 0 64 0 GTNR 150 12 13 0 21 2 16 5 26 0 16 0 11 0 30 0 4 7 69 0 RYC GTNR150 16 17 0 150 GTNR185 16 23 5 18 5 32 0 17 0 12 0 340 17 0 50 78 0 24 GTNR240 16 17 0 26 5 21 5 38 0 20 0 14 0 38 0 5 5 92 0 GTNR240 20 21 0 275 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual 8 4 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices Table 8 14 Selection of peripheral electrical devices of the MD380 MCCB Contactor Calle 1 Gelle Galta gi AC Drive Model Side Main Circuit Side Main Circuit Control Circuit SIER mm mm mm Single phase 220 V MD380S0 4GB 6 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380S0 7GB 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380S1 5GB 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 MD380S2 2GB 25 25 2 5 2 5 0 5 Three phase 220 V MD380 2T0 4GB 4 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 2T0 75GB 6 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 2T1 5GB 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 2T2 2GB 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 MD380 2T3 7GB 20 25 2 5 2 5 0 75 MD380 2T5 5
119. 80T250G 355 468 465 250 400 5 51 MD380T280G 396 525 520 280 370 6 21 MD380T315G 445 590 585 315 500 7 03 MD380T355G 500 665 650 355 420 7 81 MD380T400G 565 785 725 400 530 8 51 Three phase 480 V 50 60 Hz MD380 5T0 7GB 1 5 3 4 2 1 0 75 1 0 027 MD380 5T1 5GB 3 5 3 8 1 5 2 0 050 MD380 5T2 2GB 4 5 8 5 1 2 2 3 0 066 MD380 5T3 7GB 5 9 10 5 9 3 7 5 0 120 MD380 5T5 5GB 8 9 14 6 13 5 5 7 5 0 195 MD380 5T7 5GB 11 20 5 17 7 5 10 0 262 MD380 5T11GB 17 26 25 11 15 0 445 MD380 5T15GB 21 35 32 15 20 0 553 MD380 5T18 5G 24 38 5 37 18 5 25 0 651 MD380 5T22G 30 46 5 45 22 30 0 807 MD380 5T30G 40 62 60 30 40 1 01 MD380 5T37G 57 76 75 37 50 1 20 MD380 5T45G 69 92 91 45 60 1 51 MD380 5T55G 85 113 112 55 70 1 80 261 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Power Input Output Adaptable Thermal Power Model Capacity Current A Current Motor Consumption kVA A kW HP kW MD380 5T75G 114 157 150 75 100 1 84 MD380 5T90G 134 180 176 90 125 2 08 MD380 5T110G 160 214 210 110 150 2 55 MD380 5T132G 192 256 253 132 175 3 06 MD380 5T160G 231 307 304 160 210 3 61 MD380 5T200G 250 385 377 200 260 4 42 MD380 5T220G 280 430 426 220 300 4 87 MD380 5T250G 355 468 465 250 350 5 51 MD380 5T280G 396 525 520 280 370 6 21 MD380 5T315G 445 590 585 315 420 7 03 MD380 5T355G 500 665 650 355 470 7 81 MD380 5T400G 565 785 725 400 530 8 5
120. AC drive is powered on again after power failure the set frequency is the value memorized at the moment of the last power failure Note that F0 23 Retentive of digital setting frequency upon power failure determines whether the set frequency is memorized or cleared when the AC drive stops It is related to stop rather than power failure 2 Al1 0 10 V voltage input 3 Al2 0 10 V voltage input or 4 20 mA current input determined by jumper J8 4 AI3 0 10 V voltage input The frequency is set by analog input The MD380 control board provides two analog input Al terminals Al1 AI2 Another Al terminal AI3 is provided by the I O extension card The MD380 provides five curves indicating the mapping relationship between the input voltage of Al1 Al2 and and the target frequency three of which are linear point point correspondence and two of which are four point correspondence curves You can set the curves by using function codes F4 13 to F4 27 and function codes in group and select curves for Al1 Al2 and in F4 33 When Al is used as the frequency setting source the corresponding value 100 of the voltage current input corresponds to the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency 5 Pulse setting DI5 The frequency is set by DI5 high speed pulse The signal specification of pulse setting is 9 30 V voltage range and 0 100 kHz frequency range The corresponding value 100 of pulse setting corresponds to t
121. Acceleration Deceleration 1 0 1s 1 X time unit 2 0 015 Frequency offset of auxiliary F0 21 frequency source for X and to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz Y operation 22 Frequency reference 1 0 1 Hz 2 resolution 2 0 01 Hz Retentive of digital setting Not retentive F0 23 frequency upon power 2 1 Retentive 0 Motor parameter group 1 24 Motor parameter group 1 Motor parameter group 2 0 selection 2 Motor parameter group 3 3 Motor parameter group 4 0 Maximum frequency F0 10 F0 25 Acceleration Deceleration 1 Set frequency 0 time base frequency 2 100 Hz Base frequency for UP 0 Running frequency F0 26 DOWN modification during 0 running 1 Set frequency 82 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F0 27 Binding command source to frequency source Unit s digit Binding operation panel command to frequency source 0 No binding 1 Frequency source by digital setting Alt Al2 Al3 Pulse setting DI5 Multi reference 000 Simple PLC PID Communication setting OO NO oe ON Ten s digit Binding terminal command to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit Binding communication command to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit F0 28 Serial communication protocol 0 Modbus protocol 1 Profibus DP bridge 0
122. B MD380 2T0 75GB 113 172 186 125 164 5 0 1 1 MD380 2T1 5GB MD380 2T2 2GB 148 236 248 160 183 95 0 2 5 MD380 2T3 7GB MD380 2T5 5GB 190 305 322 208 192 26 6 5 MD380 2T7 5GB MD380 2T11G 235 447 432 463 285 228 96 5 20 MD380 2T15G MD380 2T18 5G MD380 2T22G 260 580 549 600 385 265 210 32 MD380 2T30G MD380 2T37G MD380 2T45G MD380 2T55G MD380 2T75G 343 678 660 700 473 307 210 47 449 903 880 930 579 380 210 90 Three phase 380 V MD380T0 7GB MD380T1 5GB 113 172 186 125 164 95 0 1 1 MD380T2 2GB MD380T3 7GB MD380T5 5GB MD380T7 5GB MD380T11GB 190 305 322 208 192 26 6 5 MD380T 15GB MD380T18 5G MD380T22G 235 447 432 463 285 228 96 5 20 MD380T30G MD380T37G MD380T45G 260 580 549 600 385 265 210 32 MD380T55G 148 236 248 160 183 95 0 2 5 264 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions ee Overall Dimensions ee mm 11915 weight mm Diameter kg A B H H1 w D mm 80 75 MD380T90P 343 678 660 700 473 307 010 47 MD380T90G MD380T110G MD380T132G 449 903 880 930 579 380 010 90 MD380T160G MD380T110GH MD380T132GH 320 1166 1090 1192 440 310 010 90 MD380T 160GH MD380T200G MD380T220G 420 1030 983 1060 650 377 012 130 MD380T280G MD380T315G MD380T355G
123. C 518101 Website www inovance cn 2 Product Warranty Inovance Add of unit Customer Contact person information Name of unit P C Tel Product model Body barcode Attach here Product information Name of agent Maintenance time and content Failure information Maintenance personnel Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co LTD Address Block E Hongwei Industry Park Liuxian Road Baocheng No 70 Zone Bao an District Shenzhen Tel 0755 2979 9595 Fax 0755 2961 9897 Technical support 400 777 1260 http www inovance cn
124. C drive with internal braking unit and used to adjust the duty ratio of the braking unit The larger the value of this parameter is the better the braking result will be However too larger value causes great fluctuation of the AC drive bus voltage during the braking process 182 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Group F7 Operation Panel and Display Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 MF K key disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control Key function terminal or communication selection 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation 3 Forward JOG 4 Reverse JOG F7 01 MF K key refers to multifunctional key You can set the function of the MF K key by using this parameter You can perform switchover by using this key both in stop or running state 0 MF K key disabled This key is disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control terminal or communication You can perform switchover from the current command source to the operation panel control local operation If the current command source is operation panel control this key is invalid 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation You can change the direction of the frequency reference by using the MF K key It is valid only when the current command source is operation panel control 3 For
125. DI1 to DI10 as an example with allocating functions of DI1 DI2 and DI3 by setting F4 00 to F4 02 165 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual 0 Two line mode 1 It is the most commonly used two line mode in which the forward reverse rotation of the motor is decided by DI1 and DI2 The parameters are set as below Function Code Parameter Name Value Function Description F4 11 Terminal command mode 0 Two line 1 F4 00 DI1 function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD F4 01 DI2 function selection 2 Reverse RUN REV Figure 6 7 Setting of two line mode 1 command 1 Forward RUN 1 Reverse RUN ee gt As shown in the preceding figure when only K1 is ON the AC drive instructs forward rotation When only K2 is ON the AC drive instructs reverse rotation When K1 and K2 are ON or OFF simultaneously the AC drive stops K1 o DI1 Forward RUN FWD DI2 Reverse RUN REV QCOM Digital common 1 Two line mode 2 In this mode DI1 is RUN enabled terminal and DI2 determines the running direction The parameters are set as below Function Code Parameter Name Value Function Description F4 11 Terminal command mode 1 Two line 2 F4 00 DI1 function selection 1 RUN enabled F4 01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse direction Figure 6 8 Setting of two line mode 2 RUN Forward RUN MD380 ODI1 RUN enabled Reverse RUN Forward or rev
126. DL 160EBK5 FN 3258 180 40 MD380T90G 134 180 DL 200EBK5 FN 3258 180 40 MD380T110G 160 214 DL 250EBK5 FN 3270H 250 99 MD380T132G 192 256 DL 300EBK3 FN 3270H 320 99 MD380T160G 231 307 DL 400EBK3 FN 3270H 320 99 MD380T200G 250 385 DL 400EBK3 FN 3270H 400 99 MD380T220G 280 430 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380T250G 355 468 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380T280G 396 525 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380T315G 445 590 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380T355G 500 665 DL 700EBK3 FN 3270H 800 99 MD380T400G 565 785 DL 800EBK3 FN 3270H 800 99 Three phase 480 V 50 60 Hz MD380 5T0 7GB 1 5 3 4 DL 5EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380 5T1 5GB 3 5 DL 5EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380 5T2 2GB 4 5 8 DL 10EBK5 FN 3258 7 44 MD380 5T3 7GB 5 9 10 5 DL 16EBK5 FN 3258 16 33 MD380 5T5 5GB 8 9 14 6 DL 16EBK5 FN 3258 16 33 MD380 5T7 5GB 11 20 5 DL 25EBK5 FN 3258 30 33 MD380 5T11GB 17 26 DL 35EBK5 FN 3258 30 33 MD380 5T15GB 21 35 DL 35EBK5 FN 3258 42 33 MD380 5T18 5G 24 38 5 DL 50EBK5 FN 3258 42 33 MD380 5T22G 30 46 5 DL 50EBK5 FN 3258 55 34 MD380 5T30G 40 62 DL 65EBK5 FN 3258 75 34 MD380 5T37G 57 76 DL 80EBK5 FN 3258 100 35 MD380 5T45G 69 92 DL 100EBK5 FN 3258 100 35 MD380 5T55G 85 113 DL 130EBK5 FN 3258 130 35 MD380 5T75G 114 157 DL 160EBK5 FN 3258 180 40 MD380 5T90G 134 180 DL 200EBK5 FN 3258 180 40 250 MD380 User Manual EMC Power feed Input AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model AC Divo Mosel Current Changzhou Jianli Schaffner kVA A MD380 5
127. DO output status Bit09 11 voltage V Bit10 AI2 voltage V Bit11 AI3 voltage V Bit12 Count value Bit13 Length value Bit14 Load speed display Bit15 PID setting 1F LED display runnin F7 04 pay parameters 2 0000 FFFF Bit00 PID feedback Bit01 PLC stage Bit02 Pulse setting frequency kHz Bit03 Running frequency 2 Hz Bit04 Remaining running time Bit05 AI1 voltage before correction V Bit06 AI2 voltage before correction V Bit07 AI3 voltage before correction V Bit08 Linear speed Bit09 Current power on time Hour Bit10 Current running time Min Bit11 Pulse setting frequency Hz Bit12 Communication setting value Bit13 Encoder feedback speed Hz Bit14 Main frequency X display Hz Bit15 Auxiliary frequency Y display Hz 97 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property 0000 FFFF Bit00 Set frequency Hz Bit01 Bus voltage V Bit02 DI input status Bit03 DO output status Bit04 AI1 voltage V Bit05 AI2 voltage V F7 05 LED display stop parameters Bit06 AI3 voltage V 33 Bit07 Count value Bit08 Length value Bit09 PLC stage Bit10 Load speed Bit11 PID setting Bit12 Pulse setting frequency kHz F7 06 isplay 0 0001 6 5000 1 0000 pro Heatsink teraperatureof e F7 08 Temporary softw
128. DT1 Frequency detection hysteresis FDT hysteresis 1 F8 19 50 00 Hz F8 20 0 0 100 0 FDT1 level 5 096 If the running frequency is higher than the value of F8 19 the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON If the running frequency is lower than value of F8 19 the DO terminal goes OFF 190 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes These two parameters are respectively used to set the detection value of output frequency and hysteresis value upon cancellation of the output The value of F8 20 is a percentage of the hysteresis frequency to the frequency detection value F8 19 The FDT function is shown in the following figure Figure 6 17 FDT level Output frequency Hz FDT level FDT hysteresis eee l Frequency reached Time t detection signal DO relay ON gt Time t Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 21 Detection range of frequency 0 00 100 maximum 0 0 reached frequency If the AC drive running frequency is within the certain range of the set frequency the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON This parameter is used to set the range within which the output frequency is detected to reach the set frequency The value of this parameter is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency The detection range of frequency reached is shown in the following figure Figure 6 18 Detect
129. F 8 44 F8 44 Timing duration Time t Running Automatic stop command Running state F8 43 0 timing duration determined by F 8 44 Set F8 42 to 1 to enable the timing function F8 44 Timing duration A gt Time t Running Automatic stop command You can set the timing duration by means of analog input such as potentiometer signal For details see the description of F8 43 58 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 7 5 JOG Running In certain applications the AC drive needs to run in low speed temporarily to facilitate equipment test or other commissioning operations In this case you can set the AC drive to perform JOG running Figure 4 14 JOG running Output frequency Acceleration Deceleration base frequency F0 25 JOG running f F0 08 1 Time t Actual l Actual acceleration poc time JOG acceleration JOG decelerati tim time F8 01 time 802 Set e tme F802 deceleration time JOG command Parameter Setting and Operation of JOG Running in Operation Panel Control Figure 4 15 JOG running in operation panel control Define the MF K ke as the Forward Operation ue y JOG key panel control P stop state F8 00 JOG running frequency MF K F7 01 3 F0 02 0 F8 01 JOG acceleration time 3 F8 02 JOG deceleration time F
130. Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Group F0 Standard Function Parameters 1 G type constant torque load ype q Model F0 00 G P type display 2 P type variable torque load dependent e e g fan and pump 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC 1 Closed loop vector control CLVC 2 Voltage Frequency V F control F0 01 Motor 1 control mode 0 Operation panel control LED off 1 Terminal control LED on 2 Communication control LED blinking 0 Digital setting non retentive at power failure 1 Digital setting retentive at Main frequency source X power failure 0 x selection 2 AM 3 AI2 4 F0 02 Command source selection F0 03 80 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F0 03 Main frequency source X selection 5 Pulse setting DI5 6 Multi reference 7 Simple PLC 8 PID 9 Communication setting F0 04 F0 05 Auxiliary frequency source Y selection Range of auxiliary frequency Y for X and Y operation The same as F0 03 Main frequency source X selection 0 Relative to maximum frequency 1 Relative to main frequency X F0 06 Range of auxiliary frequency Y for X and Y operation 0 150 100 F0 07 F0 08 Frequency source selection Preset frequency Unit s digit Frequency source selectio
131. G 800 800 240x2 240x2 1 0 Three phase 480 V MD380 5T0 7GB 4 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 5T1 5GB 6 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 5T2 2GB 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380 5T3 7GB 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 MD380 5T5 5GB 20 25 2 5 25 0 75 MD380 5T7 5GB 25 25 4 0 4 0 0 75 MD380 5T 11GB 32 32 4 0 4 0 0 75 MD380 5T15GB 40 40 6 0 6 0 0 75 MD380 5T18 5G 50 50 10 10 1 0 MD380 5T22G 50 50 10 10 1 0 MD380 5T30G 63 63 16 16 1 0 MD380 5T37G 80 80 25 25 1 0 MD380 5T45G 100 115 35 35 1 0 MD380 5T55G 125 125 50 50 1 0 MD380 5T75G 160 185 70 70 1 0 MD380 5T90G 200 225 95 95 1 0 MD380 5T110G 225 225 120 120 1 0 MD380 5T132G 315 330 120 120 1 0 MD380 5T160G 350 400 150 150 1 0 MD380 5T200G 400 400 185 185 1 0 MD380 5T220G 500 500 240 240 1 0 277 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Contactor Cable Gelle g Cupu Celte eu AC Drive Model Side Main Circuit Side Main Circuit Control Circuit SES mm mm mm MD380 5T250G 500 500 120 x2 120 x2 1 0 MD380 5T280G 630 630 120 x2 120 x2 1 0 MD380 5T315G 630 630 150 x 2 150 x 2 1 0 MD380 5T355G 700 800 185 x2 185 x2 1 0 MD380 5T400G 800 800 240 x2 240 x2 1 0 Three phase 690 V MD380 7T55G 80 80 16 16 1 0 MD380 7T75G 100 115 25 25 1 0 MD380 7T90G 125 125 35 35 1 0 MD380 7T110G 160 185 50 50 1 0 MD380 7T132G 180 200 70 70 1 0 MD380 7T160G 225 225 95 95 1 0 MD380 7T200G 250 250 120 120 1 0 MD380 7T220G 315 315 120 120 1
132. GB 32 32 4 0 4 0 0 75 MD380 2T7 5GB 40 40 6 0 6 0 0 75 MD380 2T11G 50 50 10 10 0 75 MD380 2T15G 63 63 16 16 0 75 MD380 2T18 5G 80 80 25 25 1 0 MD380 2T22G 100 115 35 35 1 0 MD380 2T30G 125 125 50 50 1 0 MD380 2T37G 160 185 70 70 1 0 MD380 2T45G 200 225 95 95 1 0 MD380 2T55G 225 225 120 120 10 MD380 2T75G 350 400 150 150 1 0 Three phase 380 V MD380T0 7GB 4 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380T1 5GB 6 9 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380T2 2GB 10 12 0 75 0 75 0 5 MD380T3 7GB 16 18 1 5 1 5 0 5 MD380T5 5 GB 20 25 2 5 2 5 0 75 MD380T7 5 GB 25 25 4 0 4 0 0 75 MD380T11 GB 32 32 6 0 6 0 0 75 MD380T15GB 40 40 6 0 6 0 0 75 MD380T18 5G 50 50 10 10 1 0 MD380T22G 50 50 10 10 1 0 MD380T30G 63 63 16 16 1 0 276 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions Contactor Gale 2i raus Celle IUIUS Calle AC Drive Model Side Main Circuit Side Main Circuit Control Circuit S mm mm mm MD380T37G 80 80 25 25 1 0 MD380T45G 100 115 35 35 1 0 MD380T55G 125 125 50 50 1 0 MD380T75G 160 185 70 70 1 0 MD380T90G 200 225 95 95 1 0 MD380T110G 225 225 120 120 1 0 MD380T132G 315 330 120 120 1 0 MD380T160G 350 400 150 150 1 0 MD380T200G 400 400 185 185 1 0 MD380T220G 500 500 240 240 1 0 MD380T250G 500 500 120 x2 120x2 1 0 MD380T280G 630 630 120x2 120x2 1 0 MD380T315G 630 630 150x2 150x2 1 0 MD380T355G 700 800 185 x2 185x2 1 0 MD380T400
133. I3 is used for separation analog input I O extension MD38101 and can be connected to PT100 It applies to the models card 1 PT1000 1 relay output 1 DO of 3 7 kW and above and 1 AO RS485 and CANIink communication terminal I O extension MD38102 It can extend 3 Dis It applies to all models card 2 Size B Modbus m communication MD38TX1 Ibis ihe 5485 communication card It applies to all models card with isolation card PANIK It is the CANIink icati communication MD38CAN1 cam o _ ttapplies to all models card CANopen It is the CANopen communication communication MD38CAN2 It applies to all models card card Profibus DP oo TS MD38DP It is the Profibus DP communication It applies to the models communication card of 3 7 kW and above card Iti tible to sH1U It lies to th del MD38PC1 is compatible to Inovance s applies to the models of 3 7 kW and above 26 MD380 User Manual Product Information MD32KC and MDCP Name Model Function Remark Differential It is the differential resolver interface encoder MD38PG1 card It applies to all models interface card It is adaptable to 5 V power supply It is suitable for the UVW differential UVW encoder encoder and applied to synchronous interface card MD38PG3 motor It applies to all models It is adaptable to 5 V power supply It is applied to the resolver Resolver MD
134. I5 can be used for pulse input The relationship between pulse input from DI5 and the corresponding setting is set in F4 28 to F4 31 The relationship is a two point line and 100 of pulse input corresponding setting corresponds to the maximum frequency of F0 10 as shown in Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 Pulse setting as the frequency source Function Setting Frequency Frequency code value feature setting source selection elationship between pulse setting frequency F0 07 20 and running frequency Terminal Running frequency Pulse setting Ga OC output 1 Only DI5 can be used for pulse input 4 8 6 Frequency Closed Loop Control The MD380 has a built in PID regulator Together with the frequency sources the PID regulator can implement automatic adjustment of progress control such as constant temperature constant pressure and tension control Figure 4 23 Automatic adjustment by PID regulator Built in PID FATS regulator FA 19 FO 07 0 FADI FA 03 PID action FA 20 F027 0 PID digital setting o Al Switchover T Reversaaction Proportional Kp1 FA 05 L_condition PID output T Integral Tit 06 frequency Derivative Tdi 07 FATS F0 03 09 PID deviation FA23 Tp Frequency EW
135. II circuit Maximum output current 200 mA Type Terminal Name Function Description Provide 10 V power supply to external unit 410V GND External 10 V Generally it provides power supply to external 7 power supply potentiometer with resistance range of 1 5 Maximum output current 10 mA gt E External 24 Provide 24 V power supply to external unit 2 Vpower Generally it provides power supply to DI DO 5 24V COM supplyApplying terminals and external sensors 2 Connect to 24 V by default When 011 015 need to be driven by external signal OP needs to be connected to external power supply and be disconnected from 24 V Input terminal of OP external power supply 39 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual Type Terminal Name Function Description Input voltage range 0 10 VDC Al1 GND Analog input 1 2 Impedance 22 c o Input range 0 10 VDC 4 20 mA decided by 2 jumper J8 on the control board AI2 GND Analog input 2 j lt Impedance 22 voltage input 500 current DI1 Digital input 1 Optical coupling isolation compatible with dual 7 DI2 Digital input 2 polarity input amp DI3 OP Digital input 3 Impedance 2 4 8 014 OP Digital input 4 Voltage range for level input 9 30 V a Besides features of DI1 DI4 it can be used for DI5 OP 2 pulse
136. L is displayed it indicates that the user defined menu is null A total of 16 parameters are pre stored in the user defined menu as listed in the following table F0 01 Motor 1 control mode F3 01 Torque boost F0 02 Command source selection F4 00 DI1 function selection F0 03 Main frequency source X selection F4 01 DI2 function selection F0 07 Frequency source selection F4 02 DI3 function selection F0 08 Preset frequency F5 04 function F0 17 Acceleration time 1 F5 07 AO1 function selection F0 18 Deceleration time 1 F6 00 Start mode F3 00 V F curve setting F6 10 Stop mode You can edit the user defined menu based on actual requirements SU In you modified menu only the parameters that are modified to a non default value are displayed The menu is generated by the AC drive automatically After the mode is switched over to C level Il menu is displayed 51 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 4 5 Definition and Operation of the Multifunction Key MF K You can define the function command source switchover or rotation direction switchover of the multifunction key in F7 01 For details see the description of F7 01 4 6 Viewing Status Parameters In the stop or running state you can press the operation panel to display status parameters Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the binary b
137. M chip is damaged Replace the main control write fault board 1 Handle based on AC drive Err22 1 Overvoltage exists overvoltage rr hardware fault 2 Overcurrent exists 2 Handle based on overcurrent Short circuit to Err23 The motor is short circuited to the Replace the cable or motor ground ground Accumulative 2 Clear the record through d The accumulative running time nore running time Err26 the parameter initialization reaches the setting value reached function 1 The user defined fault 1 signal User defined is input via DI Err27 Reset the operation fault 1 2 User defined fault 1 signal is input via virtual I O 1 The user defined fault 2 signal User defined is input via DI Err28 Reset the operation fault 2 2 The user defined fault 2 signal is input via virtual I O Accumulative Clear the record through The accumulative power on time power on time Err29 i the parameter initialization reaches the setting value reached function Check that the load is Load becoming 0 Err30 2 7 disconnected or the setting of 9 64 and 9 65 is correct F Check the PID feedback PID feedback lost Err31 The PID feedback is lower than signal or set FA 26 to a proper value 291 Maintenance and Troubleshooting MD380 User Manual Fault Name Pulse by pulse Display Possible Causes 1 The load is too heavy or locked rotor occurs on the motor Solut
138. M oan Object ii bia source Selection Proportional Kp2 FA 15 Integral 2 FA 16 FD op Derivative REA permer FAB DFTZ Calibration 1 curve 1 I UF use bet ic Physical PID setting II PID FA 12 FA02 PID F4 33 signal quantity feedback PO II 4515 feedback parameter Transmitter a M ing 4 4 16 10 ue preprocessing j When PID frequency closed loop control is implemented 03 Main frequency source X selection must be set to 8 PID The PID related parameters are set in group FA as shown in Figure 4 23 The MD380 has two built in equivalent PID calculating units You can set the features such as adjustment speed and accuracy for the two units separately based on the actual conditions Switchover between the two units can be implemented automatically or by means of an external DI terminal 64 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 8 7 Swing Mode For the textile and chemical fiber processing equipment the swing function improves the uniform density of traversing and winding as shown in Figure 4 24 The function is set in FB 00 to FB 04 For details see the description of these function codes Figure 4 24 Swing function 01 gt 0 FB 02 Jump frequency IH frequency N77 7 frequency litud FEBS Shing frequ
139. MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 14 Use of the PG Terminal The closed loop vector control with sensor F0 01 1 helps to improve the speed stability accuracy of the AC drive In this case it is necessary to install an encoder for the motor Signals from the encoder are fed back to the AC drive through the PG card The MD380 provides PG cards of four different types of signal features The AC drive supports four types of encoders differential encoder UVW encoder wire saving UVW encoder resolver open collector encoder The setting of encoder parameters varies with the actually used encoder type Here takes motor 1 parameters as an example for description For the differential encoder set F1 27 Encoder pulses per revolution and set F1 28 to 0 ABZ incremental encoder For the UVW encoder set F1 27 Encoder pulses per revolution and set 1 28 to 1 UVW incremental encoder For the resolver set 1 28 to 2 Resolver For the open collector encoder set 1 27 Encoder pulses per revolution and set F1 28 to 0 ABZ incremental encoder For the wire saving UVW encoder set F1 27 Encoder pulses per revolution and set F1 28 to 4 Wire saving UVW encoder 4 15 Use of Serial Communication When communication mode RS485 Profibus DP or CANopen are adopted you need to install a corresponding extension card on the MD380 series AC drive and set F0 28 correctly according to the used
140. Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation Do not connect the earthing terminal to the neutral conductor of the power supply impedance of the PE conductor must be able to withstand the large short circuit current that may arise when a fault occurs Select the size of the PE conductor according to the following table Cross sectional Area of a Min Cross sectional Area of Phase Conductor S Protective Conductor Sp S lt 16 S 16 mm lt S lt 35 mm 16 mm 35 lt S 5 2 You must use a yellow green cable as the PE conductor 7 Requirements on upstream protection device Install upstream protection device on the input power circuit The protection device must provide the protections on overcurrent short circuit and electrical solation When selecting the protective device you should consider the current capacity of the power cable system overload capacity and short circuit capacity of the upstream power distribution of the equipment Generally make selection according to the recommended values in section 8 4 3 2 3 Description of Control Circuit Terminals Terminal Arrangement of Control Circuit 10 AI2 DI2 DI4 DI5 COM GND GND AO1 CME COM DO1 FM 24V OP T A T B T C Description of Control Circuit Terminals Table 3 3 Description of control circuit terminals to Overvoltage Category
141. N E Forward JOG C n ie i Fault reset __7 Interface for 111012 PG card interface Multi reference UR Extension terminal2 ii panel card interface IT J5 e esi GND AOT U 3 13 1 voltage current 001 1 5 selection 1 2015 FM 5 COM 5 Jumper bar A Shov m e a8 Fault output z 2 voltage current Hei Shielded ocom Selection cable Control circuit A4 Fault contact output 250 VAC 10 mA to3A 30 VDC 10 mA to1A Operation Display and Application Examples Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation Display and Application Examples 4 1 Operation Panel You can modify the parameters monitor the working status and start or stop the MD380 by operating the operation panel as shown in the following figure Figure 4 1 Diagram of the operation panel Forward Reverse rotation indicator ON reverse rotation Command source indicator ON local control Local OFF Operation panel control Blinking Remote control Remot OFF forward rotation Tuning Torque RUN LOCAL REMOT FED REV control Fault indicator RUN indicator Data display Unit indicator Increment key Programming key Confirm key Menu key Shift key Decrement key RUN key Stop Reset key Multi function key 4 1 1 Description of Indicator
142. S encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder A B phase sequence 0 Forward A2 30 of ABZ incremental 0 1 Reserve encoder 229 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A2 31 Encoder installation 0 0 359 9 0 0 angle U V W phase 0 Forward A2 32 sequence of UVW 0 encoder 1 Reverse A2 33 UVW encoder angle 0 0 359 9 00 offset A2 34 Number of pole pairs 1 65535 1 of resolver ire 0 0s No action A2 36 Encoder wire break 0 0s fault detection time 0 1 10 0s 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto A2 37 Auto tuning selection tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning a2 38 0 100 30 proportional gain 1 A2 39 Speed loop integral 01 10 00s 0 50s time 1 A2 40 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to A2 43 5 00 Hz A2 41 Speed 0 100 15 proportional gain 2 A242 Speed loop integral 9 o4 15 pos 1 00s time 2 A2 43 Switchover frequency 2 A2 40 to maximum output frequency 10 00 Hz A2 44 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 Azas Te constont ot 0 000 0 100s 0 000s speed loop filter A2 46 Vector control over 0 200 64 excitation gain 0 A2 48 1 AM 2 12 Torque upper limit 3 AI3 2 47 source in speed 0 control mode 4 Pulse setting DI5
143. Setting Range Default A6 00 Al curve 4 minimum input 10 00 V to A6 02 0 00 V 6 01 Corresponding setting ot 100 0 100 0 0 0 curve 4 minimum input A6 02 Al curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6 00 to A6 04 3 00 V 6 03 Corresponding setting of Al 100 0 100 0 30 0 curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6 04 Al curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6 02 to A6 06 6 00 V Corresponding setting of Al A6 05 curve 4 inflexion 1 input 100 0 100 0 60 0 6 06 Al curve 4 maximum input A6 06 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 6 07 Ot 100 0 100 0 100 0 curve 4 maximum input A6 08 Al curve 5 minimum input 10 00 V to A6 10 0 00 V 234 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Name Setting Range Default 6 09 s tting f Al 100 0 100 0 0 0 curve 5 minimum input A6 10 Al curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6 08 to A6 12 3 00 V Corresponding setting of Al 1 6 6 11 curve 5 inflexion 4 input 100 0 100 0 30 0 6 12 Al curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6 10 to A6 14 6 00 V 6 13 Corresponding setting or Al 100 0 100 0 60 0 curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6 14 Al curve 5 maximum input A6 14 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 6 15 Cotrespanding setung 100 0 100 0 100 0 curve 5 maximum input The function of curve 4 and curve 5 is similar to that curve 1 to curve 3 but curve 1 to curve 3 are lines and curve 4 and curve 5 are 4 point curv
144. T110G 160 214 DL 250EBK5 FN 3270H 250 99 MD380 5T132G 192 256 DL 300EBK3 FN 3270H 320 99 MD380 5T160G 231 307 DL 400EBK3 FN 3270H 320 99 MD380 5T200G 250 385 DL 400EBK3 FN 3270H 400 99 MD380 5T220G 280 430 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380 5T250G 355 468 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380 5T280G 396 525 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380 5T315G 445 590 DL 600EBK3 FN 3270H 600 99 MD380 5T355G 500 665 DL 700EBK3 FN 3270H 800 99 MD380 5T400G 565 785 DL 800EBK3 FN 3270H 800 99 Three phase 690 V 50 60 Hz MD380 7T55G 84 70 DL 100EBK5 CHV MD380 7T75G 107 90 DL 100EBK5 CHV MD380 7T90G 125 105 DL 130EBK51 CHV MD380 7T110G 155 130 DL 160EBK5 CHV MD380 7T132G 192 170 DL 200EBK5 CHV MD380 7T160G 231 200 DL 250EBK31 60 MD380 7T200G 250 235 DL 250EBK31 60 MD380 7T220G 280 247 DL 250EBK31 60 MD380 7T250G 355 265 No recommendation MD380 7T280G 396 305 No recommendation MD380 7T315G 445 350 No recommendation MD380 7T355G 500 382 No recommendation MD380 7T400G 565 435 DL 600EBK35 60 MD380 7T450G 630 490 DL 600EBK35 60 MD380 7T500G 700 595 DL 600EBK35 60 7 3 2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current As an optional device the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application environment for harmonics The following t
145. able lists the recommended manufacturers and models of input reactors Table 7 2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors AC Drive Model Rated 2 Current AC pis Model Three phase power 380 V 50 60 Hz MD380T0 7GB 3 4 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 MD380T1 5GB 5 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 251 MD380 User Manual AC Drive Model Rated Input Current AC Input Reactor Model A Inovance MD380T2 2GB 5 8 MD ACL 7 4T 222 2 MD380T3 7GB 10 5 MD ACL 10 4T 372 2 MD380T5 5GB 14 6 MD ACL 15 4T 552 2 MD380T7 5GB 20 5 MD ACL 30 4T 113 2 MD380T11GB 26 MD ACL 30 4T 113 2 MD380T15GB 35 MD ACL 40 4T 153 2 MD380T18 5G 38 5 MD ACL 40 4T 153 2 MD380T22G 46 5 MD ACL 50 4T 183 2 MD380T30G 62 MD ACL 80 4T 303 2 MD380T37G 76 MD ACL 80 4T 303 2 MD380T45G 92 MD ACL 120 4T 453 2 MD380T55G 113 MD ACL 120 4T 453 2 MD380T75G 157 MD ACL 200 4T 753 2 MD380T90G 180 MD ACL 200 4T 753 2 MD380T110G 214 MD ACL 250 4T 114 296 MD380T132G 256 MD ACL 330 4T 164 2 MD380T160G 307 MD ACL 330 4T 164 2 MD380T200G 385 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380T220G 430 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380T250G 468 MD ACL 490 4T 224 2 MD380T280G 525 MD ACL 660 4T 304 2 MD380T315G 590 MD ACL 660 4T 304 2 MD380T355G 665 MD ACL 800 4T 384 2 MD380T400G 785 MD ACL 800 4T 384 2 Three phase power 480 V 50 60 Hz MD380 5T0 7GB 3
146. ain the AC drive decelerates to stop 4 8 Setting the Running Frequency The AC drive provides two frequency sources namely main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y You can select one frequency source and switch over between the two sources You can also perform superposition on the two sources by setting the calculation formula to meet different control requirements of different scenarios 4 8 1 Frequency Setting by the Main Frequency Source There are nine setting modes of main frequency sources digital setting UP DOWN modification non retentive at power failure digital setting UP DOWN modification retentive at power failure Al1 Al2 AI3 pulse setting multi reference simple PLC and communication setting You can select one in F0 03 Figure 4 17 Frequency set by the main frequency source X Retentive at setting 4 power failure All frequency 030 V eJ8 3 source X m KH 420 mA P439 analog ogo BAe re i l Frequenc pis Hel eS ou setting quency lraootor 4 04 00 toFC 15 6 source F4 00 to DI1 to 1213 14 15 e selection F4 09 39 SugFG IT IT Simple PLC Al1to AI2 8 011 to DIO 015 f
147. al Parameter Setting Range Default Property A2 42 Speed loop integral time 2 0 01 10 005 1 00s 2 43 Switchover frequency 2 10 00Hz x frequency A2 44 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 A2 45 ds constant OF sp ed 0 000s A2 46 Vector control over 0 200 64 X excitation gain 0 A2 48 1 AM 2 AI2 imi in 3 AI3 2 47 Torque upper limit source 0 speed control mode 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Via communication 6 MIN AI1 AI2 7 MIN AI1 AI2 Digital setting of torque A2 48 upper limit in speed control 0 0 200 0 150 096 mode rS c 248 bibi mem 0 20000 2000 proportional gain adjustment 0 20000 1300 integral gain 253 adjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain 2 54 Torque adjustment integral 0 20000 1300 gain Unit s digit Integral separated A2 55 Speed loop integral property 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled 0 No field weakening 2 56 Field weakening mode of 4 Direct calculation 0 synchronous motor 2 Adjustment A2 57 Field weakening degree of 509650096 100 synchronous motor Maximum field weakening P 6 A2 58 current 1 300 50 2 59 Field weakening automatic 109650096 10096 adjustment gain 2 60 Field weakening integral 2 10 2 X multiple 120 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table
148. al Braking resistor reactor MCCB 9 7 IMD380 MDBUN Braking unit 37 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 Precautions on the Wiring Power input terminals L1 L2 or R S T cable connection on the input side of the AC drive has no phase sequence requirement specification and installation method of external power cables must comply with the local safety regulations and related IEC standards Use copper conductors of a proper size as power cables according to the recommended values in section 8 3 DC bus terminals Terminals and of DC bus have residual voltage after the AC drive is Switched off After indicator CHARGE goes off wait at least 10 minutes before touching the equipment Otherwise you may get electric shock connecting external braking components for the AC drive of 18 5 kW and above 220 V and 37 kW and above other voltage classes do not reverse poles and Otherwise it may damage the AC drive and even cause a fire cable length of the braking unit shall be no longer than 10 m Use twisted pair wire or pair wires for parallel connection Do not connect the braking resistor directly to the DC bus Otherwise it may damage the AC drive and even cause fire Braking resistor connecting terminals PB connecting terminals of
149. al Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9 1 3 Replacement of Vulnerable Components The vulnerable components of the AC drive are cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor Their service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance status Generally the service life is shown as follows Component Service Life Possible Damage Reason Judging Criteria Bearing worn Whether there is crack on the blade Fan 2 to years Blade aging Whether there is abnormal vibration noise upon startup Input power supply Whether there is liquid leakage in poor quality Whether the safe valve has projected Electrolytic 4 to 5 years High ambient temperature Measure the static capacitance capacitor Frequent load jumping Measure the insulating resistance Electrolytic aging 9 1 4 Storage of the AC Drive For storage of the AC drive pay attention to the following two aspects 1 Packthe AC drive with the original packing box provided by Inovance 2 Long term storage degrades the electrolytic capacitor Thus the AC drive must be energized once every 2 years each time lasting at least 5 hours The input voltage must be increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator 9 2 Warranty Agreement 1 Free warranty only applies to the AC drive itself 2 Inovance will provide 18 month warranty starting from the leave factory date as indicated on the barcode for the failure o
150. al state computer e 2 The communication cable is 2 Check the communication Err46 faulty cabling au 3 F0 28 is set improperly 3 Set F0 28 correctly 4 The communication parameters 4 Set the communication in group FD are set improperly parameters properly 1 The drive board and power 1 Replace thie dns board or power supply board Contactor fault Err47 supply are faulty 2 The contactor is faulty 2 Replace the faulty contactor 290 MD380 User Manual Maintenance and Troubleshooting during running the setting of FA 26 Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions 1 Replace the faulty HALL Current detection Eris 1 The HALL device is faulty device rr fault 2 The drive board is faulty 2 Replace the faulty drive board 1 Set the motor parameters 1 The motor parameters not according to the nameplate Motor auto tuning 19 set according to the nameplate properly rr fault 2 The motor auto tuning times 2 Check the cable out connecting the AC drive and the motor 1 Set the encoder type 1 The encoder type is incorrect correctly Dased on Discus situation 2 The cable connection of the PME END 2 Eliminate external faults Encoder fault Err20 encoder is incorrect 3 The encoder is damaged 3 Replace the damaged encoder 4 The PG card is faulty 4 Replace the faulty PG card EEPROM read Em21 The EEPRO
151. alues Corresponding set value frequency torque 100 0 0 V 0 Corresponding set value frequency torque 100 096 0 V 0 mA 1000 10 V 20 mA Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 18 Al curve 2 minimum input 0 00 V to F4 20 0 00 V F4 19 Corresponding selling 100 00 100 0 0 0 curve 2 minimum input F4 20 Al curve 2 maximum input F4 18 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 4 21 Corresponding setting of AI 100 00 100 0 100 0 curve 2 maximum input F4 22 Al2 filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 23 Al curve 3 minimum input 0 00 V to F4 25 0 00 V Corresponding setting of Al 5 6 5 F4 24 curve 3 minimum input 100 00 100 0 0 0 F4 25 Al curve 3 maximum input F4 23 to 10 00 V 10 00 V F4 26 Cores ponding ofA 100 00 100 0 100 0 curve 3 maximum input F4 27 AI3 filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 The method of setting AI2 and AI3 functions is similar to that of setting 11 function 169 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 28 Pulse minimum input 0 00 kHz to F4 30 0 00 kHz F4 29 Cones ponding sening or 100 00 100 0 0 0 pulse minimum input F4 30 Pulse maximum input F4 28 to 50 00 kHz 50 00 kHz F4 31 Corresp nding setting of 100 0096 100 096 100 0 pulse maximum input F
152. ame as unit s digit 0 voltage input AO2 voltage output 1 Al3 voltage input AO2 current output 2 AI3 current input AO2 voltage output 3 AI3 current input AO2 function selection of current output AT 02 0 the user programmable card 4 Al3 PTC input AO2 voltage output 5 AI3 PTC input AO2 current output 6 AI3 PTC100 input AO2 voltage output 7 AI3 PTC100 input AO2 current output AT 03 FMP output 0 0 100 0 0 0 7 04 1 output 0 0 100 0 0 0 Binary setting Unit s digit FMR AT 05 Digital output x 1 Ten s digit 1 Hundred s digit DO 7 06 Frequency setting through 466 to 100 00 0 0 the user programmable card A7 07 Torque setting through the to 200 00 0 0 user programmable card 130 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table pred Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 1 Forward RUN 2 Reverse RUN 3 Forward JOG 7 08 Command given by the user 4 Reverse JOG 0 programmable card 5 Coast to stop 6 Decelerate to stop 7 Fault reset i 0 No fault 7 09 Faults given by the user 0 programmable card 80 89 Fault codes Group A8 Point point Communication int poi icati 0 Disabled A8 00 Point point communication 0 selection 1 Enabled 0 Master A8 01 and slave se
153. and Dimensions 8 3 Recommended Cable Diameter and Installation Dimensions of Power Terminals Note The recommended data and models are for reference only The cable diameter you select cannot be larger than the size in the following figures The prerequisite of cable selection is as follows Under ambient temperature of 40 C in steady state for the recommended diameters of the insulation copper conductor or cable see section 12 4 of the IEC 60204 1 2005 Figure 8 3 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size B 9 5 8 M3 5 combina ion screw P d mos T ll Table 8 8 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size B Recommended AC Drive Model Curent OutputPower Torque Driver TUR od A Nm MD380S0 4GB 5 40 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380S0 7GB 8 20 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380S1 5GB 14 00 1 5 TNR1 5 4 MD380S2 2GB 23 00 2 5 GTNR2 5 4 MD380 2T0 4GB 3 40 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380 2T0 75GB 5 00 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380 2T1 1GB 5 80 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380 2T2 2GB 10 50 1 5 9 8 TNR1 5 4 MD380T0 7GB 3 40 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380T1 5GB 5 00 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380T2 2GB 5 80 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380 5T0 7GB 3 40 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD380 5T1 5GB 5 00 0 75 TNRO 75 4 MD38
154. andard EN 61800 3 2004 Category C2 C3 or C4 The system machinery or appliance installed with the AC drive must also have the CE mark The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC directive and standard EN 61800 3 2004 Category C2 Warning If applied in the first environment the AC drive may generate radio interference Besides the CE compliance described in this chapter users must take measures to avoid such interference if necessary 7 3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices 7 3 1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side An EMC filter installed between the AC drive and the power supply can not only restrict the interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the AC drive but also prevents the interference from the AC drive on the surrounding equipment The MD380 series AC drive satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter installed on the power input side The installation precautions are as follows Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter The EMC filter is category electric apparatus and therefore the metal housing ground of the filter should be in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area and requires good conductive continuity Otherwise it will result in electric shock or poor EMC effect ground of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the AC drive
155. anel are respectively H 1043 and H 2001 respectively for F7 03 and F7 04 4 7 Starting or Stopping the AC Drive 4 7 1 Selecting the Start Stop Command Source There are three start stop command sources namely operation panel control terminal control and communication control You can select the command source in F0 02 Function Parameter Corts Nene Setting Range Description Default 0 Operation panel control Press or to start indicator OFF ERG Command or stop the AC drive 7 source indicator ON A DI terminal needs to be defined selection 2 Communication control 85 the run stop terminal indicator blinking The Modbus RTU communication protocol is used 0 Operation panel control After you press the drive starts running the RUN indicator is ON After you press amp when the AC drive is in running state the AC drive stops running the RUN indicator is OFF 1 Terminal control This control mode is applicable to scenarios where the DIP switch or electromagnetic button is used to start or stop the application system or scenarios where the dry contact signal is used to start or stop the AC drive 54 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example The switch signal mode is set in F4 11 The input terminal of the start stop signal is set in F4 00 to F4 09 For details see the description of F4 11 and F4 00 to F4 09 E
156. anual E Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property FC 26 UR of simple PLC o 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h x roar pestis rela TE 28 ee of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h x roan ements JE 30 of simple PLC 5 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h poaa Runnng time of simple o 6 ese h 0 0s h festis 34 of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h x reas festis TE 6 Running time of simple PLC 0 4 553 5 h 0 0s h x 8 Running time of simple PLC 0 4553 es h 0 0s h x frags re TIE 40 Fanning tire of simple PLC 0 0_6553 5s h 0 0s h freccia 42 Running time of simple o 0 6563 5s h 0 0s h rove fratoaionecaurion tre s FC 44 Running time of simple PLC o 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h x oas Running time of simple PLC 0 0_6553 5s n 0 0s h reference 14 dU MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Setting Range Default Property Acceleration deceleration time of simple PLC reference 14 0 3 0 Running time of simple PLC FC 48 reference 15 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time FC 49 of simple PLC reference 15 0 3 0 Time unit of simple FC 50 0 s second 1 h
157. apid current limit function can reduce the AC drive s overcurrent faults at maximum guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the AC drive However long time rapid current limit may cause the AC drive to overheat which is not allowed In this case the AC drive will report Err40 indicating the AC drive is overloaded and needs to stop Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A5 05 Current detection compensation 0 100 5 It is used to set the AC drive current detection compensation Too large value may lead to deterioration of control performance Do not modify it generally Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A5 06 Undervoltage threshold 60 0 140 0 100 0 It is used to set the undervoltage threshold of Err09 The undervoltage threshold 100 of the AC drive of different voltage classes corresponds to different nominal values as listed in the following table Table 6 11 Undervoltage nominal values for different voltage Voltage Class Nominal Value of Undervoltage threshold Single phase 220 V 200 V Three phase 220 V 200 V Three phase 380 V 350V Three phase 480 V 450 V Three phase 690 V 650V Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No optimization SFVC optimization mode A5 07 selection 1 Optimization mode 1 1 2 Optimization mode 2 1 Optimization mode 1 It is used when the requirement on
158. arallel Otherwise DI mal function may result If parallel connection different AC drives is required connect a diode in series at the DI and the diode needs to satisfy the requirement IF gt 10 mA UF lt 1 V 42 MD380 User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation Figure 3 18 DI terminals connected in parallel in SINK mode 277777777700 d S 24V Control board 241 7 ofAC drive 1 i i Signal Y z Dm 24k SN i NPN COM ABE F Controlboard 247 drive 2 330 uU et peo 57 r oj DII 24k COM External I BEN controller i b SOURCE wiring In such wiring mode remove the jumper between 24 V and OP Connect 24 V to the common port of external controller and meanwhile connect OP to COM If external power supply is applied remove the jumper between CME and COM Figure 3 19 Wiring in SOURCE mode T Ic QC i 24 VCC 94 17 1 T 330 i 4 DM 24k i ip Signal 1 i zt 1 DIB 24 l
159. are helps to achieve functions of parameter upload amp download and a real time oscilloscope Other new functions The newly added functions of the MD380 series AC drive are described as below Function Description Virtual I O It can implement various simple logic functions The optional MD38101 extension card enables AI3 to receive the signal from the motor temperature sensor input PT100 PT1000 thereby providing motor overheat protection Motor overheat protection It helps to avoid frequent occurrence of overcurrent faults Rapid current limit of the AC drive MD380 User Manual Introduction Function Multi motor switchover Description Four motors can be switched over via four groups of motor parameters Restoring user parameters It allows you to save or restore the parameters set by yourself Higher accuracy Al AO The AI AO accuracy can reach almost 20 mv via factory correction or on site correction Customized parameter display You can customize the parameters that need to be displayed Modified parameter display You can view the modified parameters Operation selection at fault occurrence PID parameters switchover You can select the reaction of the AC drive to a fault occurring based on the actual need The reactions are as below Coast to stop Decelerate to stop Continue to run You can also select the frequency at which the AC d
160. are version e F7 09 Accumulative running time 0 65535 h e F7 10 Product number e F7 11 Software version e 0 0 decimal place p 12 Number of decimal places for load speed display 2 2 decimal places 3 3 decimal places F7 13 Accumulative power on time 0 65535 h Oh F7 14 4 power 0 65535 kWh gt Group F8 Auxiliary Functions F8 00 JOG running frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 2 00 Hz F8 01 JOG acceleration time 0 0 6500 05 20 05 X F8 02 JOG deceleration time 0 0 6500 05 20 05 F8 03 Acceleration time 2 0 0 6500 0s Nec F8 04 Deceleration time 2 0 0 6500 0s 98 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Ed Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F8 05 Acceleration time 3 0 0 6500 0s dependent F8 06 Deceleration time 3 0 0 6500 05 dependent F8 07 Acceleration time 4 0 0 500 0s MORI dependent F8 08 Deceleration time 4 0 0 6500 0s dependent F8 09 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz F8 10 Jump frequency 2 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz F8 11 Frequency jump amplitude 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz F8 12 Forward Reverse rotation 0 0 3000 0s 0 0s e dead zone time 0 Enabled F8 13 Reverse control 0 1 Disabled Running mode when set 0 Run at frequency lower limit F8 14 frequency lower than 1 Stop 0
161. becomes OFF the AC drive runs in the mode control switchover set in AO 00 When this terminal becomes ON the AC drive switches over to the other control mode 163 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Value Function Description 47 Emergency stop When this terminal becomes ON the AC drive stops within the shortest time During the stop process the current remains at the set current upper limit This function is used to satisfy the requirement of stopping the AC drive in emergency state 48 External STOP terminal 2 In any control mode operation panel terminal or communication it can be used to make the AC drive decelerate to stop In this case the deceleration time is deceleration time 4 49 Deceleration DC braking When this terminal becomes ON the AC drive decelerates to the initial frequency of stop DC braking and then switches over to DC braking state 50 Clear the current running time When this terminal becomes ON the AC drive s current running time is cleared This function must be supported by F8 42 and F8 53 51 Switchover between two line mode and three line mode It is used to perform switchover between two line control and three line control If F4 11 is set to Two line mode 1 the system switches over to three line mode 1 when the DI allocated with this function becomes ON The four multi reference terminal
162. below Function Code Parameter Name Value Function Description F4 11 Terminal command mode 3 Three line 2 F4 00 DI1 function selection 1 RUN enabled F4 01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse direction F4 02 DI3 function selection 3 Three line control 167 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Figure 6 10 Setting of three line mode 2 RUN so MI MD380 button DI4 RUN command Running Stop K direction button SB1 s DIS Stop running f DI2 Running direction COM Digital common As shown in the preceding figure if SB1 is ON the AC drive starts running when SB2 is pressed to be ON the AC drive instructs forward rotation when K is OFF and instructs reverse rotation when K is ON The AC drive stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF During normal startup and running SB1 must remain ON The AC drive s running state is determined by the final actions of SB1 SB2 and K Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 12 Terminal UP DOWN rate 0 01 65 535 Hz s 1 00 Hz s It is used to adjust the rate of change of frequency when the frequency is adjusted by means of terminal UP DOWN If 22 Frequency reference resolution is 2 the setting range is 0 001 65 535 Hz s If F0 22 Frequency reference resolution is 1 the setting range is 0 01 655 35 Hz s Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4
163. ble is short circuited to the 3 a megger at power on ground 2 AC drive is damaged onec Me SgenEor Inovance for technical support The AC drive display is normal 4 The cooling fan is damaged or upon locked rotor occurs 1 Replace the damaged fan 4 lon But HC is RESP displayed after 2 The external control terminal 2 Eliminate external fault running and stops cable is short circuited immediately 1 The setting of carrier frequency is 1 Reduce the carrier frequency too high F0 15 Err14 module 0 15 2 The cooling is damaged or overheat fault 2 Replace the fan and clean the 5 the air filter is blocked es is reported Mh air filter frequently 3 Components inside the AC drive 3 Contact the agent or Inovance are damaged thermal coupler or others for technical support 293 Maintenance and Troubleshooting MD380 User Manual SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions 1 Check the motor and the motor cables 1 Ensure the cable between the AC drive and the motor is 2 The AC drive parameters are set normal The motor does improperly motor parameters 6 notrotate after the 2 Replace the motor or clear AC drive runs 3 The cable between the drive mechanical faults board and the control board is in poor contact 3 Check and re set motor i parameters 4 The drive board is faulty 1 Check and reset t
164. bled 1 A5 05 Current detection 0 100 5 e compensation 5 06 Undervoltage threshold 60 0 140 0 100 0 0 optimization as 07 SFVC optimization mode 14 Optimization mode 1 1 selection 2 Optimization mode 2 5 08 Dead zone time adjustment 100 200 15096 X A5 09 Overvoltage threshold 200 0 2500 0 V 2000 0 V Group 6 Al Curve Setting A6 00 Al curve 4 minimum input 10 00 V to A6 02 0 00 V 6 01 Corresponding setting of Al 466 100 0 0 0 curve 4 minimum input A6 02 curve 4 inflexion 1 input 6 00 to A6 04 3 00V Comesponding setting co 0 100 0 30 0 curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6 04 Al curve 4 inflexion 1 input 6 02 to A6 06 6 00 V 6 05 setting of Al 155 oec 100 0 60 0 curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6 06 Al curve 4 maximum input A6 06 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 128 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table selection 1 Enabled Setting Range Default Property COrresponding setting of Al aon ger 100 0 100 0 curve 4 maximum input A6 08 Al curve 5 minimum input 10 00 V to A6 10 0 00 V Ae og Corresponding setting of Al poc 106 gor 0 0 curve 5 minimum input A6 10 curve 5 inflexion 1 input 6 08 to A6 12 3 00V Ag 11 Comesponding setting of AL on 994 100 0
165. board 0 0 decimal place F7 12 ee ti 1 display 2 2 decimal places 3 3 decimal places F7 12 is used to set the number of decimal places for load speed display The following gives an example to explain how to calculate the load speed Assume that F7 06 Load speed display coefficient is 2 000 and F7 12 is 2 2 decimal places When the running frequency of the AC drive is 40 00 Hz the load speed is 40 00 x 2 000 80 00 display of 2 decimal places If the AC drive is in the stop state the load speed is the speed corresponding to the set frequency namely set load speed If the set frequency is 50 00 Hz the load speed in the stop state is 50 00 x 2 000 100 00 display of 2 decimal places Default Oh Function Code Parameter Name F7 13 Setting Range 0 65535 h Accumulative power on time It is used to display the accumulative power on time of the AC drive since the delivery If the time reaches the set power on time F8 17 the terminal with the digital output function 24 becomes ON Function Code Parameter Name F7 14 Setting Range Default 0 65535 kWh Accumulative power consumption It is used to display the accumulative power consumption of the AC drive until now Group F8 Auxiliary Functions Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 00 JOG running frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum f
166. ce Running direction Time t rh e FC 18 20 FC 23 DO or relay output 216 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Retentive upon power failure 0 No 17 Simple PLC 1 Yes 00 retentive selection Ten s digit Retentive upon stop 0 No 1 Yes PLC retentive upon power failure indicates that the AC drive memorizes the PLC running moment and running frequency before power failure and will continue to run from the memorized moment after it is powered on again If the unit s digit is set to 0 the AC drive restarts the PLC process after it is powered on again PLC retentive upon stop indicates that the AC drive records the PLC running moment and running frequency upon stop and will continue to run from the recorded moment after it starts up again If the ten s digit is set to 0 the AC drive restarts the PLC process after it starts up again Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FC 18 Running time of simple PLC reference 0 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple PLC reference 0 FC 20 Running time of simple PLC reference 1 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple FC 19 0 3 0 1 cw 0 22 Running time of simple PLC reference 2 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Accelera
167. ceeds the value set in F9 58 the DO terminal on the AC drive allocated with function 39 Motor overheat warning becomes ON Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Invalid F9 59 Action selection at instantaneous 1 Decelerate 0 power failure 2 Decelerate to stop Action pause judging voltage at instantaneous power failure F9 60 80 0 100 0 90 0 Voltage rally judging time at F9 61 0 00 100 005 0 505 instantaneous power failure 9 62 Action judging voltage at 60 0 100 0 80 0 instantaneous power failure standard bus voltage Upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the DC bus voltage of the AC drive reduces This function enables the AC drive to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output frequency so as to keep the AC drive running continuously If F9 59 1 upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the AC drive decelerates Once the bus voltage resumes to normal the AC drive accelerates to the set frequency If the bus voltage remains normal for the time exceeding the value set in F9 61 it is considered that the bus voltage resumes to normal If F9 59 2 upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip the AC drive decelerates to stop 205 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Figure 6 26 AC drive action diagram upon instantaneous power fa
168. combinations of two states of these 17 Terminal 2 for acceleration two terminals deceleration time selection 1 Frequency source The terminal is used to perform switchover between two 8 22275 switchover frequency sources according to the setting in F0 07 If the frequency source is digital setting the terminal UP and DOWN setting is used to clear the modification by using the UP 19 clear terminal operation DOWN function or the increment decrement key on the panel operation panel returning the set frequency to the value of F0 08 If the command source is set to terminal control F0 02 1 this terminal is used to perform switchover between terminal control and operation panel control 20 Command source OH switchover terminal If the command Source is set to communication control F0 02 2 this terminal is used to perform switchover between communication control and operation panel control It enables the AC drive to maintain the current frequency Acceleration Deceleration 21 rohibited output without being affected by external signals except P the STOP command PID is invalid temporarily The AC drive maintains 22 PID pause the current frequency output without supporting PID adjustment of frequency source The terminal is used to restore the original status of 23 PLC status reset PLC control for the AC drive when PLC control is started again after a pause The AC drive outputs the central frequency and the 24 Swing
169. communication protocol type CAN link is enabled by default and you need not select it For the configuration of hardware communication parameters for the communication port see group FD Set the communication rate and data format to consistent with those of the host computer which is the precondition of normal communication The MD380 serial port itself supports the Modbus RTU slave communication protocol You can query or modify the AC drive s function codes query various running state parameters and send running command and running frequency to the AC drive from the host computer through the serial port Figure 4 34 Communication control mode of the AC drive The communication setting must 5489 be consistent with host computer communication extension card Modbus RTU Fd 00 Baud rate K 3 Function code communication Fd 01 Data format protocol Fd 02 Local address Running status Fd 03 Response delay parameters Fd 04 Communication timeout Fd 05 Communication protocol Running selection command Host computer 5 75 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual The MD380 arranges the function codes running state parameters and running commands in the register parameter address mode The host computer can define the protocol of communication data interaction 4 16 Use of Multifunctional Extension Interfaces
170. communication rate is set in FD 00 Function Code Name Setting Range Default 0 Master A8 01 Master and slave selection 0 1 Slave This parameter is used to determine whether the AC drive is master or slave At point point communication you only need to set the CANlink communication baud rate The communication addresses are allocated automatically based on whether the AC drive is master or slave 236 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Slave not following running Slave following commands of the master A8 02 master command j 0 selection 1 Slave following running commands of the master When A8 01 Master and slave selection is set to 1 Slave and F0 02 Command source selection is set to 2 Communication control if A8 02 is set to 1 the salve follows the master to start or stop Function Code Name Setting Range Default 0 Torque setting A8 03 Usage of data received by slave 0 1 Frequency setting It is used to determine whether the slave uses data received from the master for torque setting or frequency setting This function can be used only when the frequency source or torque source must be communication setting When the AC drive is a slave in point point communication and receives data for torque setting 100 0096 of the received data corresponds to 200 0 of torque set
171. crement commands for frequency modification d Terminal DOWN When the frequency source is digital setting they are used to adjust the frequency The AC drive blocks its output the motor coasts to rest 8 Coast to stop and is not controlled by the AC drive It is the same as coast to stop described in F6 10 The terminal is used for fault reset function the same 9 Fault reset RESET as the function of RESET key on the operation panel Remote fault reset is implemented by this function 161 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Value Function Description The AC drive decelerates to stop but the running 10 RUN pause parameters are all memorized such as PLC swing p frequency and PID parameters After this function is disabled the AC drive resumes its status before stop If this terminal becomes ON the AC drive reports Err15 Normally open NO input 11 f extemal fault and performs the fault protection action For more details see the description of F9 47 12 Multi reference terminal 1 13 Multi reference terminal 2 The setting of 16 speeds or 16 other references can be implemented through combinations of 16 states of these 14 Multi reference terminal 3 four terminals 15 Multi reference terminal 4 Terminal 1 for acceleration 2 16 deceleration time selection Totally four groups of acceleration deceleration time can be selected through
172. ction 29 Torque control prohibited is ON the AC drive is fixed to run in the speed control mode Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Digital setting A0 03 Alt Al2 Al3 Pulse setting DI5 Communication setting MIN AI AI2 MAX AI AI2 Torque setting source in 0 01 torque control Torque digital setting in 0 03 torque control 200 0 200 0 150 0 222 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes 0 01 is used to set the torque setting source There are a total of eight torque setting Sources The torque setting is a relative value 100 096 corresponds to the AC drive s rated torque The setting range is 200 0 to 200 0 indicating the AC drive s maximum torque is twice of the AC drive s rated torque If the torque setting is positive the AC drive rotates in forward direction If the torque setting is negative the AC drive rotates in reverse direction 1 Digital setting A0 03 The target torque directly uses the value set in 0 03 2 AM 3 AI2 4 The target torque is decided by analog input The MD380 control board provides two AI terminals Al1 AI2 Another Al terminal AI3 is provided by the I O extension card 11 is 0 10 V voltage input AI2 is 0 10 V voltage input or 4 20 mA current input decided by jumper J8 on the control board and AI3 is 10 V to 10 V voltage input The MD380 provides five curves indicati
173. ction using 0 4 0 8 0 12 016 0 2 0 Al jumperJ8 Default F4 18 F4 20 l A12 currentinput 0 10 V corresponding 10 4 20 mA corresponding to 0 50 Hz V Al2 voltage input 0 50 Hz F4 33 Al curve selection Note Select the analog input type based on the output type of the F4 18 to F4 22 relationship between All D A module setting and corresponding value Note 1 MD380 provides two Al terminals Al1 and AI2 on the control board and the optional I O extension card provides another Al terminal AI3 2 11 provides 0 10 V voltage input Al2 provides 0 10 V voltage input or 4 20 mA current input determined by jumper J8 on the control board AI3 provides 10 V to 10 V bipolar voltage input 3 When Al is used as the frequency source 100 of the voltage or current input corresponding setting corresponds to the maximum frequency in F0 10 4 When the temperature transmitter is used for analog setting it must be connected to AI3 on the I O extension card 5 MD380 provides five corresponding relationship curves which can be selected in F4 33 The input values and corresponding settings of each curve are set in F4 13 to F4 27 and group A6 63 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 4 8 5 Pulse Setting as the Frequency Source In many scenarios pulse input is used as the frequency source The specifications of pulse signals are voltage 9 30 V frequency 0 100 kHz Only D
174. ctory corrected values Generally you need not perform correction in the applications Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter Displayed voltage indicates the voltage display value sampled by the AC drive For details refer to 00 21 00 22 and U0 23 During correction send two voltage values to each terminal and save the measured values and displayed values to the function codes AC 00 to AC 11 Then the AC drive will automatically perform Al zero offset and gain correction If the input voltage and the actual voltage sampled by the AC drive are inconsistent perform correction on site Take Al1 as an example The on site correction is as follows Send a voltage signal approximately 2 V to AI1 N Measure the Al1 voltage and save it to AC 00 A View the displayed value of U0 21 and save the value to AC 01 Send a voltage signal approximately 8 V to Al1 oa Measure AI1 voltage and save it to AC 02 6 View the displayed value of 00 21 and save the value to AC 03 At correction of AI2 and AI3 the actually sampled voltage is respectively queried 00 22 and 00 23 For AI1 and AI2 2 V and 8 V are suggested as the correction voltages For AI3 8 V and 8 V are suggested 239 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Set
175. d before into function codes F1 00 to F1 10 Manual input OK The following motor auto tuning description takes motor 1 as an example The auto tuning of motor 2 3 and 4 is the same and only the function codes are changed correspondingly The process of motor auto tuning is as follows 1 If the motor can be disconnected from the load disconnect the motor from the load mechanically after power off so that the motor can run without load 2 After power on set F0 02 Command source selection to 0 Operation panel control 3 Input the motor nameplate parameters such as F1 00 to F 1 05 correctly and input the following parameters based on the actually selected motor Motor Parameter Motor 1 F1 00 Motor type selection F1 01 Rated motor power F1 02 Rated motor voltage F1 03 Rated motor current F1 04 Rated motor frequency F1 05 Rated motor rotational speed Motor 2 A2 00 to A2 05 defined the same as F1 00 to F1 05 Motor3 A3 00 to A3 05 defined the same as F1 00 to F1 05 Motor 4 A4 00 to A4 05 defined the same as F1 00 to F1 05 For asynchronous motor set F1 37 Auto tuning selection to 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning For motors 2 3 or 4 the corresponding function code is A2 37 A3 37 A4 37 Press the operation panel The operation panel displays 70 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example Then press on the operation panel
176. d to adjust the overvoltage suppression capacity of the AC drive The larger the value is the greater the overvoltage suppression capacity will be 198 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes In the prerequisite of no overvoltage occurrence set F9 03 to a small value For small inertia load the value should be small Otherwise the system dynamic response will be slow For large inertia load the value should be large Otherwise the suppression result will be poor and an overvoltage fault may occur If the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0 the overvoltage stall function is disabled The overvoltage stall protective voltage setting 100 corresponds to the base values in the following table Table 6 7 Overvoltage stall protective voltage setting 100 corresponds to base values Voltage Class Corresponding Base Value Single phase 220 V 290 V Three phase 220 V 290 V Three phase 380 V 530 V Three phase 480 V 620 V Three phase 690 V 880 V Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 05 Overcurrent stall gain 0 100 20 F9 06 Overcurrent stall protective current 100 200 150 When the output current exceeds the overcurrent stall protective current during acceleration deceleration of the AC drive the AC drive stops acceleration deceleration and keeps the present running frequency After the output current declines the AC drive continues to accelerate decelerat
177. d tracking restart It is applicable to large inertia load The frequency curve in this mode is shown in the following figure If the load motor is still rotating due to the inertia when the AC drive starts this mode is used to prevent start overcurrent Figure 4 10 Frequency curve of rotational speed tracking restart Frequency f Frequency f Initial rotational speed of the load motor F0 12 F0 12 F6 00 1 Rotational speed Frequenc mos Frequenc tracking restart upper limit a pe fimi Initial rotational speed of FO 17 F0 17 the load motor 0 Acceleration Acceleration time time Automatic rotational speed Automatic rotational tracking detection speed tracking detection j 11 P Time t L Time t Running Running command command F6 00 2 Pre excited start It is applicable only to inductive asynchronous motor The AC drive performs pre excitation before start improving quick response of the motor and meeting the requirements of short acceleration time The frequency curve in this mode is shown in the following figure Figure 4 11 Frequency curve of pre excited start Frequenc equency f F0 12 Frequency f F0 12 Frequency A upper limit 6 00 2 Pre excited start Frequency F6 00 2 Pre excited start F6 07 Acceleration di Default Deceleration mode 7 S F6 03 0
178. de 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DI5 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Unit s digit DI6 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten s digit DI7 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Hundred s digit 018 state F4 39 selection 2 0 1 same as DI1 00000 Thousand s digit DI9 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DI10 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 171 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual These parameters are used to set the valid mode of DI terminals 0 High level valid The DI terminal is valid when being connected with COM and invalid when being disconnected from COM 1 Low level valid The DI terminal is invalid when being connected with COM and invalid when being disconnected from COM Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Voltage signal F4 40 Al2 input signal selection 0 1 Current signal Al2 supports voltage current output which is determined by jumper After setting the jumper perform corresponding setting in F4 40 Group F5 Output Terminals The MD380 provides an analog output AO terminal a digital output DO terminal a relay terminal and a FM terminal used for high speed pulse output or open collector switch signal output as standard If these output terminals cannot satisfy requirements use an optional I O extension card that provides an AO
179. de Lower than 1000 m Ambient 10 C to 40 C de rated if the ambient temperature is temperature between 40 C and 50 C Humidity Less than 95 RH without condensing Vibration Less than 5 9 m s2 0 6 g Storage 20 C to 60 C temperature IP level IP20 Pollution degree PD2 Power distribution TN TT system 23 Product Information MD380 User Manual 2 4 Peripheral Electrical Devices and System Configuration When the MD380 is used to control the synchronous or asynchronous motor forming a control system it is necessary to install various electrical devices on the input and output sides of the AC drive to ensure the system safety and stability In addition several optional extension cards are available for the MD380 to implement various functions The system configuration of three phase 220 V 380 V 480 V voltage class 3 7 kW and above is shown in the following figure Figure 2 4 System configuration of three phase 220 V 380 V 480 V voltage class 3 7 kW and above Three phase AC Use within the allowable power power supply a A supply specification of the AC drive Moulded case circuit breaker MCCB or earth leakage circuit breaker Select a proper breaker to resist large in rush current that flows into the AC drive at power on Forward RUN ELCB Forward JOG Electromagnetic To guarantee safety use an electromagnetic
180. de Parameter Name Setting Range Default Of 8 34 Zero current detection level 0 0 OOO 7s rated 5 0 motor current F8 35 Zero current detection delay time 0 00 600 00s 0 10s If the output current of the AC drive is equal to or less than the zero current detection level and the duration exceeds the zero current detection delay time the corresponding DO becomes ON The zero current detection is shown in the following figure Figure 6 22 Zero current detection Output current Zero current detection 4 F8 34 Zero current detection signal Zero current detection delay time 194 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 0 no detection F8 36 Output overcurrent threshold 0 1 300 0 rated 200 0 motor current Output overcurrent detection 0 00 600 00s 0 00s delay time F8 37 If the output current of the AC drive is equal to or higher than the overcurrent threshold and the duration exceeds the detection delay time the corresponding DO becomes ON The output overcurrent detection function is shown in the following figure Figure 6 23 Output overcurrent detection Output A current Output overcurrent threshold F8 36 Output overcurrent detection signal t Time Output byerburrent detection delay time F8 37 Function Code Parameter Name
181. dependent frequency input channel frequency source switched over from X to Y the auxiliary frequency source Y is used in the same way as the main frequency source X refer to F0 03 When the auxiliary frequency source is used for operation frequency source is X and Y operation pay attention to the following aspects 1 If the auxiliary frequency source Y is digital setting the preset frequency 0 08 does not take effect You can directly adjust the set main frequency by pressing keys A and w on the operation panel or using the UP DOWN function of input terminals 2 Ifthe auxiliary frequency source is analog input Al1 Al2 and AI3 or pulse setting 100 of the input corresponds to the range of the auxiliary frequency Y set in F0 05 and F0 06 3 Ifthe auxiliary frequency source is pulse setting it is similar to analog input Note The main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y must not use the same channel That is 03 and F0 04 cannot be set to the same value Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default R iliarv fi 0 Relative to maximum ange of auxiliary frequency freguenc ais Y for X and Y operation 3 y 7 1 Relative to main frequency F0 06 Range of auxiliary frequency 0 150 0 Y for and operation If X and Y operation is used F0 05 and FO 06 are used to set the adjustment range of the auxiliary frequency source Y
182. differential encoder hose encoder open collector encoder resolver UVW encoder and SIN yp COS encoder User The optional programming card helps you to realize programmable secondary development Its programming environment is function compatible with that of the PLC of Inovance Advanced It supports the operation of AC drive parameters and virtual background oscillograph function via which the state inside the AC drive software is monitored Operation panel Control terminals Running i FEN command source Serial communication port You can perform switchover between these sources in various ways There are a total of 10 frequency sources such as digital setting analog voltage setting analog current setting pulse Frequency source Setting and serial communication port setting You can perform switchover between these sources in various ways RUN Auxiliary There are ten auxiliary frequency sources It can implement frequency source fine tuning of auxiliary frequency and frequency synthesis Input terminal Standard 5 digital input DI terminals one of which supports up to 100 kHz high speed pulse input 2 analog input terminals one of which only supports 0 10 V voltage input and the other supports 0 10 V voltage input or 4 20 mA current input Expanding capacity 5 DI terminals 1 Al terminal that supports 10 10 V voltage input and also supports PT100 PT1000 22 MD380 User Manual
183. dsd retentive at power failure information manual F9 14 F9 44 Fault record FP 01 2 ENTER accumulative running time Restore default parameters Back up the current user parameters FP 01 4 ENTER FP 01 1 ENTER Restoring backup Preset by parameters _ _ delivery 4 FP 01 501 ENTER I Function codes user Function codes backup area factory backup area Parameters that the user Default parameters needs to back up 77 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 78 Function Code Table Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Code Table If FP 00 is set to a non zero number parameter protection is enabled You must enter the correct user password to enter the menu To cancel the password protection function enter with password and set FP 00 to 0 Group F and Group A are standard function parameters Group U includes the monitoring function parameters The symbols in the function code table are described as follows Xx The parameter can be modified when the AC drive is in either stop or running state The parameter cannot be modified when the AC drive is in the running state e The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified The parameter is factory parameter and can be set only by the manufacturer 5 1 Standard Function Parameters
184. e F9 05 Overcurrent stall gain is used to adjust the overcurrent suppression capacity of the AC drive The larger the value is the greater the overcurrent suppression capacity will be In the prerequisite of no overcurrent occurrence set tF9 05 to a small value For small inertia load the value should be small Otherwise the system dynamic response will be slow For large inertia load the value should be large Otherwise the suppression result will be poor and overcurrent fault may occur If the overcurrent stall gain is set to 0 the overcurrent stall function is disabled 199 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Figure 6 25 Diagram of the overcurrent stall protection function Output current Overcurrent stall protective current 777 Merz t f un FF li ot pag dg 1 li rag ot ot E Output I 11 1 1 1 frequency 1 H Hz od 1 li ot l Se 841 r L 1 frequency 1j 1 I Vi MEE i Time t Acceleration Constant Deceleration process speed process process Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 07 Short circuit to ground upon power 0 Disabled on 1 Enabled It is used to determine whether to check the motor is short circuited to ground at power on of the AC d
185. e Bit4 Function Code Name Display Range U0 62 Current fault code 0 99 It displays the current fault code Function Code Name 00 63 00 64 Display Range 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 Sent value of point point communication Received value of point point communication It displays the data at point point communication 00 63 is the data sent by the master and U0 64 is the data received by the slave Function Code Name U0 65 Display Range 200 00 200 00 Torque upper limit It displays the current setting torque upper limit 246 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MD380 User Manual Chapter 7 EMC Definition of Terms EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC describes the ability of electronic and electrical devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems In other words EMC includes two aspects The electromagnetic interference generated by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit the device or system must have sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment First environment Environment that includes domestic premises it also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply ne
186. e 1 1 1 1 uF0 07 uF5 04 cF0 03 Press ENTER to view the parameter value The right side is only example of function codes ee ee cA9 10 50 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example FP 03 is used to determine whether the user defined group and user modified group are displayed Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit USEr group display selection 0 Not display Individualized 1 Display FP 03 parameter display 11 property Ten s digit C group display selection 0 Not display 1 Display bASE It indicates all function codes of the MD380 After the mode is switched over to bASE level menu is displayed USEr The user defined menu is set to facilitate viewing and modifying of commonly used function codes In this mode the display parameter uF3 02 indicates function code F3 02 You can also modify parameters in this mode as in common editing state After the mode is switched over to USEr level II menu is displayed The user defined parameters are included in group FE If FE is set to F0 00 it indicates that no function codes are available A maximum of 30 parameters can be included in group FE If NUL
187. e 16 F0 00 FE 17 User defined function code 17 F0 00 FE 18 User defined function code 18 F0 00 FE 19 User defined function code 19 F0 00 FE 20 User defined function code 20 F0 00 FE 21 User defined function code 21 F0 00 to FP xx F0 00 Ww FE 22 User defined function code 22 A0 00 to Ax xx F0 00 FE 23 function code 23 00 to 00 F0 00 FE 24 User defined function code 24 F0 00 K FE 25 User defined function code 25 F0 00 FE 26 User defined function code 26 F0 00 27 User defined function code 27 F0 00 FE 28 User defined function code 28 F0 00 FE 29 User defined function code 29 F0 00 Group Function Code Management FP 00 User password 0 65535 0 0 operation 01 Restore factory settings except motor parameters FP 01 Restore default settings kong 0 04 Restore user backup parameters 501 Back up current user parameters Unit s digit Group U display selection 0 Not display Fp o2 drive parameter display 1 Display i k property Ten s digit Group A display selection 0 Not display 1 Display 114 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table torque control Communication setting MIN AI AI2 pred Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Unit s digit User defined parameter display selection 0 Not display Individualized 1 Displa FP 03 ividualiz play 00 Je pa
188. e 2 frequency This function is valid when motor 1 is selected and acceleration deceleration time switchover is not performed by means of DI terminal It is used to select different groups of acceleration deceleration time based on the running frequency range rather than DI terminal during the running process of the AC drive 192 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Figure 6 20 Acceleration deceleration time switchover Output frequency Hz Set frequency F8 25 F8 26 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 1 Acceleration time 1 During acceleration if the running frequency is smaller than the value of F8 25 acceleration time 2 is selected If the running frequency is larger than the value of F8 25 acceleration time 1 is selected During deceleration if the running frequency is larger than the value of F8 26 deceleration time 1 is selected If the running frequency is smaller than the value of F8 26 deceleration time 2 is selected Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Disabled F8 27 Terminal JOG preferred 0 1 Enabled It is used to set whether terminal JOG is preferred If terminal JOG is preferred the AC drive switches to terminal JOG running state when there is a terminal JOG command during the running process of the AC drive Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 28 Fr
189. e AC drive on the front of the control cabinet Back panel of control cabinet Fix four screws 4 Embedded installation of the MD380 sheet metal housing Figure 3 9 External hanging bracket for the MD380 sheet metal housing External hanging bracket 33 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual Figure 3 10 Embedded installation of the MD380 sheet metal housing Install the AC drive from the m7 back of the control cabinet oS Back panel of control cabinet it d AUT iw Figure 3 11 Embedded installation effect of the MD380 sheet metal housing Installation Precautions 1 Reserve the installation clearances as specified in Figure 3 1 to ensure sufficient space for heat dissipation Take heat dissipation of other parts in the cabinet into consideration 2 Install the AC drives upright to facilitate heat dissipation If multiple AC drives installed in the cabinet install them side by side If one row of AC drives need to be installed above another row install an insulation guide plate as shown in Figure 3 2 3 Use incombustible hanging bracket 4 In scenarios with heavy metal powder install the heatsink outside the cabinet and ensure that the room inside the fully sealed cabinet is as large as possible 34 MD380 User Manual Mec
190. e actually used data can be obtained based on the formula y kx b The value y ranges from 100 00 to 100 00 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Point point communication interruption detection time Dans 1 05 A8 06 It is used to set the point point communication interruption time at which this fault is detected If it is set to 0 it indicates no detection Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A8 07 Master data sending cycle 0 001 10 0005 0 0015 It is used to set the data sending cycle of the master point point communication Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A8 08 Zero offset of received data frequency 100 00 100 00 0 0096 A8 09 Gain of received data frequency 10 00 10 00 1 00 These two parameters are used to adjust data received from the master and define the frequency reference relationship between the master and the slave If b expresses the zero offset of received data k expresses the gain and y expresses the actually used data The actually used data can be obtained based on the formula y kx b The value y ranges from 100 00 to 100 00 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A8 10 Runaway prevention coefficient 0 00 100 00 10 00 When the slave is set to troque control and follows the master to output torque to implement load allocation this pa
191. e input 0 01 100 00 kHz 7 Alt 0 10 V 8 Al2 0 10 V or 0 20 mA 9 AI3 0 0 V 10 Length 0 to maximum set length 11 Count value 0 to maximum count value 12 Communication setting 0 0 100 0 13 Motor rotational speed 4 to 14 Output current 0 0 1000 0A 15 Output voltage 0 0 000 0 V 16 Output torque actual value torque to 2 times of Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F5 09 Maximum FMP output frequency 0 01 100 00 kHz 50 00 kHz If the FM terminal is used for pulse output this parameter is used to set the maximum frequency of pulse output 175 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F5 10 1 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 0 F5 11 AO1 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 F5 12 AO2 offset coefficient 100 0 100 0 0 00 5 13 2 gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 These parameters are used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the output amplitude deviation They can also be used to define the desired AO curve If b represents zero offset k represents gain Y represents actual output and X represents standard output the actual output is Y kX b The zero offset coefficient 100 of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V or 20 mA The standard output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA with no zero offset or gain adjustment For example if the analog
192. e output frequency of the AC drive reaches the upper limit or lower limit the terminal becomes ON In speed control mode if the output torque reaches the 14 Torque limited torque limit the AC drive enters the stall protection state and meanwhile the terminal becomes ON If the AC drive main circuit and control circuit become 15 Ready for RUN stable and the AC drive detects no fault and is ready for RUN the terminal becomes ON 16 larger than Al2 When the input of 11 is larger than the input of AI2 the terminal becomes ON 17 Frequency upper limit If the running frequency reaches the upper limit the reached terminal becomes ON 18 ni If the running frequency reaches the lower limit the terminal stop becomes In the stop state the terminal becomes OFF 173 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Value Function Description 19 Undervoltage state If the AC drive is in undervoltage state the terminal output becomes ON 20 Refer to the communication protocol setting 21 Reserved Reserved 22 Reserved Reserved 23 Zero speed running 2 If the output frequency of the AC drive is 0 the terminal having output at stop becomes ON In the state of stop the signal is still ON 24 Accumulative power If the AC drive accumulative power on time F7 13 on time reached exceeds the value set in F8 16 the terminal becomes ON Frequency leve
193. edupon board is damaged p power on 294 7S Warranty Agreement Inovance 1 The warranty period of the product is 18 months refer to the barcode on the equipment During the warranty period if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the instructions Inovance will be responsible for free maintenance 2 Within the warranty period maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following reasons a Improper use or repair modification without prior permission b Fire flood abnormal voltage other disasters and secondary disaster c Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement d Improper operation e Trouble out of the equipment for example external device 3 If there is any failure or damage to the product please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card in detail 4 The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of Inovance 5 The Product Warranty Card is not re issued Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance 6 Ifthere is any problem during the service contact Inovance s agent or Inovance directly 7 This agreement shall be interpreted by Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co Ltd Service Department Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co Ltd Address Block E Hongwei Industry Park Liuxian Road Baocheng No 70 Zone Bao an District Shenzhen P
194. ee Al terminals among which AI1 and AI2 are provided on the control board and AI3 is provided on the extension card Terminal Input Signal Characteristic AI1 GND It receives the signal of 0 10 VDC AI2 GND If J8 is connected to the position with V mark it receives the signal of 0 10 VDC If J8 is connected to the position with I mark it receives the signal of 4 20 mA AI3 GND It is provided on the extension and receives the signal of 10 to 10 VDC As external voltage current signal Al is used for frequency source setting torque setting voltage setting at V F separation and PID setting or feedback The corresponding relationship of the voltage or current and actual setting or feedback is defined by F4 13 to F4 27 73 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual Figure 4 32 Defining corresponding relationship of the voltage or current and actual setting or feedback Bye Ge oe 1 unm 1 user can presetup 11 1 A 1 1 1 to 5 curves Different t lee Als curve ud wy 23 J i 4 1 Curve X F4 13 to Curve 2 F4 18 tb Curve 5 A6 08 to F447 F4 22 11 A6 15 at 11 X Unit s digit A11 1 i v 1 internal gt U0 09 Curve selection 1 5 7 calculation value 7 4 18 e Ten s digit 12 Al2 internal
195. eedback and PID setting is 100 096 the adjustment amplitude of the PID regulator on the output frequency reference is the maximum frequency 06 Integral time Ti1 It decides the integral regulating intensity The shorter the integral time is the larger the regulating intensity is When the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100 0 the integral regulator performs continuous adjustment for the time set in FA 06 Then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency FA 07 Differential time 1 It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator on the deviation change The longer the differential time is the larger the regulating intensity is Differential time is the time within which the feedback value change reaches 100 0 and then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Cut off frequency of PID reverse FAUS rotation 0 00 to maximum frequency 2 00 Hz In some situations only when the PID output frequency is a negative value AC drive reverse rotation PID setting and PID feedback can be equal However too high reverse rotation frequency is prohibited in some applications and FA 08 is used to determine the reverse rotation frequency upper limit Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 09 PID deviation limit 0 0 100 0 0 0 If the deviation between PID feedback
196. eleration F0 25 time base frequency 1 Set frequency 0 2 100 Hz The acceleration deceleration time indicates the time for the AC drive to increase from 0 Hz to the frequency set in F0 25 If this parameter is set to 1 the acceleration deceleration time is related to the set frequency If the set frequency changes frequently the motor s acceleration deceleration also changes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 26 Base frequency for UPIDOWN 0 Running frequency 0 modification during running 1 Set frequency This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting It is used to set the base frequency to be modified by using keys or the terminal UP DOWN function If the running frequency and set frequency are different there will be a large difference between the AC drive s performance during the acceleration deceleration process Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Binding operation panel command to frequency source 0 No binding 1 Frequency source by digital setting 2 AM 3 Al2 4 AI3 5 Pulse setting DI5 Binding command 6 7 8 9 F0 27 Source to frequency source Multi reference Simple PLC PID Communication setting 000 Ten s digit Binding terminal command to frequency source 0 9 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit Binding communication command to frequency source
197. ency cycle QM wal FB 04 Triangular wave M fA rising time coefficient RN Eg Winding motor rotates at uniform linear speed Pendulum motor 1 Reciprocating mechanism 4 8 8 Multi Speed Mode In scenarios where the running frequency of the AC drive need not be adjusted continuously and only several frequencies are required the multi speed control can be used The MD380 supports a maximum of 16 running frequencies which are implemented by state combinations of four DI terminals Set the function codes corresponding to DI terminals to a value among 12 to 15 and then the DI terminals are specified as the multi frequency input terminals The multiple frequencies are set based on the multi frequency table in group FC In addition you need to set F0 03 Main frequency source X selection to 6 Multi reference The following figure shows how to set the multi speed function Figure 4 25 Setting the multi speed function Binary i State Multi frequenc i Terminal Function Setting combination table d pn H F4 00 lolo gt Di2 H F401 1 ETSI F4 02N i 1 r 3 o gt HF4 03N 1110 1 0 07 01 pis 4 04 to 1 0 27 0 DI6 H F4 05 s i 11 HF4 06 NX a 1 x F0 10 gt F0 03 6 o gt V ____ Target 2 13
198. endent power gt 55 kW 121 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual e Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Leakage inductive reactance 5 55 kW Model A3 08 asynchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power Mutual inductive reactance lt 55 kW Model A3 09 asynchronous motor 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power dependent gt 55 kW 0 01 A to A2 03 AC drive power No load current lt 55 kW Model A3 10 asynchronous motor 0 1 A to A2 03 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A3 16 synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft D inductance lt 55 kW Model A3 17 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft Q inductance lt 55 kW Model A3 18 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 20 Back EMF synchronous 0 1 6553 5 V Model k motor dependent Encoder pulses pef 1 65535 1024 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder A3 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN COS encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder 0 Forward 30 phase sequence of ABZ 0 X
199. equency detection value FDT2 9 00 50 00 Hz frequency F8 29 Frequency detection hysteresis 0 0 100 0 FDT2 5 0 FDT hysteresis 2 level The frequency detection function is the same as FDT1 function For details refer to the descriptions of F8 19 and F8 20 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 30 Any frequency reaching 0 00 Hz to maximum 50 00 Hz detection value 1 frequency Any frequency reaching 0 0 100 0 maximum ae detection amplitude 1 frequency 0 0 F8 32 Any frequency reaching 0 00 Hz to maximum 50 00 Hz detection value 2 frequency 193 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Of 6 A F8 33 Any frequency reaching 0 0 100 0 maximum 0 0 detection amplitude 2 frequency If the output frequency of the AC drive is within the positive and negative amplitudes of the any frequency reaching detection value the corresponding DO becomes ON The MD380 provides two groups of any frequency reaching detection parameters including frequency detection value and detection amplitude as shown in the following figure Figure 6 21 Any frequency reaching detection Running frequency Frequency reaching detection amplitude Frequency reaching detection amplitude Any frequency reaching Time Any frequency reaching detection signal DO or relay Function Co
200. er Setting Range Default Property Fe og me proportion of S curve 4 0 to 100 0 F6 09 30 0 start segment F6 09 lime proportion of S curve 0 0 to 100 0 F6 08 30 0 end segment 0 Decelerate to stop F6 10 Stop mode 0 1 Coast to stop F6 11_ lnitial frequency of stop 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz braking Fe 12 Waiting time ofstopDC 0 05 braking F6 13 Stop DC braking current 0 100 0 F6 14 Stop DC braking time 0 0 36 05 0 05 F6 15 use ratio 0 100 100 Group F7 Operation Panel Display 0 MF K key disabled 1 Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control terminal or F7 01 MF K Key function selection CoMMunication 0 2 Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation 3 Forward JOG 4 Reverse JOG 0 STOP RESET key enabled only in operation panel control F7 02 STOP RESET key function 1 1 STOP RESET key enabled any operation mode 0000 FFFF Bit00 Running frequency 1 Hz Bit01 Set frequency Hz Bit02 Bus voltage V LED display running F7 03 Bit03 Output voltage V 1F parameters 1 Bit04 Output current A Bit05 Output power KW Bit06 Output torque 96 07 DI input status 96 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property LED display running parameters 1 F7 03 Bit08
201. er through the communication address 0x1000 The data format is 100 00 to 100 0096 100 corresponds to the value of 0 03 MD380 supports four host computer communication protocols Modbus 223 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual PROFIBUS DP CANopen and CANlink They cannot be used simultaneously If the communication mode is used a communication card must be installed The MD380 provides four optional communication cards and you can select one based on actual requirements If the communication protocol is Modbus PROFIBUS DP or CANopen the corresponding serial communication protocol needs to be selected based on the setting of F0 28 The CANIink protocol is always valid Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A0 05 Forward maximum frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum 50 00 Hz in torque control frequency F0 10 A0 06 Reverse maximum frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum 50 00 Hz in torque control frequency F0 10 two parameters are used to set the maximum frequency in forward or reverse rotation in torque control mode In torque control if the load torque is smaller than the motor output torque the motor s rotational speed will rise continuously To avoid runaway of the mechanical system the motor maximum rotating speed must be limited in torque control You can implement continuous change of the maximum frequency in torque control dynamically by controlling the frequency uppe
202. erface card MD38PG4 frequency 10 kHz DB9 interface Applied to all models Open collector MD38PG5 Open collector encoder card requiring Applied to all models 15 V power supply 76 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 17 Password Setting The AC drive provides the user password protection function When FP 00 is set to a non zero value the value is the user password The password takes effect after you after exit the function code editing state When you press will be displayed and you must enter the correct user password to enter the menu To cancel the password protection function enter with password and set FP 00 to 0 4 18 Parameter Saving and Default Setting Restoring After a function code is modified on the operation panel the modification will be saved in the register of the AC drive and remain effective at next power on The AC drive supports backup and restoration of parameter setting which is convenient for commissioning The AC drive also provides the retentive function on alarm information and accumulative running time You can restore the backup values or default settings of the function codes of the AC drive or clear the running data through FP 01 For details see the description of FP 01 Figure 4 35 Parameter saving and default parameter restoring Run after Function parameters power on working area during running Register areas are CGlssnirecor
203. erformed only in operation panel mode Group F2 Vector Control Parameters Group F2 is valid for vector control and invalid for V F control Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 00 Speed loop proportional gain 1 0 100 30 F2 01 Speed loop integral time 1 0 01 10 005 0 505 2 02 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to F2 05 5 00 Hz F2 03 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0 100 20 152 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 04 Speed loop integral time 2 0 01 10 00s 1 00s F2 05 Switchover frequency 2 O maximum 10 00 Hz output frequency Speed loop PI parameters vary with running frequencies of the AC drive If the running frequency is less than or equal to Switchover frequency 1 2 02 the speed loop PI parameters are F2 00 and F2 01 If the running frequency is equal to or greater than Switchover frequency 2 F2 05 the speed loop PI parameters are F2 03 and F2 04 If the running frequency is between F2 02 and F2 05 the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from the linear switchover between the two groups of PI parameters as shown in Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters PI parameters F2 00 F2 01 F2 03 F2 04 Frequency F2 02 F2 05 reference The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by
204. erminal 2 Fault output stop ON Frequency level M 3 Refer to the descriptions of F8 19 and F8 20 detection FDT1 output 4 Frequency reached Refer to the descriptions of F8 21 If the AC drive runs with the output frequency of 0 the 5 no Auk tatsio terminal becomes ON If the AC drive is in the stop state the terminal becomes OFF The AC drive judges whether the motor load exceeds the Motor overload overload pre warning threshold before performing the 6 i protection action If the pre warning threshold is exceeded pre warning the terminal becomes ON For motor overload parameters see the descriptions of F9 00 to F9 02 7 AC drive overload pre The terminal becomes ON 10s before the AC drive overload warning protection action is performed 8 Set count value The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches reached the value set in FB 08 9 Designated count The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches value reached the value set in FB 09 10 Lenathireached The terminal becomes ON when the detected actual length 9 exceeds the value set in FB 05 When simple PLC completes one cycle the terminal M outputs a pulse signal with width of 250 ms 12 Accumulative running If the accumulative running time of the AC drive exceeds time reached the time set in F8 17 the terminal becomes ON If the set frequency exceeds the frequency upper limit or 13 Frequency limited lower limit and th
205. erse 9 012 direction Stop COM Digital common Stop 166 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes As shown in the preceding figure if K1 is ON the AC drive instructs forward rotation when K2 is OFF and instructs reverse rotation when K2 is ON If K1 is OFF the AC drive stops 2 Three line mode 1 In this mode DI3 is RUN enabled terminal and the direction is decided by DI1 and DI2 The parameters are set as below Function Code Parameter Name Value Function Description F4 11 Terminal command mode 2 Three line 1 F4 00 function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD F4 01 DI2 function selection 2 Reverse RUN REV F4 02 DI3 function selection 3 Three line control Figure 6 9 Setting of three line mode 1 MD380 Forward SB2 button Forward RUN FWD Stop button DI3 RUN enabled Reverse SB3 button DI2 Reverse RUN REV COM Digital common As shown in the preceding figure if SB1 is ON the AC drive instructs forward rotation when SB2 is pressed to be ON and instructs reverse rotation when SB3 is pressed to be ON The AC drive stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF During normal startup and running SB1 must remain ON The AC drive s running state is determined by the final actions on SB1 SB2 and SB3 3 Three line mode 2 In this mode DI3 is RUN enabled terminal The RUN command is given by DI1 and the direction is decided by DI2 The parameters are set as
206. es implementing more flexible corresponding relationship The schematic diagram of curve 4 and curve 5 is shown in the following figure Figure 6 34 Schematic diagram curve 4 and curve 5 Al corresponding setting Corresponding setting of Al max input Corresponding setting of Al curve inflexion 1 input Al curve inflexion 2 Al input 0 V 0 voltage Al curve inflexion 1 10 V 20 mA Corresponding setting of Al curve inflexion 2 input Corresponding setting of Al min input When setting curve 4 and curve 5 note that the curve s minimum input voltage inflexion 1 voltage inflexion 2 voltage and maximum voltage must be in increment order F4 34 curve selection is used to select curve for Al1 to AI3 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A6 16 Den input 100 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting A6 17 Jump amplitude of AI input 0 096 100 096 0 596 corresponding setting Jump point of Al2 input _ 6 5 5 6 18 corresponding setting 100 0 100 0 0 0 6 19 Jump amplitude of Al2 input 0 0 100 0 0 5 corresponding setting 235 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 6 20 Jump pir of AI3 input 100 0 100 0 0 0 corresponding setting 6 21 Jump amplitude of AI3 input 0 0 100 0 0 5 corresponding setting The Al terminals Al1 to AI3
207. estricted by F2 09 If the torque upper limit is analog pulse or communication setting 100 of the setting corresponds to the value of F2 10 and 100 of the value of F2 10 corresponds to the AC drive rated torque For details on the Al1 AI2 and setting see the description of the Al curves in group F4 For details on the pulse setting see the description of F4 28 to F4 32 When the AC drive is in communication with the master if F2 09 is set to 5 communication setting F2 10 Digital setting of torque upper limit in speed control mode can be set via communication from the master In other conditions the host computer writes data 100 00 to 100 0096 by the communication address 0x1000 where 100 096 corresponds to the value of F2 10 The communication protocol can be Modbus CANopen CANIink or PROFIBUS DP 154 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 13 Excitation adjustment proportional gain 0 20000 2000 2 14 Excitation adjustment integral gain 0 20000 1300 F2 15 Torque adjustment proportional gain 0 20000 2000 F2 16 Torque adjustment integral gain 0 20000 1300 These are current loop parameters for vector control These parameters are automatically obtained through Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning or Synchronous motor no load auto tuning and need not be modified The dimension of the current loop in
208. f The rotating motor generally feeds back power to the AC drive As a result the AC drive is still charged even if the motor stops and the power supply is cut off Thus ensure that the AC drive is disconnected from the motor before starting repair or maintenance on the AC drive 1 2 General Precautions 1 2 Requirement on residual current device RCD The AC drive generates high leakage current during running which flows through the protective earthing PE conductor Thus install a type B RCD at primary side of the power supply When selecting the RCD you should consider the transient and steady state leakage current to ground that may be generated at startup and during running of the AC drive You can select a specialized RCD with the function of suppressing high harmonics or a general purpose RCD with relatively large residual current High leakage current warning The AC drive generates high leakage current during running which flows through the PE conductor Earth connection must be done before connection of power supply Earthing shall comply with local regulations and related IEC standards 12 MD380 User Manual Safety Information and Precautions 3 Motor insulation test Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time or when it is reused after being stored for a long time or in a regular check up in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the
209. f the MD380 Figure 2 1 Designation rules and nameplate of the MD380 MD380 T 07 Pea B Yes eee v Mak Bill 2T Three phase 220 V G Generaltype T Three phase 380 V P Fanpump type 5T Threephase 480 V 7T Three phase 690 V Mark 04 75 IN 04 10 75 11 Nameplate drive model MODEL MD380T0 7GB Power class POWER 0 75kW Rated input INPUT 3PH AC380V 3 4A 50Hz 60Hz Rated output OUTPUT 3PH AC 0 380V 24A 0 300Hz Manufacturing SN S N 010150602803825403 LAAT Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co Ltd 2 2 Components of the MD380 The MD380 series AC drives have two housing types plastic housing and sheet metal housing according to different voltage and power classes 18 MD380 User Manual Product Information Figure 2 2 Components of the MD380 series AC drive plastic housing Inovance logo Fan cover Front cover Control terminals Power terminals Interface for connecting external operation panel 4 drive nameplate Cabling board Figure 2 3 Components of the MD380 series AC drive sheet metal housing Inovance logo Operation panel
210. formation and Precautions MD380 User Manual Use Stage Safety Guan Precautions During or damage to the AC drive operation Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature Failure to comply will result in personal burnt Z pancer Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personnel during operation Failure to comply will result in personal injury Avoid objects falling into the AC drive when it is running Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive Do not start stop the AC drive by turning the contactor ON OFF Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive AN warnine During A Ensure that the AC drive is disconnected from all power supplies maintenance DANGER Repair or maintenance of the AC drive may be performed only by qualified personnel Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the AC drive Do notrepair or maintain the AC drive at power on Failure to comply will result in electric shock Repair or maintain the AC drive only ten minutes after the AC drive is powered off This allows for the residual voltage in the capacitor to discharge to a safe value Failure to comply will result in personal injury before starting repair or maintenance on the AC drive Setand check the parameters again after the AC drive is replaced All the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only after power of
211. frequency remains unchanged Synchronous modulation is generally used at high output frequency which helps improve the output voltage quality At low output frequency 100 Hz or lower synchronous modulation is not required This is because asynchronous modulation is preferred when the ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency is high Synchronous modulation takes effect only when the running frequency is higher than 85 Hz If the frequency is lower than 85 Hz asynchronous modulation is always used Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No compensation 1 Compensation mode 1 1 2 Compensation mode 2 Dead zone compensation A302 mode selection Generally you need not modify this parameter Try to use a different compensation mode only when there is special requirement on the output voltage waveform quality or oscillation occurs on the motor For high power AC drive compensation mode 2 is recommended Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Random PWM invalid 5 03 Random PWM depth 4 10 0 232 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes The setting of random PWM depth can make the shrill motor noise softer and reduce the electromagnetic interference If this parameter is set to 0 random PWM is invalid Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Disabled A5 04 Rapid current limit 1 1 Enabled The r
212. function selection 0 59 0 A1 04 VDI5 function selection 0 59 0 VDI1 to VDI5 have the same functions as DI terminals on the control board and can be used for digital input For more details see description of F4 00 to F4 09 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit VDI1 0 Decided by state of VDOx 1 Decided by A1 06 Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 A1 05 VDI state setting mode Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDI5 0 1 same as VDI1 Unit s digit VDI1 0 Invalid 1 Valid Ten s digit VDI2 0 1 same as VDI1 A1 06 VDI state selection Hundred s digit VDI3 00000 0 1 same as VDI1 Thousand s digit VDI4 0 1 same as VDI1 Ten thousand s digit VDI5 0 1 same as VDI1 Different from DI terminals VDI state can be set in two modes selected in A1 05 Decided by state of VDOx Whether the state a VDI is valid is determined by the state of the corresponding VDO and VDIx is uniquely bound to VDOx x is between 1 and 5 For example to implement the function that the AC drive reports an alarm and stops when the 11 input exceeds the limit perform the following setting 1 Allocate VDI1 with function 44 User defined fault 1 A1 00 7 44 2 Set A1 05 to xxx0 3 Allocate VDO1 with function 31 11
213. g only the encoder phase sequence and installation angle can be obtained Each time Rated motor power F1 01 or Rated motor voltage F1 02 is changed the AC drive automatically modifies the values of F1 16 to F1 20 You can also directly set the parameters based on the data provided by the synchronous motor manufacturer Default 1024 Function Code Parameter Name F1 27 Setting Range Encoder pulses per revolution 1 65535 This parameter is used to set the pulses revolution PPR of ABZ or UVW incremental encoder In CLVC mode the motor cannot run properly if this parameter is set incorrectly 149 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder F1 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN COS encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder The MD380 supports multiple types of encoder Different PG cards are required for different types of encoder Select the appropriate PG card for the encoder used Any of the five encoder types is applicable to synchronous motor Only ABZ incremental encoder and resolver are applicable to asynchronous motor After installation of the PG card is complete set this parameter properly based on the actual condition Otherwise the AC drive cannot run properly Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default phase sequence of ABZ 0
214. g protection function Voltage Class Models Single phase 220 V None Three phase 220 V 11 kW G model Three phase 380 V 18 5 kW G model Three phase 690 V 18 5 kW G model For every voltage class the MD380 AC drives of powers equal to or greater than those listed in the preceding table provide the function of input phase loss or contactor energizing protection The MD380 AC drives below the power listed in the table do not have the function no matter whether F9 12 is set to O or 1 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Disabled F9 13 Output phase loss protection selection 1 1 Enabled It is used to determine whether to perform output phase loss protection Function Code Name Setting Range F9 14 1st fault type F9 15 2nd fault type 0 99 F9 16 3rd latest fault type It is used to record the types of the most recent three faults of the AC drive 0 indicates no fault For possible causes and solution of each fault refer to Chapter 8 Function Code Parameter Name Description 9 17 Frequency upon 3rd fault It displays the frequency when the latest fault occurs F9 18 Current upon 3rd fault It displays the current when the latest fault occurs 9 19 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault the bus voltage when the latest fault 201 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual
215. h count input The Actual length FB 06 is obtained by dividing the number of pulses sampled by the value of FB 07 Number of pulses per meter If the actual length is larger than the Set length FB 05 the multifunctional DO terminal becomes ON In the process of fixed length control the length can be reset by means of the DI terminal allocated with function 28 Length reset The related setting is shown in the following figure 66 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example Figure 4 27 Function code setting for fixed length control FB 05 i After the length is Set length reached the DO DON BEO SPI el e F5 00 to F5 05 10 gt becomes 1 gth p 5 Length pulses Number o gt FB 06 Length reached input pulses per Actual length meter DE Clear to 0 A Reset L nsth reset F4 00 to F4 09 28 Length reset Length pulses input 00 13 Length value gth p 1 s Lengi 123 10 11 12 12 Length reset input H 00 13 0 FB 05 11 Length reached output FB 06 11 FB 06 0 Note Inthe fixed length control mode the direction cannot be identified and only the length shall be calculated based on the number of pulses
216. hanical and Electrical Installation 3 1 4 Removal of the Front Cover of the MD380 For the MD380 series AC drives you need to remove the front cover and before wiring the main circuit and control circuit Figure 3 12 Removal of the front cover of the MD380 plastic housing 2 Catch the edge of the cover and lift it 1 Press inward symmetrically to disconnect the hook from the hook slot Figure 3 13 Removal of the front cover of the MD380 sheet metal housing 2 Remove the cover toward vu 1 Loosen the four screws J DANGER Prevent the cover from falling off during the removal to avoid potential damage to the equipment or personal injury 3 2 Electrical Installation 3 2 1 Description of Main Circuit Terminals Description of Main Circuit Terminals of Single phase AC drive Qiu ps POWER MOTOR db iL A f iu IN 35 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual Table 3 1 Description of main circuit terminals of single phase AC drive Terminal Name Description 1112 Single phase power supply Connect to the single phase 220 VAC power input terminals supply Positive and negative Common DC bus input point terminals of DC bus Connecting terminals of PB Connect to
217. he 1 The parameters are set parameters in group F4 incorrectly 2 Re connect the external 7 The DI terminals 2 The external signal is incorrect signal cables are disabled 3 The jumper bar across OP and 3 Re confirm the jumper bar 24 V becomes loose across OP and 24 V 4 The control board is faulty 4 Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support 1 The encoder is faulty 1 Replace the encoder and The motor speed 2 The encoder cable is connected ensure the cabling is proper 8 is always low in incorrectly or in poor contact 2 Replace the PG card CLVC mode 3 The PG card is faulty 3 Contact the agent or Inovance 4 The drive board is faulty for technical support 1 Re set motor parameters 1 The motor parameters are set or re perform the motor auto The AC drive improperly tuning 9 repons overcurrent 2 The acceleration deceleration 2 Set proper acceleration and overvoltage RES time is improper deceleration time frequently 3 The load fluctuates 3 Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support 1 Check whether the contactor cable is loose iz ibd 2 Check whether the contactor TODO The soft startup contactor is not is faulty 10 upon power on or picked 3 Check whether 24 V power supply of the contactor is faulty 4 Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support BBBHB is 11 displayed Related component on the control Replacetheicontrol board isplay
218. he output frequency change increases gradually t2 is the time defined in F6 09 within which the slope of the output frequency change gradually decreases to 0 Within the time between t1 and t2 the slope of the output frequency change remains unchanged that is linear acceleration deceleration Figure 6 12 S curve acceleration deceleration A Output frequency Hz Set frequency f Time t bung pu io 0 1 Figure 6 13 S curve acceleration deceleration B Output frequency Hz Set frequency f Rated frequency fb 180 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Decelerate to stop F6 10 Stop mode 0 1 Coast to stop 0 Decelerate to stop After the stop command is enabled the AC drive decreases the output frequency according to the deceleration time and stops when the frequency decreases to zero 1 Coast to stop After the stop command is enabled the AC drive immediately stops the output The motor will coast to stop based on the mechanical inertia Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 6 11 iar of stop DC maximum 0 00 Hz F6 12 Waiting time of stop DC braking 0 0 36 05 0 05 F6 13 Stop DC braking current 0 100 0 F6 14 Stop DC braking time 0 0 36 05 0 05 F6 11 Initial frequency of stop DC braking During the process of decelerating to stop the AC
219. he setting of rated current is too small 9 4 Common Faults and Solutions You may come across the following faults during the use of the AC drive Refer to the following table for simple fault analysis 292 MD380 User Manual Table 9 2 Troubleshooting to common faults of the AC drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions 1 There is no power supply to the AC drive or the power input to the AC drive iS tap IOW 1 Check the power supply 2 The power supply of the switch on the drive board of the AC drive is eCheck NE BUS VOURQS 4 There is no display faulty 2 Score and at power on 3 The rectifier bridge is damaged 4 The control board or the 4 Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support operation panel is faulty 5 The cable connecting the control board and the drive board and the operation panel breaks 1 The cable between the drive board and the control board is in poor contact 2 Related components on the RE CONNEC hE arcore and 28 core cables HC is displayed control board are damaged 2 2 Contact the agent or Inovance at power on 3 The motor or the motor cable is fortechnical subbort short circuited to the ground pport 4 The HALL device is faulty 5 The power input to the AC drive is too low 1 The motor or the motor output pee eure Hon of the se i ei motor and the output cable with Err23 is displayed ca
220. he valid state of virtual DI1 is from virtual DO1 A1 05 0000 3 Set virtual DO1 to power on time reached A1 11 24 4 Set the accumulative power on time threshold to 100 h F8 16 100 h Then the AC drive reports Err27 when the accumulative power on time reaches 100 hours Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 17 Accumulative running time threshold 0 65000 h Oh It is used to set the accumulative running time threshold of the AC drive If the accumulative running time F7 09 reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No F8 18 Startup protection 0 1 Yes This parameter is used to set whether to enable the safety protection If it is set to 1 the AC drive does not respond to the run command valid upon AC drive power on for example an input terminal is ON before power on The AC drive responds only after the run command is cancelled and becomes valid again In addition the AC drive does not respond to the run command valid upon fault reset of the AC drive The run protection can be disabled only after the run command is cancelled In this way the motor can be protected from responding to run commands upon power on or fault reset in unexpected conditions Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency Frequency detection value F
221. he value of F0 10 Maximum frequency 6 Multi reference In multi reference mode combinations of different DI terminal states correspond to different set frequencies The MD380 supports a maximum of 16 speeds implemented by 16 state combinations of four DI terminals allocated with functions 12 to 15 in Group FC The multiple references indicate percentages of the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency 138 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes If a DI terminal is used for the multi reference function you need to perform related setting in group F4 7 Simple PLC When the simple programmable logic controller PLC mode is used as the frequency source the running frequency of the AC drive can be switched over among the 16 frequency references You can set the holding time and acceleration deceleration time of the 16 frequency references For details refer to the descriptions of Group FC 8 PID The output of PID control is used as the running frequency PID control is generally used in on site closed loop control such as constant pressure closed loop control and constant tension closed loop control When applying PID as the frequency source you need to set parameters of PID function in group FA 9 Communication setting The frequency is set by means of communication If the AC drive is a slave in point point communication and receives data as the frequency source data transmitted by the master is used as
222. hed the AC drive stops automatically and meanwhile the corresponding DO becomes ON The AC drive starts timing from 0 each time it starts up and the remaining timing duration can be queried by 00 20 The timing duration is set in F8 43 and F8 44 in unit of minute Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 45 input voltage lower limit 0 00 V to F8 46 3 10 V F8 46 input voltage upper limit F8 45 to 10 00 V 6 80V These two parameters are used to set the limits of the input voltage to provide protection on the AC drive When the 11 input is larger than the value of F8 46 or smaller than the value of F8 45 the corresponding DO becomes ON indicating that Al1 input exceeds the limit Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 47 Module temperature threshold 0 75 C 75 When the heatsink temperature of the AC drive reaches the value of this parameter the corresponding DO becomes ON indicating that the module temperature reaches the threshold 196 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Fan working during running F8 48 Cooling fan control 0 1 Fan working continuously It is used to set the working mode of the cooling fan If this parameter is set to 0 the fan works when the AC drive is in running state When the AC drive stops the cooling fan works
223. high speed pulse input inpu p Maximum input frequency 100 kHz gs Voltage or current output is decided by jumper J5 El AO1 GND Analog output 1 Output voltage range 0 10 V 5 Output current range 0 20 mA Optical coupling isolation dual polarity open collector output Output voltage range 0 24 V n Output current range 0 50 mA DO1 CME Digital output 1 Note that CME and COM are internally insulated but they shorted by jumper externally In this case DO1 is driven by 24 V by default If you 2 want to drive DO1 by external power supply remove the jumper It is limited by F5 00 FM terminal output mode selection EM COM High speed pulse As high speed pulse output the maximum output frequency hits 100 kHz As open collector output its specification is the same as that of DO1 NC terminal Contact driving capacity 250 VAC COS 0 4 gt S T A TIC NO terminal SUED TA 0 Applying to Overvoltage Category II circuit Extension card 128 pin terminal 412 Connect to an optional card I O extension E interface g PLC card and various bus cards Support various types of PG cards 43 PG card interface differential UVW and resolver J7 extemal operation Connect to external operation panel lt panel interface 40 MD380 User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3 2 4 Wiring of AC Drive Control Circuit Figure 3 14 Wiring mode
224. hose in the upper row and causing faults Figure 3 2 Installation of the insulation guide plate Insulation guide plate N 3 1 3 Mechanical Installation Method and Process The MD380 series AC drives have two housing types plastic housing and sheet metal housing according to different voltage and power classes The MD380 supports both wall mounting installation and embedded installation in different applications 1 Wall mounting installation of the MD380 plastic housing Figure 3 3 Wall mounting installation of the MD380 plastic housing Back panel of control cabinet Fix four screws N j 31 Mechanical and Electrical Installation MD380 User Manual 2 Embedded installation of the MD380 plastic housing Figure 3 4 External hanging bracket for the MD380 External hanging bracket nm GER ay nn Figure 3 5 Embedded installation of the MD380 plastic housing Install the AC drive on the Back panel of front of the control cabinet 2 control cabinet Mi 4 2822 MD380 User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3 Wall mounting installation of the MD380 sheet metal housing Figure 3 7 Wall mounting installation of the MD380 sheet metal housing Install th
225. hour 0 PLC running 0 Set by FC 00 1 AM 2 12 3 FC 51 Reference 0 source 4 Pulse setting 0 5 PID 6 Set by preset frequency FO 08 modified via terminal UP DOWN 111 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Conte Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Group FD Communication Parameters Unit s digit Modbus baud rate 300 BPs 600 BPs 1200 BPs 2400 BPs 4800 BPs 9600 BPs 19200 BPs 38400 BPs 57600 BPs 115200 BPs Ten s digit PROFIBUS DP baud rate FD 00 Baud rate 0 115200 BPs 6005 1 208300 BPs 2 256000 BPs 3 512000 Bps Hundred s digit reserved Thousand s digit CANlink baud rate 20 50 100 125 250 500 1M No check data format lt 8 N 2 gt gr amp COUN cO Even parity check data format lt 8 E 1 gt FD 01 Data format 2 Odd Parity check data format 0 lt 8 0 1 gt 3 No check data format lt 8 1 gt Valid for Modbus 0 Broadcast address FD 02 Local address Ud 1 Valid for Modbus PROFIBUS DP and CANIink 112 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table ed Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property FD 03 Response delay ibd ii 2ms Valid for Modbus 0 0s i
226. ideal current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory X corrected AC 27 AO1 sampling current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory X corrected Function Code Parameter Name Min Unit Communication Address Group 00 Standard Monitoring Parameters 00 00 Running frequency Hz 0 01 Hz 7000H U0 01 Set frequency Hz 0 01 Hz 7001H 00 02 Bus voltage 0 1V 7002H U0 03 Output voltage 1 7003 U0 04 Output current 0 01A 7004H 00 05 Output power 0 1 kW 7005H 00 06 Output torque 0 1 7006H 00 07 DI state 1 7007H U0 08 DO state 1 7008H 00 09 Al1 voltage V 0 01 V 7009H 00 10 12 voltage V current mA 0 01 V 0 01 mA 700AH 00 11 voltage V 0 01 V 7007BH U0 12 Count value 1 700CH 00 13 Length value 1 700DH U0 14 Load speed 1 700EH 00 15 PID setting 1 700FH 00 16 PID feedback 1 7010H U0 17 PLC stage 1 7011H 00 18 Input pulse frequency Hz 0 01 kHz 7012H U0 19 Feedback speed 0 01 Hz 7013H U0 20 Remaining running time 0 1 Min 7014H U0 21 11 voltage before correction 0 001 V 7015H U0 22 12 voltage V current mA before 0 01 V 0 01 mA 7016H correction 133 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Min Unit Communication Address Group 90 Standard Monitoring Parameters U0 23 voltage before correction 0 001 V
227. ilure Voltage rally judging time at instantaneous power failure F9 61 Bus voltage Action judging voltage at instantaneous power failure 1 F9 62 i 1 Running A H i frequency Action pause judging T voltage at instantaneous 9 59 1 Decelerate power failure F9 60 i iN 1 i Deceler Deceler Acceler Running 1 ation ation ation frequency ime3 time4 time Action pause judging 1 voltage at instantaneous T power failure F9 60 i gt Deceler Deceler ation time ation time 3 4 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Disabled F9 63 Protection upon load becoming 0 0 1 Enabled 0 0 100 0 rated 0 motor current TOUS F9 64 Detection level of load becoming 0 F9 65 Detection time of load becoming 0 0 0 60 05 1 05 If protection upon load becoming 0 is enabled when the output current of the AC drive is lower than the detection level F9 64 and the lasting time exceeds the detection time F9 65 the output frequency of the AC drive automatically declines to 7 of the rated frequency During the protection the AC drive automatically accelerates to the set frequency if the load resumes to normal Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 67 Over speed detection value 0 0 50 0 maximum frequency 20 0 F9 68 Over speed detection ti
228. incremental encoder 1 Reserve 31 Encoder installation angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 U V W phase sequence of 0 Forward 119532 UVW encoder 1 Reverse p A3 33 UVW encoder angle offset 0 0 359 9 0 0 122 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Setting Range Default Property A3 34 Number of pole pairs of 1 65525 1 X resolver ire 0 0s No action 36 Encoder wire break fault 0 0s detection time 0 1 10 0s 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete A3 37 Auto tuning selection auto tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning A3 38 Speed loop proportional gain 1 0 100 30 A3 39 Speed loop integral time 1 0 01 10 005 0 50s A3 40 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to A2 43 5 00 Hz 41 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0 100 15 A3 42 Speed loop integral time 2 0 01 10 00s 1 00s A3 43 Switchoverfrequency 2 42 40 to maximum output 10 00Hz frequency A3 44 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 A3 45 Ps constant of Speed lOO ons n tps 0 000s A3 46 Vector control over 0 200 64 de excitation gain 0 A2 48 1 AM 2 12 imi in 3 47 Torque upper limit source in 0 Je speed control mode 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Via communication 6 MIN 11 12 7 11 12 Digital
229. ing According to the formula U x U R Pb U refers to the braking voltage at system stable braking Different systems select different braking voltages The 380 VAC system usually selects 700 V braking voltage Pb refers to the braking power 280 MD380 User Manual Selection and Dimensions 8 7 2 Selection of Power of Braking Resistor In theory the power of the braking resistor is consistent with the braking power But in consideration that the de rating is 70 you can calculate the power of the braking resistor according to the formula 0 7 x Pr Pb x D Pr refers to the power of resistor D refers to the braking frequency percentage of the regenerative process to the whole working process Winding and Occasional General unwinding Centrifuge braking load application Braking Frequency 20 30 20 30 50 60 5 10 Table 8 14 below provides data for reference You can select different resistance power based on actual needs However the resistance must not be lower than the recommended value The power may be higher than the recommended value The braking resistor model is dependent on the generation power of the motor in the actual system and is also related to the system inertia deceleration time and potential energy load For systems with high inertia and or rapid deceleration times or frequent braking sequences the braking resistor with higher power and
230. ing d for V F separation 0 V to rated motor voltage separation is generally applicable to scenarios such as induction heating inverse power supply and motor torque control If V F separated control is enabled the output voltage can be set in F3 14 or by means of analog multi reference simple PLC PID or communication If you set the output voltage by means of non digital setting 100 of the setting corresponds to the rated motor voltage If a negative percentage is set its absolute value is used as the effective value 0 Digital setting F3 14 The output voltage is set directly in F3 14 1 Al1 2 AI2 3 AI3 The output voltage is set by Al terminals 4 Pulse setting DI5 The output voltage is set by pulses of the terminal DI5 159 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Pulse setting specification voltage range 9 30 V frequency range 0 100 kHz 5 Multi reference If the voltage source is multi reference parameters in group F4 and FC must be set to determine the corresponding relationship between setting signal and setting voltage 100 0 of the multi reference setting in group FC corresponds to the rated motor voltage 6 If the voltage source is simple PLC mode parameters in group FC must set to determine the setting output voltage 7 PID The output voltage is generated based on PID closed loop For details see the descripti
231. input limit exceeded A1 11 31 225 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual When the AI1 input exceeds the limit VDO1 becomes ON At this moment VDI1 becomes ON and the AC drive receives you defined fault 1 Then the AC drive reports Err27 and stops Decided by A1 06 The VDI state is determined by the binary bit of A1 06 For example to implement the function that the AC drive automatically enters the running state after power on perform the following setting 1 Allocate VDI1 with function 1 Forward RUN FWD A1 00 1 2 SetA1 05 to xxx1 The state of VDI1 is decided by A1 06 3 SetA1 06 to xxx1 VDI1 is valid 4 Set F0 02 to 1 The command source to terminal control 5 SetF8 18 to Startup protection is not enabled When the AC drive completes initialization after power on it detects that VDI1 is valid and VDI1 is allocated with the function of forward RUN That is the AC drive receives the forward RUN command from the terminal Therefore The AC drive starts to run in forward direction Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1 07 Function selection for 11 used as DI 0 59 0 A1 08 Function selection for AI2 used as DI 0 59 0 A1 09 Function selection for AI3 used as DI 0 59 0 Unit s digit 1 0 High level valid 1 Low level valid A1 10 State selection for Al used as DI Ten s digit 12 000 0 1 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit
232. ion 0 Not display 02 AC drive parameter 1 Display 1 display property Ten s digit group A display selection 0 Not display 1 Display 4 4 Quick View of Function Codes The MD380 provides two quick modes of viewing the required function codes 1 You can define a maximum of 30 function codes into group FE 2 The MD380 automatically list the modified function codes In this case the operation panel provides three viewing modes base mode user defined mode and user modified mode as listed in the following table Function Code Display Mode Display Base mode h A E User defined mode E r User modified mode You can perform switchover between the three function code display modes by EN pressing The method of viewing and modifying function codes in each mode is the same as the method of operating the operation panel described above Figure 4 5 Switchover between three function code display modes QUICK gt Status parameters Base mode User defined mode User modified mode Default display All function codes Group Modified function code QUICK QUICK QUICK QUICK QUICK V 50 00 l bASE FP 03 1 USEr FP 03 1x operation within ENTER ENTER ENTER qm Level menu FO uF0 03 cF0 01 Press A V to view function codes in turn in the corresponding rang
233. ion range of frequency reached Output frequency Hz Detection Ac range Set frequency Frequency reached 4 detection signal 191 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Jump frequency during 0 Disabled F8 22 0 acceleration deceleration 4 Enabled It is used to set whether the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration When the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration and the running frequency is within the frequency jump range the actual running frequency will jump over the set frequency jump amplitude rise directly from the lowest jump frequency to the highest jump frequency The following figure shows the diagram when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration Figure 6 19 Diagram when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration deceleration Output frequency Hz Jump f Frequency jump amplitude frequency 2 1 Frequency jump amplitude Jump Frequency jump amplitude frequency 1T fs Frequency jump amplitude Time t Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Frequency switchover point between 0 00 Hz to maximum acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2 frequency 0 00 Hz F8 25 Frequency switchover point between 0 00 to maximum 0 00 Hz moeg deceleration time 1 and deceleration tim
234. ions 1 Reduce the load and check the motor and re Err40 mechanical condition current limit fault 2 The AC drive model is of too 2 Select an AC drive of small power class higher power class Motor switchover Change the selection of the motor 4 Perform motor switchover fault during Err41 via terminal during running of the after the AC drive stops running AC drive 1 The encoder parameters are set Ieser the encoder parameters properly incorrectly Too large speed 2 The motor auto tuning is not 2 enon the motor BA Err42 tuning deviation performed 3 F9 69 and F9 70 are set 2 SELE on ando TO correctly based the actual incorrectly SONS situation 1 Set the encoder 1 The encoder parameters are set Parameters properly incorrectly 2 Perform the motor auto Motor over speed Err43 2 The motor auto tuning is not tuning performed 3 F9 69 and F9 70 are 3 Set F9 69 and F9 70 set incorrectly correctly based on the actual situation 1 Check the temperature sensor cabling and eliminate 1 The cabling of the temperature the cabling fault Motor overheat Err45 sensor becomes loose A 2 Lower the carrier 2 The motor temperature is too high frequency or adopt other heat radiation measures Check that the motor Initial position Err51 The motor parameters are not set parameters are set correctly fault based on the actual situation and whether t
235. is fed back to the DI terminal of the AC drive with stop function 68 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example 4 9 Setting and Auto tuning of Motor Parameters 4 9 1 Motor Parameters to Be Set When the AC drive runs in the vector control mode F0 01 0 or 1 accurate motor parameters are required to ensure desired driver performance and running efficiency This is extremely different from the V F control F0 01 2 Motor parameters motor 1 by default that need to be set are listed in the following table Table 4 2 Motor parameters to be set Parameter Description Remark Asynchronous motor variable F1 00 Motor type frequency asynchronous motor synchronous motor F1 01 to F1 05 Rated motor power Rated motor voltage Rated motor current Rated motor frequency Rated motor rotational speed Model parameters manual input F1 06 to F1 20 F1 27 28 34 Motor internal equivalent stator resistance inductive reactance and rotor inductance Auto tuning parameters Encoder parameters these parameters need to be set in the vector control mode with sensor Encoder parameters For complicated application system with multiple motors the parameters of motors 2 3 and 4 are listed in the following table Table 4 3 Motors 2 3 and 4 parameters to be set Motor 2 Parameters Motor 3 Parameters Motor 4 Parameters Description A2 00 A2 01 to A2
236. its of values converted from the values of F7 03 F7 04 and F7 05 in the hexadecimal format In stop state a total of 13 status parameters can be displayed as listed in the following table Function Parameter Code Name Setting Range Default 0000 FFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Set frequency Hz Bus voltage V Dl input status DO output status Alt voltage V AI2 voltage V A voltage V Count value 33 LED display F7 05 stop parameters 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Length value PLC stage Load speed PID setting Pulse settin frequency kHz Reserved Reserved Reserved 52 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example In running state five running status parameters are displayed by default and you can set whether other parameters are displayed by setting F7 03 and F7 04 as listed in the following table Function Parameter Setting Range Default 71615 413121110 Running frequency1 Hz Set frequency Hz Bus voltage V Output voltage V Output current A Output power kW Output torque LED display Dl input status V PISIS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IE parameters 1 L DO output status
237. l 25 detection FDT2 output Refer to the descriptions of F8 28 and F8 29 26 Frequency 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of F8 30 and F8 31 27 Frequency 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of F8 32 and F8 33 28 Current 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of F8 38 and F8 39 29 Current 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of F8 40 and F8 41 If the timing function F8 42 is valid the terminal becomes 30 Timing reached ON after the current running time of the AC drive reaches the set time AI input limit If Al1 input is larger than the value of F8 46 11 input 31 p voltage upper limit or lower than the value of F8 45 Al1 exceeded RM input voltage lower limit the terminal becomes ON 32 Load becoming 0 If the load becomes 0 the terminal becomes ON If the AC drive is in the reverse running state the terminal 33 Reverse running becomes ON 34 Zero current state Refer to the descriptions of F8 28 and F8 29 Mad l amp t amp mperature If the heatsink temperature of the inverter module F7 07 35 P reaches the set module temperature threshold F8 47 the reached terminal becomes ON 36 SOMNAT Refer to the descriptions of F8 36 and F8 37 exceeded Frequency lower If the running frequency reaches the lower limit the terminal 37 limit reached having AP becomes ON In the stop state the signal is still ON output at stop If a fault occurs on the AC drive and the AC drive continues 38 Alarm output to run
238. l terminal AI3 The following table lists the functions available for the DI terminals Table 6 1 Functions of DI terminals Function Code Parameter Name Default Remark F4 00 function selection 1 Forward RUN FWD Standard F4 01 DI2 function selection 4 Forward JOG FJOG Standard F4 02 DI3 function selection 9 Fault reset RESET Standard F4 03 DI4 function selection 12 Multi reference terminal 1 Standard F4 04 DI5 function selection 13 Multi reference terminal 2 Standard F4 05 DI6 function selection 0 Extended F4 06 DI7 function selection 0 Extended F4 07 DI8 function selection 0 Extended F4 08 DI9 function selection 0 Extended F4 09 DI10 function selection 0 Extended Value Function Description 0 No function Set 0 for reserved terminals to avoid malfunction 1 Forward RUN FWD The terminal is used to control forward or reverse RUN 2 Reverse RUN REV of the AC drive 3 Threedline control The terminal determines three line control of the AC drive For details see the description of F4 11 FJOG indicates forward JOG running while RJOG 4 Forward JOG FJOG indicates reverse JOG running The JOG frequency acceleration time and deceleration time are described respectively in F8 00 F8 01 and F8 02 Reverse JOG RJOG Terminal UP If the frequency is determined by external terminals the terminals with the two functions are used as increment and de
239. le for Connectin 9 Model Copper Busbar 012 DCL 0200 12 DCL 0250 012 DCL 0360 15 DCL 0600 MD380T315G 355G 400G MD380 5T315G 355G 400G MD380 7T55G 75G 90G MD380 7T 110G 132G 15 DCL 0700 214 DCL 1000 Not 012 configured with reactor now Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Diameter of Fixed Hele fetes Reactor Adaptable AC Drive Model C D E Connecting Hole Model Copper Busbar MD380 7T160GH 200GH 160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10 x 15 012 DCL 0250 MD380 7T220GH 250GH 160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10 x 15 012 DCL 0360 MD380 71280G 315G 355G MD380 71400G 450G 500G 190 230 93 128 250 325 200 13 x 18 015 DCL 0700 8 6 Physical Dimensions of External Operation Panel Figure 8 16 Physical dimensions of external operation panel 76 0 _ 54 0 gt D 4 i 10 0 Crystal 116 0 head 95 0 1040 11 IN EN Wil Hl M Y E 3 5 Pee 73 5 8 7 Selection of Braking Unit and Braking Resistor 8 7 1 Physical Dimensions of External DC Reactor The motor and load s regenerative energy is almost completely consumed on the braking resistor when brak
240. lection 0 1 Slave 0 Slave not following running i commands of the master A8 02 Slave following master i 0 Je command selection 1 Slave following running commands of the master A8 03 Usage of data received by 0 Torque setting1 Frequency 0 slave setting A8 04 Zero offset of received data 100 0096 100 0094 0 00 78 torque A8 05 Gain of received data 10 00 10 00 1 00 ve torque Point point communication 6 interruption detection time aries nes A8 07 data sending cycle 0 001 10 0005 0 001s A8 08 Zero offset of received data 100 0096 100 0094 0 00 ve zero offset frequency A8 09 Gain of received data gain 10 00 10 00 1 00 frequency 8 1 prevention 0 00 100 00 10 00 coefficient Group AC AI AO Correction AC 00 Al1 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected Factory AC 01 11 displayed voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V correciad AC 02 11 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected 131 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual en Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property AC 03 AI1 displayed voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected 04 AI2 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 05 2 displayed voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V correctad 06 12 measured voltage 2 16 000 9 999 V corrected AC 07 AI2 displayed vo
241. lower resistance value should be selected Table 8 16 Recommended values of braking resistor Recommended Recommended Model Power Resistance Braking Unit Remark Single phase 220 V MD380S0 4GB 80 W 2200 2 Builtin MD380S0 7GB 80 W 2150 2 No special description standard MD380S1 5GB 100 W 2100 2 MD380S2 2GB 100 W 270 2 Three phase 220 V MD380 2T0 4GB 150 W 2150 2 MD380 2T0 75GB 150 W 2110 2 MD380 2T1 1GB 250 W 2100 0 Built in MD380 2T2 2GB 300 W 2650 standard MD380 2T3 7GB 400 W 2450 MD380 2T5 5GB 800W 222 Q MD380 2T7 5GB 1000 W 216 2 MD380 2T11G 1500 W 211 2 Built in Add to the model if a MD380 2T15G 2500 W 280 optional braking unit is needed MD380 2T18 5G 3 7 kW 28 00 External MDBUN 45 S MD380 2T22G 4 5 kW 280 External MDBUN 45 S MD380 2T30G 5 5 kW 240 External MDBUN 60 S MD380 2T37G 7 5 kW 240 External MDBUN 90 S MD380 2T45G 4 5 kW x2 2492 x2 External MDBUN 60 S x 2 281 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Recommended Recommended Model Power Resistance Braking Unit Remark MD380 2T55G 5 5kWx2 gt 40 2 External MDBUN 60 S x 2 MD380 2175G 16 kw 21 2 2 External MDBUN 90 S x 2 Three phase 380 V MD380T0 7GB 150 W 2 300 Q MD380T1 5GB 150 W gt
242. ltage 2 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 08 AI3 measured voltage 1 9 999 10 000 V corrected AC 09 AI3 displayed voltage 1 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 10 AI3 measured voltage 2 9 999 10 000 V corrected AC 11 AI3 displayed voltage 2 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 12 1 target voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V corrected AC 13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected 14 AO1 target voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected 15 AO1 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected 16 2 target voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V corrected AC 17 AO2 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected Factory AC 18 AO2 target voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V 19 2 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 20 AI2 measured current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected Factory AC 21 AI2 sampling current 1 0 000 20 000 mA corrected 22 AI2 measured current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Pactory corrected AC 23 AI2 sampling current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected 132 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table 5 2 Monitoring Parameters ed Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property AC 24 AO 1 ideal current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 25 AO1 sampling current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected 26 1
243. ltage waveform Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance between the power phases Reduce the external conduction and radiation EMC interference of the AC drive drive input side Decrease the conduction interference flowing from the power end to the AC drive and improve the anti interference capacity of the AC drive Improve the power factor of the input side MD series AC drive e m DC and above Improve the efficiency and thermal stability of the AC drive reactor configured with DC Eliminate the impact of higher harmonics of the AC reactor as standard drive input side and reduce the external conduction and radiation interference The output side of the AC drive generally has much higher harmonics When the motor is far from the AC drive there is much distributed capacitance in the circuit and certain harmonics may cause resonance in the Between AC drive circuit bringing about the following two impacts AC output output side and the Degrade the motor insulation performance and reactor Mes close to the damage the motor in the long run rive Generate large leakage current and cause frequent AC drive protection trips If the distance between the AC drive and the motor is greater than 100 m install an AC output reactor 1 Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the AC drive Otherwise it may cause faults to the AC drive or damage to the capacitor and su
244. m value 1 0 0 Ten s digit Setting for Al2 less than minimum input 0 1 same as Al1 Hundred s digit Setting for AI3 less than minimum input 0 1 same as AI1 321 000 F4 35 011 delay time 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s F4 36 DI2 delay time 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s F4 37 013 delay time 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s Unit s digit DI1 valid mode 0 High level valid 1 Low level valid F4 38 DI valid mode selection 1 Ten s digit DI2 valid mode 00000 0 1 same as DI1 Hundred s digit DI3 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 91 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F4 38 DI valid mode selection 1 Thousand s digit D14 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit DI5 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 00000 F4 39 DI valid mode selection 2 Unit s digit DI6 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten s digit DI7 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Hundred s digit DI8 state 0 1 same as DI1 Thousand s digit DI9 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 Ten thousand s digit 0110 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 00000 F4 40 Al2 input signal selection 0 Voltage signal 1 Current signal Group F5 Output Terminals F5 00 F5 01 FM terminal output mode FMR function open collector output terminal
245. mation and Precautions MD380 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions In this manual the notices are graded based on the degree of danger AN pancer indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even death Z warnine indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in personal injury or property damage Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding Installation commissioning or maintenance may be performed in conjunction with this chapter Inovance will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation 1 1 Safety Information Safety Grade Precautions Use Stage Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage component missing or damage upon unpacking pancer Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to the product you received Before Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent installation damage to the equipment A Do not use the equipment if any component is damaged or missing WARNING Failure to comply will result in personal injury Do not touch the components with your hands Failure to comply will result in static electricity damage Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal and keep it away from combustible materials Failure to comply AN DANGER may result in a fire Do no
246. me 0 0 60 0s 1 0s This function is valid only when the AC drive runs in the CLVC mode If the actual motor rotational speed detected by the AC drive exceeds the maximum frequency and the excessive value is greater than the value of F9 67 and the lasting time exceeds the value of F9 68 the AC drive reports Err43 and acts according to the selected fault protection action If the over speed detection time is 0 0s the over speed detection function is disabled 206 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default o F9 69 Detection value of too large 0 0 50 0 maximum 20 096 speed deviation frequency Detection time of too large speed eae deviation 0 0 60 05 5 06 This function is valid only when the AC drive runs the mode If the AC drive detects the deviation between the actual motor rotational speed detected by the AC drive and the set frequency is greater than the value of F9 69 and the lasting time exceeds the value of F9 70 the AC drive reports Err42 and according to the selected fault protection action If F9 70 Detection time of too large speed deviation is 0 05 this function is disabled Group FA Process Control PID Function PID control is a general process control method By performing proportional integral and differential operations on the difference between the feedback signal and the targe
247. minal 583 Reverse 014 control command DIS Three line mode 1 COM In the preceding figure SB1 must stay ON during normal start and running The AC drive stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF The signals from SB2 and SB3 become valid once they become ON The running state of the AC drive is determined by the final actions on the three buttons 55 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual 2 Communication control The most common configuration is when the host computer is used to control running of the AC drive by means of communication such as the RS485 PROFIBUS DP CANIink and CANopen The MD380 interacts with the user programmable card also by means of communication Install a matching communication card in the multifunction extension port and set F0 02 to 2 Then you can start or stop the AC drive in communication mode The following figure shows the setting method Figure 4 8 Setting for start stop using the communication control mode Function Setting Command source Control switch Terminal code value Terminal control selection AE s RUN Forward RUN 15wt jForward 012 Reverse F002 1 RUN DIS Running NSW M Reverso DIA Terminal command a DI5 control Twoine mode 1 COM When FD 04 is set to a non zero number the function of automatic AC drive stop upo
248. minimum input 0 1 same as AI1 Hundred s digit Setting for AI3 less than minimum input 0 1 same as AI1 170 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes This parameter is used to determine the corresponding setting when the analog input voltage is less than the minimum value The unit s digit ten s digit and hundred s digit of this parameter respectively correspond to the setting for Al2 Al2 and AI3 If the value of a certain digit is 0 when analog input voltage is less than the minimum input the corresponding setting of the minimum input F4 14 F4 19 F4 24 is used If the value of a certain digit is 1 when analog input voltage is less than the minimum input the corresponding value of this analog input is 0 096 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4 35 DI1 delay time 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s F4 36 DI2 delay time 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s F4 37 DI3 delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 These parameters are used to set the delay time of the AC drive when the status of DI terminals changes Currently only DI1 DI2 and DI3 support the delay time function Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit DI1 valid mode 0 High level valid 1 Low level valid Ten s digit DI2 valid mode 0 1 same as DI1 F4 38 D mode Hundred s digit DI3 valid mode 00000 selection 1 0 1 same as DI1 Thousand s digit DI4 valid mo
249. motor 0 1 A to A2 03 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A4 16 synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft D inductance lt 55 kW Model A4 17 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Shaft Q inductance lt 55 kW Model A4 18 synchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 125 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property 4 20 Back EMF synchronous 0 1 6553 5 V Model motor dependent a4 27 EnCoder pulses per 1 65535 1024 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder A4 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN COS encoder 4 Wire saving UVW encoder 0 Forward A4 30 A B phase sequence of ABZ 0 T incremental encoder 1 Reserve 4 31 Encoder installation angle 0 0 359 9 0 0 0 Forward 4 32 U V W phase sequence of 0 UVW encoder 1 Reverse 4 33 UVW encoder angle offset 0 0 359 9 0 0 4 34 Number of pole pairs of 1 65525 1 X resolver ire 0 0s No action A4 36 Encoder wire break fault 0 0s detection time 0 1 10 05 0 No auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous moto
250. motor and overcurrent stall or overcurrent protection of the AC drive Figure 6 5 Setting of multi point V F curve Voltage Vb V3 V2 V1 F1 F2 F3 Fb Frequency V1 V3 1st 2nd and 3rd voltage 1 1st 2nd and 3rd frequency percentages of multi point V F percentages of multi point V F Vb Rated motor voltage Fb Rated motor running frequency Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 09 VIF slip compensation gain 0 200 0 0 0 This parameter is valid only for the asynchronous motor It can compensate the rotational speed slip of the asynchronous motor when the load of the motor increases stabilizing the motor speed in case of load change If this parameter is set to 100 it indicates that the compensation when the motor bears rated load is the rated motor slip The rated motor slip is automatically obtained by the AC drive through calculation based on the rated motor frequency and rated motor rotational speed in group F1 Generally if the motor rotational speed is different from the target speed slightly adjust this parameter Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 10 V F over excitation gain 0 200 64 During deceleration of the AC drive over excitation can restrain rise of the bus voltage preventing the overvoltage fault The larger the over excitation is the better the restraining result is Increase the over excitation gain if the AC dri
251. n 0 Main frequency source X 1 X and Y operation operation relationship determined by ten s digit 2 Switchover between X and Y 3 Switchover between X and X and Y operation 4 Switchover between Y and X and Y operation Ten s digit X and Y operation relationship 0 X Y 1 X Y 2 Maximum 3 Minimum 0 00 to maximum frequency valid when frequency source is digital setting 00 50 00 Hz F0 09 Rotation direction 0 Same direction 1 Reverse direction 0 F0 10 Maximum frequency 50 00 320 00 Hz 50 00 Hz F0 11 Source of frequency upper limit 0 Set by F0 12 1 AM 2 12 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting 81 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property F0 12 Frequency upper limit it to 5000 0 13 Frequency upper limit offset to tueximamiltequenoy 0 00 Hz F0 14 Frequency lower limit Io to frequency upper limit 00 Hz F0 15 Carrier frequency 0 5 16 0 kHz deeem i 0 No F0 16 Carrier frequency 1 adjustment with temperature 1 Yes 0 00 650 00s F0 19 2 F0 17 Acceleration time 1 0 0 6500 0s F0 19 1 Pica 0 65000s F0 19 0 0 00 650 00s F0 19 2 F0 18 Deceleration time 1 0 0 6500 0s F0 19 1 0 65000s F0 19 0 0 1s F0 19
252. n action selection 4 Setting Range Unit s digit User defined fault 1 Err27 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten s digit User defined fault 2 Err28 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Hundred s digit Accumulative power on time reached Err29 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Thousand s digit Load becoming 0 Err30 0 Coast to stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 Continue to run at 7 of rated motor frequency and resume to the set frequency if the load recovers Ten thousand s digit PID feedback lost during running Err31 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Unit s digit Too large speed deviation Err42 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten s digit Motor over speed Err43 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Hundred s digit Initial position fault Err51 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Thousand s digit Speed feedback fault Err52 Same as unit s digit in F9 47 Ten thousand s digit Reserved If Coast to stop is selected the AC drive displays Err and directly stops Default 00000 00000 If Stop according to the stop mode is selected the AC drive displays A stops according to the stop mode After stop the AC drive displays Err If Continue to run is selected the AC drive continues to run and displays A running frequency is set in F9 54 upon abnormality Function Code Parameter Name Setting Ra
253. n communication timeout is enabled This prevents uncontrollable AC drive running due to faults of the communication cable or the host computer The communication port of the AC drive supports the Modbus RTU protocol and the communication is implemented only when the host computer supports the Modbus RTU master station protocol 4 7 2 Start Mode The MD380 supports three start modes namely direct start rotational speed tracking restart and pre excited start asynchronous motor set in F6 00 F6 00 0 direct start It is applicable to small inertia load The frequency curve in this mode is shown in the following figure DC braking before the start is applicable to drive of load such as elevator and crane Startup frequency is applicable to drive with burst start under start torque such as cement mixer 56 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example Figure 4 9 Frequency curve of direct start Frequency f F0 12 Frequency f soi Frequency F0 12 F6 00 O Direct stat 5 upper limit F6 00 0 Direct start Frequency Acceleration Deceleration mode lt upper limit 1 Default F6 06 0 0s 6 03 0 00 Hz F6 04 005 Acceleration holding time F6 07 0 time L 506 2222 F6 08 braking time Startup frequency 2 gt Time t Time t Ruhing Running command F6 00 1 Rotational spee
254. n fault F9 17 Frequency upon 3rd fault F9 18 Current upon 3rd fault F9 19 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault F9 20 DI status upon 3rd fault F9 21 Output terminal status upon 3rd fault F9 22 AC drive status upon 3rd fault F9 23 Power on time upon 3rd fault F9 24 Running time upon 3rd fault F9 27 Frequency upon 2nd fault F9 28 Current upon 2nd fault F9 29 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault F9 30 DI status upon 2nd fault F9 31 Output terminal status upon 2nd fault F9 32 Frequency upon 2nd fault F9 33 Current upon 2nd fault F9 34 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault F9 37 DI status upon 1st fault F9 38 Output terminal status upon 1st fault F9 39 Frequency upon 1st fault F9 40 Current upon 1st fault F9 41 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault F9 42 DI status upon 1st fault F9 43 Output terminal status upon 1st fault F9 44 Frequency upon 1st fault 103 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Gente Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Unit s digit Motor overload Err11 0 Coast to stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode 2 Continue to run Ten s digit Power input phase loss Err12 Same as unit s digit Fault protection F9 47 Hundred s digit Power output 00000 action selection 1 phase loss Err13
255. n increase in power loss temperature rise and interference 143 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following table Table 6 1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment Carrier frequency Low High Motor noise Large Small Output current waveform Bad Good Motor temperature rise High Low AC drive temperature rise Low High Leakage current Small Large External radiation interference Small Large The factory setting of carrier frequency varies with the AC drive power If you need to modify the carrier frequency note that if the set carrier frequency is higher than factory setting it will lead to an increase in temperature rise of the AC drive s heatsink In this case you need to de rate the AC drive Otherwise the AC drive may overheat and alarm Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Carrier frequency adjustment with 0 No F0 16 1 temperature 1 Yes It is used to set whether the carrier frequency is adjusted based on the temperature The AC drive automatically reduces the carrier frequency when detecting that the heatsink temperature is high The AC drive resumes the carrier frequency to the set value when the heatsink temperature becomes normal This function reduces the overheat alarms Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 00 650 00s 0 19
256. n parameters of F1 06 to F1 08 by static auto tuning Set this parameter to 1 and press Then the AC drive starts static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete auto tuning To perform this type of auto tuning ensure that the motor is disconnected from the load During the process of complete auto tuning the AC drive performs static auto tuning first and then accelerates to 80 of the rated motor frequency within the acceleration time set in F0 17 The AC drive keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop within deceleration time set in F0 18 Before performing complete auto tuning properly set the motor type motor nameplate parameters of F1 00 to F1 05 Encoder type F1 28 and Encoder pulses per revolution F1 27 first The AC drive will obtain motor parameters of F1 06 to F1 10 A B phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder F1 30 and vector control current loop PI parameters of F2 13 to F2 16 by complete auto tuning 151 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Set this parameter to 2 and press Then the AC drive starts complete auto tuning 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning It is applicable to scenarios where the synchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load During with load auto tuning the motor rotates at the speed of 10 PRM Before performing with load auto tuning properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of F1 00 to F1 05 firs
257. nction Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Running mode when set 0 Run at frequency lower limit F8 14 frequency lower than 1 Stop 0 frequency lower limit 2 Run at zero speed It is used to set the AC drive running mode when the set frequency is lower than the frequency lower limit The MD380 provides three running modes to satisfy requirements of various applications Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 15 Droop control 0 00 10 00 Hz 0 00 Hz This function is used for balancing the workload allocation when multiple motors are used to drive the same load The output frequency of the AC drives decreases as the load increases You can reduce the workload of the motor under load by decreasing the output frequency for this motor implementing workload balancing between multiple motors Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 16 Accumulative power on time threshold 0 65000 h Oh 189 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual If the accumulative power on time F7 13 reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON For example combining virtual DI DO functions to implement the function that the AC drive reports an alarm when the actual accumulative power on time reaches the threshold of 100 hours perform the setting as follows 1 Set virtual 011 to user defined fault 1 A1 00 44 2 Set that t
258. ncy 0 00 Hz If the set frequency is within the frequency jump range the actual running frequency is the jump frequency close to the set frequency Setting the jump frequency helps to avoid the mechanical resonance point of the load The MD380 supports two jump frequencies If both are set to 0 the frequency jump function is disabled The principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude is shown in the following figure Figure 6 15 Principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude Output frequency Hz Jump frequency 2 Frequency jump amplitude f Jump Frequency jump amplitude frequency 1 d Frequency jump amplitude 188 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 12 Forward Reverse rotation dead zone time 0 0 3000 0s 0 0s It is used to set the time when the output is 0 Hz at transition of the AC drive forward rotation and reverse rotation as shown in the following figure Figure 6 16 Forward Reverse rotation dead zone time Output frequency Hz Forward rotation EM Reverse D ad z ne rotation time Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Enabled F8 13 Reverse control 0 1 Disabled It is used to set whether the AC drive allows reverse rotation In the applications where reverse rotation is prohibited set this parameter to 1 Fu
259. nd 33 40 respectively from right to left Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 44 DI function state visual display 2 It displays whether the DI functions 41 59 are valid The display format is similar to 00 43 The 7 segment LEDs display functions 41 48 49 56 and 57 59 respectively from right to left 245 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 58 Phase Z counting 0 65535 It displays the phase 2 counting of the current ABZ or UVW encoder value increases or decreases by 1 every time the encoder rotates one revolution forwardly or reversely You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing 00 58 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 00 59 00 60 Current set frequency Current running frequency It displays the current set frequency and running frequency 100 00 corresponds to the AC drive s maximum frequency FO 10 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 61 drive running state 0 65535 It displays the running state of the AC drive The data format is listed in the following table Bito 0 Stop Bs 1 Forward i 2 Reverse i 0 Constant 61 9 1 2 0 Bus voltage normal 1 Undervoltag
260. ng mode of 4 Direct calculation 0 synchronous motor 2 Adjustment Field weakening degree of 6 6 2 4 57 synchronous motor 50 500 100 4 58 Maximum field weakening 1 300 50 de current 4 59 Field weakening automatic 10 500 100 adjustment gain A4 60 Field weakening integral 2 40 2 multiple 0 Sensorless flux vector control SFVC 1 Closed loop vector control A4 61 Motor 2 control mode CLVC 0 2 Voltage Frequency V F control 127 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property 0 Same as motor 1 1 Acceleration Deceleration time 1 A4 62 acceleration 2 Acceleration Deceleration time 2 0 deceleration time 3 Acceleration Deceleration time 3 4 Acceleration Deceleration time 4 0 0 Automatic torque boost A4 63 Motor 2 torque boost 3 Modal 0 1 30 0 dependent 4 65 2 oscillation 0 100 Model suppression gain dependent Group A5 Control Optimization Parameters Apo DFWM switchover maquency 29 1500 Hz 1200Hz upper limit 0 Asynchronous modulation A5 01 PWM modulation mode 0 1 Synchronous modulation 0 No compensation A5 02 Zone compensation 1 Compensation mode 1 1 mode selection 2 Compensation mode 2 0 Random PWM invalid 5 03 Random PWM depth 1 10 0 A5 04 Rapid current limit 0 Disabled1 Ena
261. ng the mapping relationship between the input voltage of AI1 AI2 and AI3 and the target frequency three of which are linear point point correspondence and two of which are four point correspondence curves You can set the curves by using function codes F4 13 to F4 27 and function codes in group A6 and select curves for AI1 Al2 and in F4 33 When is used as frequency setting source the corresponding value 100 of voltage current input corresponds to the value of A0 03 5 Pulse setting DI5 The target torque is set by DI5 high speed pulse The pulse setting signal specification is 9 30 V voltage range and 0 100 kHz frequency range The pulse can only be input via DI5 The relationship which is a two point line between DI5 input pulse frequency and the corresponding value is set in F4 28 to F4 31 The corresponding value 100 0 of pulse input corresponds to the value of A0 03 5 Communication setting The target torque is set by means of communication If the AC drive is a slave in point point communication and receives data as torque source data transmitted by the master is used as the setting value For details see the description of group A8 If PROFIBUS DP communication is valid and PZD1 is used for torque setting data transmitted by PDZ1 is directly used as the torque source The data format is 100 00 to 100 0076 100 corresponds to the value of A0 03 In other conditions data is given by host comput
262. nge Default 0 Current running frequency Frequency selection 1 Set frequency F9 54 for continuing to run 2 Frequency upper limit 0 upon fault 3 Frequency lower limit 4 Backup frequency upon abnormality F9 55 Backup frequency 0 0 100 0 maximum frequency 100 0 204 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes If a fault occurs during the running of the AC drive and the handling of fault is set to Continue to run the AC drive displays A and continues to run at the frequency set in F9 54 The setting of F9 55 is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No temperature sensor F9 56 Type of motor temperature sensor 1 PT100 0 2 PT1000 F9 57 Motor overheat protection threshold 0 200 110 C F9 58 Motor overheat warning threshold 0 200 C 90 C The signal of the motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the optional I O extension card Al3 on the extension card can be used for the temperature signal input The motor temperature sensor is connected to AI3 and PGND of the extension card The terminal of the MD380 supports both PT100 and PT1000 Set the sensor type correctly during the use You can view the motor temperature via 10 34 If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in F9 57 the AC drive reports an alarm and acts according to the selected fault protection action If the motor temperature ex
263. nting value reached set the DO Counting F4 00 to F4 09 MA eed terina to 1 puses 25 uois counting value reached Counting counting value Reset pulses input Clear to0 F5 00 to F5 05 Fb 08 Set counting value 7 9 Set counting value reached After the set counting Reset value is reached set Counting reset F4 00 to F4 09 26 Counting reset the DO terminal to 1 i 4 00 12 Counting value 1 123 10 11 12 19 20 21 2 Counting reset input i U0 12 0 Designated counting Fb 09 11 value reached output 00 12 11 i Fb 08 20 Set counting value reached output 00 12 20 Note FB 09 Designated count value must not be greater than FB 08 Set count value DI5 must be used when the pulse frequency is high The DO terminal that is allocated with function 9 Designated count value reached and the DO terminal that is allocated with function 8 Set count value reached must not be the same In the RUN STOP state of the AC drive the counter will not stop until Set count value is reached The count value is retentive at power failure An automatic stop system can be implemented if the signal output by the DO terminal with the function Count value reached
264. nvalid FD 04 Communication timeout D jeep os 0 0s Valid for Modbus PROFIBUS DP and CANopen Unit s digit Modbus protocol 0 Non standard Modbus protocol 1 Standard Modbus protocol Modbus protocol selection Ns PROFIBUS DP date FD 05 PROFIBUS DP data 30 format 0 PPO1 format 1 PPO2 format 2 PPO3 format 3 5 format m te laa o gt FD 08 22 Group FE User defined Parameters FE 00 User defined function code 0 F0 10 FE 01 User defined function code 1 F0 02 FE 02 User defined function code 2 F0 03 FE 03 User defined function code F0 07 FE 04 User defined function code 4 F0 08 FE 05 User defined function code 5 F0 17 FE 06 User defined function code 6 F0 00 to FP xx F0 18 FE 07 User defined function code 7 0 00 to Ax xx F3 00 FE 08 User defined function code 8 90 to 00 01 FE 09 User defined function code 9 4 00 FE 10 User defined function code 10 F4 01 FE 11 User defined function code 11 F4 02 FE 12 User defined function code 12 F5 04 FE 13 User defined function code 13 F5 07 FE 14 User defined function code 14 F6 00 E Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property FE 15 User defined function code 15 F6 10 FE 16 User defined function cod
265. o auto tuning 1 Asynchronous motor static auto tuning 2 Asynchronous motor complete F1 37 Auto tuning selection auto tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning Group F2 Vector Control Parameters F2 00 Speed loop proportional gain 1 0 100 30 F2 01 Speed loop integral time 1 0 01 10 00s 0 50s F2 02 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to F2 05 5 00 Hz F2 03 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0 100 20 F2 04 Speed loop integral time 2 0 01 10 005 1 00s F2 05 Switchover frequency 2 12 10 00Hz requency F2 06 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 2 07 Time constant of speed loop 0 000 0 100s 0 000s e filter F2 08 Vector control over 0 200 64 X excitation gain 0 F2 10 1 AM imi 2 2 2 09 Torque upper limit source 0 speed control mode 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting Digital setting of torque F2 10 limit in speed control 0 0 200 0 150 096 mode 85 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Ble Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property pog 020000 2000 proportional gain 2 44 Excitation adjustment 0 20000 1300 integral gain pos e He adjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain F2 16 Torque adjustment integral 0 20000 1300 gain Unit s digit integral separation 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled F2 17 Speed loop integral property
266. of the AC drive control circuit Braking resistor MCCB Single phase 9 Mu PB i 50 60 Hz dS 12 op 24V Interface for the external P DM HL J7 operation panel 5 PG card 02 012 J3 interface o Extension DB o 2 J12 interface DA US AO1 Highspeed __ 015 HEN GND j 0 10 0 20 mA Fpulse input FM n lt 1 Power supply for High speed 40v Setting M COM ign Open collector output 10 V 10 mA DO1 Open 0 24 V 0 50 mA Y 0 10 VDC r1 rm collector 2 1 5 gAn bag 0 10 004 20 mA lap 18 NIS MI Fault contact oH pe output i T B 250VAC 10 mAto 3A T A 30VDC 10mAto 1A PE connect to the house Note All MD380 series AC drives have the same wiring mode The figure here shows the wiring of single phase 220 VAC drive O indicates main circuit terminal while O indicates control circuit terminal When the external operation panel is connected the display of the operation panel on the MD380 goes off Description of Wiring of Signal Terminals 1 Wiring of Al terminals Weak analog voltage signals are easy to suffer external interference and therefore the shielded
267. of the manual Contact our agents or customer service center if you have problems during the use Introduction MD380 User Manual Introduction Compared with MD320 the MD380 series AC drive incorporates the following improvements 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Multiple voltage classes It provides coverage of single phase 220 V three phase 220 V three phase 380 V three phase 480 V three phase 690 V and three phase 1 140 V Control of asynchronous motor and PMSM It supports vector control of three phase AC asynchronous motor and three phase AC PMSM Diversified control modes It supports three control modes namely sensorless flux vector control SFVC closed loop vector control CLVC and V F control Multiple communication protocols It supports communication via Modbus RTU PROFIBUS DP CANlink and CANopen Multiple encoder types It supports various encoders such as differential encoder open collector encoder resolver and UVW encoder All new SFVC algorithm It introduces an all new sensorless flux vector control SFVC algorithm that gives better low speed stability enhanced low frequency loading capacity and supports torque control User programmable function The MD38PC1 programmable card enables you to write programs in ladder diagram Its programming environment is compatible with that of the H1U series PLC Advanced background software The background monitoring softw
268. oltage range The AC drive must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this manual Otherwise the AC drive s components may be damaged If required use a corresponding voltage step up or step down device Prohibition of three phase input changed into two phase input Do not change the three phase input of the AC drive into two phase input Otherwise a fault will result or the AC drive will be damaged 14 MD380 User Manual Safety Information and Precautions 12 13 14 15 16 Surge suppressor The AC drive has a built in voltage dependent resistor VDR for suppressing the surge voltage generated when the inductive loads electromagnetic contactor electromagnetic relay solenoid valve electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake around the AC drive are switched on or off If the inductive loads generate a very high surge voltage use a Surge suppressor for the inductive load or also use a diode Note Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the AC Altitude and de rating In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air it is necessary to de rate the AC drive Contact Inovance for technical support Some special usages If wiring that is not described in this manual such as common DC bus is applied contact the agent or Inovance for technical support Disposal The electrolytic capacitors on the main circ
269. on 0 Short with physical Dix internally 1 40 Refer to function selection of physical DO in group F5 A1 14 VDOA function selection 0 Short with physical Dix internally 1 40 Refer to function selection of physical DO in group F5 A1 15 VDO5 function selection 0 Short with physical Dix internally 1 40 Refer to function selection of physical DO in group F5 1 16 VDO1 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 17 VDO2 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 18 VDOS output delay 0 0 3600 0s 0 0s A1 19 VDO4 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 1 20 VDO5 output delay 0 0 3600 05 0 05 Me Xe XR A1 21 VDO state selection Unit s digit VDO1 0 Positive logic 1 Reverse logic Ten s digit VDO2 0 1 same as unit s digit Hundred s digit VDO3 00000 0 1 same as unit s digit Thousand s digit VDO4 0 1 same as unit s digit Ten thousand s digit VDO5 0 1 same as unit s digit 117 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Be Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Group A2 Motor 2 Parameters 0 Common asynchronous motor 1 Variable frequency A2 00 Motor type selection asynchronous motor 0 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor A2 01 Rated motor power 0 1 1000 0 kw M dependent Model A2 02 Rated m
270. on timing operation refer to F8 42 to F8 44 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 21 11 voltage before correction 0 00 10 57 V 0 00 10 57 V U0 22 AI2 voltage V current mA before correction 0 00 20 00 mA 00 23 voltage before correction 10 57 10 57 V 242 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes They display the Al sampleding voltage current value of Al The actually used voltage current is obtained after linear correction to reduce the deviation between the sampled voltage current and the actual input voltage current For actual corrected voltage see 00 09 U0 10 and 90 11 Refer to group AC for the correction mode Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 24 Linear speed 0 65535 m min It displays the linear speed of the DI5 high speed pulse sampling The unit is meter minute The linear speed is obtained according to the actual number of pulses sampled per minute and FB 07 Number of pulses per meter Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 27 Pulse input frequency 0 65535 Hz It displays the DI5 high speed pulse sampling frequency in minimum unit of 1 Hz It is the same as 00 18 except for the difference in units Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 28 Communication setting value 100 00 100 00 It displays the data written by means of the communication address 0x1000 Functi
271. on 41 Motor selection terminal 1 0 42 Motor selection terminal 2 43 PID parameter switchover 44 User defined fault 1 45 User defined fault 2 F4 08 DI9 function selection 46 Speed control Torque control 0 switchover 47 Emergency stop 48 External STOP terminal 2 49 Deceleration DC braking F4 09 DI40 function selection 50 Clear the current running time 0 x 51 Switchover between two line mode and three line mode 52 59 Reserved F4 10 DI filter time 0 000 1 000s 0 010s 0 Two line mode 1 i 1 Two line mode 2 F4 11 Terminal command mode 0 2 Three line mode 1 3 Three line mode 2 F4 12 Terminal UP DOWN rate 0 01 65 535 Hz s 1 00 Hz s F4 13 Al curve 1 minimum input 0 00 V to F4 15 0 00 V 89 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property F4 14 Corresponding setting of Al 56 100 0 0 0 curve 1 minimum input F4 15 Al curve 1 maximum input F4 13 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 16 Co responding setting of AI 0 100 0 100 0 curve 1 maximum input F4 17 1 filter time 0 00 10 005 0 105 F4 18 Al curve 2 minimum input 0 00 V to F4 20 0 00 V F4 19 setting of Al _100 00 100 0 0 0 curve 2 minimum input F4 20 Al curve 2 maximum input F4 18 to 10 00 V 10 00 V 21 setting of Al _100 00 10
272. on Code Parameter Name Display Range 320 00 320 00 Hz 3200 0 3200 0 Hz U0 29 Encoder feedback speed It displays the motor running frequency measured by the encoder If 22 Frequency reference resolution is 1 the display range is 3200 0 3200 0 Hz If 22 Frequency reference resolution is 2 the display range is 320 00 320 00 Hz Function Code Name Display Range 0 00 320 00 Hz U0 30 Main frequency X 0 0 3200 0 Hz It displays the setting of main frequency X If F0 22 Frequency reference resolution is 1 the display range is 3200 0 3200 0 Hz If 22 Frequency reference resolution is 2 the display range is 320 00 320 00 Hz Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 0 00 320 00 2 00 31 Auxiliary frequency 0 0 3200 0 Hz It displays the setting of auxiliary frequency Y 243 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual If F0 22 frequency reference resolution is 1 the display range is 3200 0 3200 0 Hz If F0 22 frequency reference resolution is 2 the display range is 320 00 320 00 Hz Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 33 Synchronous motor rotor position 0 0 359 9 It displays the rotor position of the synchronous motor Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 34 Motor temperature 0 200 C It displays the motor temperature obtained by means of AI3 sampling
273. on of PID in group FA 8 Communication setting The output voltage is set by the host computer by means of communication The voltage source for V F separation is set in the same way as the frequency source For details see F0 03 100 0 of the setting in each mode corresponds to the rated motor voltage If the corresponding value is negative its absolute value is used Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 15 Voltage rise time of V F separation 0 0 1000 05 0 05 16 Voltage decline time of V F separation 0 0 1000 05 0 05 F3 15 indicates the time required for the output voltage to rise from 0 V to the rated motor voltage shown as t1 in the following figure F3 16 indicates the time required for the output voltage to decline from the rated motor voltage to 0 V shown as t2 in the following figure Figure 6 6 Voltage of V F separation Output voltage Rated motor voltage 777777 777 Target voltage Actual voltage 1 rising time Actual voltage declining time gt E let 12 Set voltage rising time Set voltage declining time 160 MD380 User Manual Group F4 Input Terminals Description of Function Codes The MD380 provides five DI terminals DI5 can be used for high speed pulse input and two analog input terminals The optional extension card provides another five DI terminals DI6 to 0110 and an A
274. onal 1 65535 RPM Model speed dependent A2 06 Stator resistance 0 001 65 535 drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q drive power gt 55 kW dependent A2 07 Rotor resistance 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent Leakage inductive 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power lt 55 kW Model A2 08 reactance 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive power gt 55 dependent asynchronous motor kW Mutual 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power lt 55 kW A2 09 reactance gt 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent asynchronous motor A2 10 No load current 0 01 A to A2 03 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 1 A to A2 03 AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent A2 16 Stator resistance 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q drive power gt 55 kW dependent m Shaft D inductance 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor wo mH AC drive power gt 55 dependent ys Shaft Q inductance 0 01 655 35 mH AC power lt 55 kW Model synchronous motor wo mH AC drive power gt 55 dependent aao 0 1 6553 5 V vogel synchronous motor dependent Asz Encoder pulses Der 65535 1024 revolution 0 ABZ incremental encoder 1 UVW incremental encoder A2 28 Encoder type 2 Resolver 0 3 SIN CO
275. or current if the load remains at this value for 60 minutes the AC drive reports motor overload fault Set F9 01 properly based on the actual overload capacity If the value of F9 01 is set too large damage to the motor may result because the motor overheats but the AC drive does not report the alarm Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 02 Motor overload warning coefficient 50 100 80 This function is used to give a warning signal to the control system via DO before motor overload protection This parameter is used to determine the percentage at which pre warning is performed before motor overload The larger the value is the less advanced the pre warning will be When the accumulative output current of the AC drive is greater than the value of the overload inverse time lag curve multiplied by F9 02 the DO terminal on the AC drive allocated with function 6 Motor overload pre warning becomes ON Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 03 Overvoltage stall gain 0 no stall overvoltage 100 0 F9 04 Overvoltage stall protective voltage 120 150 13096 When the DC bus voltage exceeds the value of F9 04 Overvoltage stall protective voltage during deceleration of the AC drive the AC drive stops deceleration and keeps the present running frequency After the bus voltage declines the AC drive continues to decelerate F9 03 Overvoltage stall gain is use
276. orward Set the parameters according to the preceding figure In stop state of the AC drive hold down lt and the AC drive starts JOG running After you release the AC drive decelerates to stop To perform reverse JOG set F7 01 to 4 and F8 13 to 1 Hold down drive starts reverse JOG running and the AC 59 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting and Operation of JOG Running in DI Terminal Control For equipment that requires frequent JOG operations such as textile machine it is more convenient to control JOG running by using keys or buttons To achieve convenient control perform the setting according to the following figure Figure 4 16 JOG running in DI terminal control Function Setting JOG control Terminal value value Parameter setting Terminal button 5n control Stop state DI2 Forward DI3 Forward en M JOG JOG F8 00 JOG running frequency Forward Rjoc 5 Reverse pis Reverse F8 01 JOG acceleration time FO 0 JOG Nace ue JoG JOG 8 02 JOG deceleration time COM F8 13 1 After performing the setting according to the preceding figure press the FJOG button in stop state of the AC drive Then the AC drive starts forward JOG After you press the FJOG button ag
277. ote Modifying this parameter will make the displayed decimal places change and corresponding acceleration deceleration time also change Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum source for X Y operation frequency F0 10 0 00 Hz This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is set to X and Y operation The final frequency is obtained by adding the frequency offset set in this parameter to the X and Y operation result 145 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 1 0 1 Hz F0 22 Frequency reference resolution 2 2 0 01 Hz It is used to set the resolution of all frequency related parameters If the resolution is 0 1 Hz the MD380 can output up to 3200 Hz If the resolution is 0 01 Hz the MD380 can output up to 600 00 Hz Note Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency related parameters change and corresponding frequency values change This parameter is not resumed when factory setting is resumed Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F0 23 Retentive of digital setting 0 Not retentive frequency upon power failure 1 Retentive This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting If F0 23 is set to 0
278. otor before startup to improve the responsiveness Startup DC braking is valid only for direct start F6 00 0 In this case the AC drive performs DC braking at the set startup DC braking current After the startup DC braking time the AC drive starts to run If the startup DC braking time is 0 the AC drive starts directly without DC braking The larger the startup DC braking current is the larger the braking force is If the startup mode is pre excited start F6 00 3 the AC drive builds magnetic field based on the set pre excited current After the pre excited time the AC drive starts to run If the pre excited time is 0 the AC drive starts directly without pre excitation The startup DC braking current or pre excited current is a percentage relative to the base value If the rated motor current is less than or equal to 80 of the rated AC drive current the base value is the rated motor current If the rated motor current is greater than 80 of the rated drive current the base value is 80 of the rated AC drive current Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Linear acceleration deceleration F6 07 1 S curve acceleration deceleration 0 Deceleration mode 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B It is used to set the frequency change mode during the AC drive start and stop process 0 Linear acceleration deceleration The output frequency increases or decreases in linea
279. otor voltage 1 2000 V dependent 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW A2 03 Rated motor current 0 1 6553 5 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW A2 04 Rated motor frequenc 0 01 Hz to maximum frequenc Model 4 y 4 y dependent A2 05 Rated motor rotational 165535 RPM Model speed dependent 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A2 06 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Rotor resistance lt 55 kW Model A2 07 asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power Leakage inductive reactance 5 55 kW Model A2 08 y asynchronous motor 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive dependent power 55 kW 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power Mutual inductive reactance lt 55 kW Model A2 09 asynchronous motor 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power dependent gt 55 kW 0 01 A to A2 03 AC drive power No load current lt 55 kW Model A2 10 asynchronous motor 0 1 A to A2 03 AC drive power gt dependent 55 kW 0 001 65 535 AC drive power Stator resistance lt 55 kW Model A2 16 synchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive dependent power gt 55 kW 118 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 0 01
280. ou can set the auxiliary frequency to be relative to either maximum frequency or main frequency X If relative to main frequency X the setting range of the auxiliary frequency Y varies according to the main frequency X 140 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Unit s digit Frequency source selection 0 Main frequency source X 1 X and Y operation operation relationship determined by ten s digit 2 Switchover between X and Y 3 Switchover between X and X and Y Frequency source operation F0 07 selection 4 Switchover between Y and X and Y operation Ten s digit X and Y operation relationship 0 X Y 1 X Y 2 Maximum 3 Minimum Default It is used to select the frequency setting channel If the frequency source involves X and Y operation you can set the frequency offset in F0 21 for superposition to the X and Y operation result flexibly satisfying various requirements Figure 6 1 Frequency setting based on main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y Frequency Frequency source X and Setting of operation Target running opsrailanselecton conditions ___ _ frequency F0 07 unit s digit M Main frequency source X ME F0 07 ten s L i i2 1 L digit i3 10 B i Auxiliary
281. output frequency of the MD380 can reach up to 3200 Hz To take both frequency reference resolution and frequency input range into consideration you can set the number of decimal places for frequency reference in F0 22 If 22 is set to 1 the frequency reference resolution is 0 1 Hz In this case the setting range of F0 10 is 50 0 to 3200 0 Hz If F0 22 is set to 2 the frequency reference resolution is 0 01 Hz In this case the setting range of F0 10 is 50 00 to 320 00 Hz Note After the value of F0 22 is modified the frequency resolution of all frequency related function codes change accordingly 142 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Set by F0 12 1 AM 2 12 F0 11 Source of frequency upper limit 3 AI3 0 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting It is used to set the source of the frequency upper limit including digital setting 0 12 Al pulse setting or communication setting If the frequency upper limit is set by means of Al1 Al2 DI5 or communication the setting is similar to that of the main frequency source X For details see the description of F0 03 For example to avoid runaway in torque control mode in winding application you can set the frequency upper limit by means of analog input When the AC drive reaches the upper limit it will continue to run at this speed
282. output is used as the running frequency and it is expected that the output is 8 V when the frequency is 0 and 3 V at the maximum frequency the gain shall be set to 0 50 and the zero offset shall be set to 8096 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F5 17 FMR output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 F5 18 Relay 1 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 5 19 Relay 2 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 5 20 DO1 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 5 21 DO2 output delay time 0 0 3600 05 0 05 These parameters used to set the delay time of output terminals FMR relay 1 relay 2 DO1 002 from status change to actual output Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit FMR valid mode 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Ten s digit Relay 1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR F5 22 mode Hundred s digit Relay 2 valid mode 00000 0 1 same as FMR Thousand s digit DO1 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR Ten thousand s digit DO2 valid mode 0 1 same as FMR 176 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes It is used to set the logic of output terminals FMR relay 1 relay 2 DO1 and DC2 0 Positive logic The output terminal is valid when being connected with COM and invalid when being disconnected from COM 1 Positive logic The output terminal is invalid when being connected with COM
283. ovides three DO terminals namely FM DO1 and TA TB TC FM and DO1 are transistor outputs and can drive 24 VDC low voltage circuit TA TB TC is relay output and can drive 250 VAC control circuit You can obtain another two terminals 002 and PA PB PC by installing an I O extension card DO2 is transistor output and PA PB PC is relay output You can define the function of the DO terminals by setting F5 01 and F5 05 to indicate the running state and alarm information of the AC drive There are a total of 40 functions For details see the descriptions of group F5 Terminal Corresponding Function Code Output Feature Description ee Transistor able to output high speed pulses 10 Hz Men to 100 kHz drive capacity 24 VDC 50 mA F5 01 when 5 00 1 Transistor drive capacity 24 VDC 50 mA TA TB TC F5 02 Relay drive capacity 250 VAC 3 A PA PB PC F5 03 Extension card relay drive capacity 250 VAC 3 A DO1 CME F5 04 Transistor drive capacity 24 VDC 50 mA DO2 CME F5 05 card transistor drive capacity 24 VDC When F5 00 0 the FM terminal is high speed pulse output The frequency of output pulses indicates the value of the internal running parameters The greater the value is the higher the output pulse frequency is The 100 value corresponds to 100 kHz The property of the indicated internal parameter is defined by F5 06 4 12 Use of Al Terminals The AC drive supports a total of thr
284. p A2 to A4 Motor 2 to Motor 4 Parameters The MD380 can switch over the running among four motors For the four motors you can Set motor nameplate parameters respectively Perform motor parameter auto tuning respectively Select V F control or vector control respectively Set encoder related parameters respectively Set parameters related to V F control vector control independently Groups A2 A3 and A4 respectively correspond to motor 2 motor 3 and motor 4 The parameters of the three groups are the same Here we just list the parameters of group A2 for reference All parameters in group A2 have the same definition and usage as parameters of motor 1 For more details refer to the descriptions of motor 1 parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Common asynchronous motor A2 00 Motor type selection 1 Variable frequency asynchronous motor 0 2 Permanent magnetic synchronous motor 228 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A2 01 Rated motor power 0 1 1000 0 kW Model dependent A2 02 Rated motor voltage 1 2000 V Model dependent 0 01 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW A2 03 Rated motor current 2 Model 0 1 6553 5 A AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent A2 04 Rated 0 01 Hz to maximum frequency Mogel frequency dependent A2 05 Rated motor rotati
285. p FC Multi Reference and Simple PLC Function The MD380 multi reference has many functions Besides multi speed it can be used as the setting source of the V F separated voltage source and setting source of process PID In addition the multi reference is relative value The simple PLC function is different from the MD380 user programmable function Simple PLC can only complete simple combination of multi reference while the user programmable function is more practical For details see the descriptions of group A7 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FC 00 Reference 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 01 Reference 1 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 02 Reference 2 100 0 100 0 0 0 03 Reference 3 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 04 Reference 4 100 0 100 0 0 0 05 Reference 5 100 0 100 0 0 0 06 Reference 6 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 07 Reference 7 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 08 Reference 8 100 0 100 0 0 0 09 Reference 9 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 10 Reference 10 100 0 100 0 0 0 11 Reference 11 100 0 100 0 0 0 12 Reference 12 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 13 Reference 13 100 0 100 0 0 0 14 Reference 14 100 0 100 0 0 0 15 Reference 15 100 0 100 0 0 0 Multi reference be the setting source of frequency separated voltage and process PID The multi reference is relative value and ranges from 100 0 to 100 0 As frequency source
286. p UO is used to monitor the AC drive s running state You can view the parameter values by using operation panel convenient for on site commissioning or from the host computer by means of communication address 0x7000 0x7044 00 00 to 00 31 are the monitoring parameters in the running and stop state defined by F7 03 and F7 04 For more details see Table 6 1 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 00 Running frequency 0 00 320 00 Hz F0 22 2 00 01 Set frequency 0 00 3200 0 Hz F0 22 1 These two parameters display the absolute value of theoretical running frequency and set frequency For the actual output frequency of the AC drive see 00 19 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 02 Bus voltage 0 0 3000 0 V It displays the AC drive s bus voltage 240 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 03 Output voltage 0 1140 V It displays the AC drive s output voltage in the running state Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 04 Output current 0 00 655 35 A AC drive power lt 55 kW 0 0 6553 5 A AC drive power 55 kW It displays the AC drive s output current in the running state Function Code Name Display Range 00 05 Output power 0 32767 It displays the AC drive s output powe
287. put reaches the limit 0 Continue integral operation 1 Stop integral operation Detection value of 0 096 Not judging feedback loss FA 26 0 096 PID feedback loss 0 1 100 0 Detection time of FA 27 0 0 20 0s 0 0s PID feedback loss 0 No PID operation at stop FA 28 PID operation at stop 0 1 PID operation at stop Group FB Swing Frequency Fixed Length and Count 0 Relative to the central Fp oo SWing frequency setting frequency 0 mode 1 Relative to the maximum frequency FB 01 Swing frequency amplitude 0 0 100 0 0 096 02 Jump frequency amplitude 0 0 50 0 0 0 FB 03 Swing frequency cycle 0 0 3000 05 10 05 04 wave rising time 0 oor 100 0 50 0 FB 05 Set length 0 65535 m 1000 m FB 06 Actual length 0 65535 m 07 Number of pulses per meter 0 1 6553 5 100 0 FB 08 Set count value 1 65535 1000 09 Designated count value 1 65535 1000 Group Multi Reference and Simple PLC Function FC 00 Reference 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 01 Reference 1 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 02 Reference 2 100 0 100 0 0 0 03 Reference 3 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 04 Reference 4 100 0 100 0 0 0 108 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table ala Parameter Name Setting Range Default Proper
288. quency reaching F8 32 detection value 2 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 50 00 Hz mE F8 33 Any frequency reaching 0 0 100 0 maximum 0 0 detection amplitude 2 frequency of 0 F8 34 2 current detection level 002o 300 0 rated moton 5 0 35 2670 current detection delay 10 oo 400 005 0 105 0 0 no detection F8 36 Output overcurrent threshold 0 1 300 0 rated motor 200 096 Ww current F8 37 Output overcurrent detection 0 00 600 00s 0 00s X delay time ME 0 F8 38 Any current reaching 1 9 0 200 0 Aoi moto 100 096 i of 0 F8 39 Any current reaching 1 0 0 300 0 rated motor 0 0 amplitude current AME 0 F8 40 Any current reaching 2 ratedimiotor 100 0 current i of 0 F8 41 Any current reaching 2 0 0 300 0 rated motor 0 0 o A 0 Disabled F8 42 Timing function 0 1 Enabled 0 F8 44 1 Al1 F8 43 Timing duration source UNE 0 3 AI3 10096 of analog input corresponds to the value of F8 44 F8 44 Timing duration 0 0 6500 0 min 0 0 min F8 45 input voltage lower limit 0 00 V to F8 46 3 10 V F8 46 Al1 input voltage upper limit 8 45 to 10 00 V 6 80 V 100 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Ere Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property Module temperature 5 s F8 47 ihreshold 0 100 C
289. r complete A4 37 Auto tuning selection auto tuning 0 11 Synchronous motor with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning A4 38 Speed loop proportional gain 1 0 100 30 4 39 Speed loop integral time 1 0 01 10 005 0 505 4 40 Switchover frequency 1 0 00 to A2 43 5 00 Hz 4 41 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0 100 15 4 42 Speed loop integral time 2 0 01 10 005 1 00s A4 43 Switchover frequency 2 2 10 maximum output 10 00Hz x requency A4 44 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 A4 45 1 constant of speed loop 0 000 0 100s 0 000s 126 MD380 User Manual Function Code Table Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property 4 46 Vector control over 0 200 64 excitation gain 0 A2 48 1 AIT 2 12 imi 3 4 47 Torque upper limit source in 0 speed control mode 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Via communication 6 MIN AI1 AI2 T MIN AI1 AI2 Digital setting of torque 4 48 upper limit in speed control 0 0 200 0 150 096 mode pq e RUD acjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain NONIUS 0 20000 1300 integral gain Torque adjustment 0 20000 2000 proportional gain 4 54 a adjustment integral 0 20000 1300 X Unit s digit Integral separated A4 55 Speed loop integral property 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled 0 No field weakening 4 56 Field weakeni
290. r damage under normal use conditions If the equipment has been used for over 18 months reasonable repair expenses will be charged 3 Reasonable repair expenses will be charged for the damages due to the following causes Improper operation without following the instructions Fire flood or abnormal voltage Using the AC drive for non recommended function 4 The maintenance fee is charged according to Inovance s uniform standard If there is an agreement the agreement prevails 9 3 Faults and Solutions The MD380 provides a total of 24 pieces of fault information and protective functions After a fault occurs the AC drive implements the protection function and displays the fault code on the operation panel if the operation panel is available 287 Maintenance and Troubleshooting MD380 User Manual Before contacting Inovance for technical support you can first determine the fault type analyze the causes and perform troubleshooting according to the following tables If the fault cannot be rectified contact the agent or Inovance Err22 is the AC drive hardware overcurrent or overvoltage signal In most situations hardware overvoltage fault causes Err22 Figure 9 1 Solutions to the faults of the MD380 Fault Name Inverter unit Display Possible Causes 1 The output circuit is grounded or short circuited 2 The connecting cable of the motor is too long 3 The module overheats Solutions
291. r in the running state Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 06 Output torque 200 0 200 0 It displays the AC drive s output torque the running state Function Code U0 07 Parameter Name DI state Display Range 0 32767 It displays the current state of DI terminals After the value is converted into binary number each bit corresponds to a DI 1 indicates high level signal and indicates low level signal The corresponding relationship between bits and Dls is described in the following table BitO Bit Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5 Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 08 DO state 0 1023 It indicates the current state of DO terminals After the value is converted into a binary number each bit corresponds to a DO 1 indicates high level signal and 0 indicates low level signal The corresponding relationship between bits and DOs is described in the following table Table 6 15 Corresponding relationship between bits and DOs Bito Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 DO3 Relay 1 Relay 2 DO1 DO2 VDO1 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5 241 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual
292. r limit Default 0 00s 0 00s Function Code Parameter Name 0 07 0 08 Setting Range 0 00 65000s 0 00 65000s Acceleration time in torque control Deceleration time in torque control In torque control the difference between the motor output torque and the load torque determines the speed change rate of the motor and load The motor rotational speed may change quickly and this will result in noise or too large mechanical stress The setting of acceleration deceleration time in torque control makes the motor rotational speed change softly However in applications requiring rapid torque response set the acceleration deceleration time in torque control to 0 00s For example two AC drives are connected to drive the same load To balance the load allocation set one AC drive as master in speed control and the other as slave in torque control The slave receives the master s output torque as the torque command and must follow the master rapidly In this case the acceleration deceleration time of the slave in torque control is set to 0 05 Group 1 Virtual DI VDI Virtual DO VDO Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1 00 VDI1 function selection 0 59 0 A1 01 VDI2 function selection 0 59 0 1 02 VDIS function selection 0 59 0 224 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1 03 VDIA
293. r mode The MD380 provides four group of acceleration deceleration time which can be selected by using F4 00 to F4 08 1 S curve acceleration deceleration A The output frequency increases or decreases along the S curve This mode is generally used in the applications where start and stop processes are relatively smooth such as elevator and conveyor belt F6 08 and F6 09 respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment 2 S curve acceleration deceleration B In this curve the rated motor frequency 2 is always the inflexion point This mode is usually used in applications where acceleration deceleration is required at the speed higher than the rated frequency 179 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual When the set frequency is higher than the rated frequency the acceleration deceleration time is xdi SG OT In the formula is the set frequency J is the rated motor frequency and T is the acceleration time from 0 Hz to J Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6 08 0 0 to 100 0 F6 09 30 0 F6 09 0 ots cure 0 0 to 100 0 F6 08 30 0 These two parameters respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment of S curve acceleration deceleration They must satisfy the requirement F6 08 F6 09 lt 100 0 In Figure 6 12 t1 is the time defined in F6 08 within which the slope of t
294. rameter becomes active If it is set to 0 00 it indicates that the runaway prevention function is disabled If it is set to another value the system can effectively detects whether the slave is in the runaway state and performs efficient protection The recommended value range is 5 00 20 00 238 MD380 User Manual Group AC Al AO Correction Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default AC 00 Al1 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 01 Al1 displayed voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 02 Al1 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 03 Al1 displayed voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 04 AI2 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 05 Al2 displayed voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 06 12 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 07 AI2 displayed voltage 2 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 08 measured voltage 1 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 09 Al3 displayed voltage 1 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 10 measured voltage 2 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected AC 11 displayed voltage 2 9 999 10 000 V Factory corrected These parameters are used to correct the Al to eliminate the impact of Al zero offset and gain They have been corrected upon delivery When you resume the factory values these parameters will be restored to the fa
295. rameter display property Ten s digit User modified parameter display selection 0 Not display 1 Display Parameter 0 Modifiable FP 04 AA 0 modification property 1 Not modifiable Group AO Torque Control and Restricting Parameters Speed Torque 0 Speed control 0 00 0 control selection 1 Torque control 0 Digital setting A0 03 1 AI 2 AI2 3 1 ii 4 Pulse setting 015 A0 01 orque setting source in 5 0 de 6 Torque digital setting in MAX 11 AI2 Full range of values 1 7 corresponds to the digital setting of A0 03 0 03 200 0 200 0 150 0 torque control Forward maximum i 0 05 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 50 00 Hz frequency in torque control 0 10 Reverse maximum i 0 06 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 50 00 Hz frequency in torque control FO 10 0 07 Acceleration time in torque 0 00 65000s 0 00s control 0 08 Deceleration time torque 0 00 65000s 0 00s control Group 1 Virtual DI VDI Virtual DO VDO A1 00 VDI1 function selection 0 59 0 1 01 VDI2 function selection 0 59 0 A1 02 VDI3 function selection 0 59 0 A1 03 VDIA function selection 0 59 0 115 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Property A1 04 VDI5 function selection 0 59 0 A1 05 VDI state setting mode Unit s digit VDI1
296. ration see the descriptions of group F3 244 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 41 DI state visual display It displays the DI state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure Figure 6 34 Display format of the DI state AI2 VDISVDI3 011 019 017 015 DB DI disol _ LI LI LI ON fh evel OFF indicates low level AM VDI4 VDI2DMO DI8 DIE DM Function Code Parameter Name Display Range U0 42 DO state visual display It displays the DO state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure Figure 6 35 Display format of the DO state VDO2 _ Relay 2 DO2 DO state display 7 ON indicates high level 1 fr OFF indicates low level VDO1 Relay VDOS od DO1 y Function Code Parameter Name Display Range 00 43 DI function state visual display 1 It displays whether the DI functions 1 40 are valid The operation panel has five 7 segment LEDs and each 7 segment LED displays the selection of eight functions The 7 segment LED is defined in the following figure Figure 6 36 Definition of 7 segment LED a DI function state display e 7 ON indicates valid OFF indicates invalid 5 3 The 7 segment LED display functions 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 a
297. rd is selected and PZD1 data is valid commands are given by means of PZD1 data Ifa user programmable card is selected commands are written to A7 08 by means of the programmable card other card is selected commands are written by means of the communication address 0x2000 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting non retentive at power failure 1 Digital setting retentive at power failure AM 12 AI3 0 Pulse setting DI5 Multi reference Simple PLC PID Communication setting Main frequency source X selection 137 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual It is used to select the setting channel of the main frequency You can set the main frequency in the following 10 channels 0 Digital setting non retentive at power failure The initial value of the set frequency is the value of F0 08 Preset frequency You can change the set frequency by pressing Q and e on the operation panel or using the UP DOWN function of input terminals When the AC drive is powered on again after power failure the set frequency reverts to the value of F0 08 1 Digital setting retentive at power failure The initial value of the set frequency is the value of F0 08 Preset frequency You can change the set frequency by pressing keys on the operation panel or using the UP DOWN function of input terminals When the
298. re 75 4 15 Use of Serial Communication ren ben sre ri nae 75 4 16 Use of Multifunctional Extension 2 00000000 76 417 Password een 77 4 18 Parameter Saving and Default Setting 77 Chapter 5 Function Code Table o ee 80 5 Standard FUNCUOM Parameters 80 5 2 Monitoring Paramoelefs ten cerei ete emerit n ananassae 133 Chapter 6 Description of Function 136 Group FO Basic Parameters iren inttr iore Ee 136 Group F4 Motor 1 Pararieters ri non antee a cheese 148 Group E2 Vector Control Paramelets 2 dede and 152 Group F3 VIF Control Parameters ores au ek cA D Labeo OE 156 Group E4 Input Terminals 161 Group FS Output Terminals iiie ence E A AEEA 172 Group F6 Star Stop Control criterios eet brc tede Et 177 Group F7 Operation Panel and Display tpe tpe o eere 183 Group F8 Auxiliary Functions sessssssssssssesseeeeeeeeneneeen nennen ennt 187 Group F9 Fault and Protection sssssssssssssseseeeenene eene nnne nnne 198 Group FA Process Control PID Function ssssssssseeeeeeenenen nennen 207 Group FB Swing Frequency Fixed Length and
299. remote control and need to be installed in the final system The final system must have the required fireproof cover electrical protective cover and mechanical protective cover and satisfy the regional laws amp regulations and related IEC requirements Protective enclosure 3 1 2 Installation Clearance Requirements The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the MD380 as shown in the following figure Figure 3 1 Clearance around the MD380 for installation Hot air Installation clearance requirements on A the MD380 series AC drives of different ZA 222 power classes J 20 Power Class Clearance Requirements y 0 4 15 kW gt 10 gt 100 mm as 2 18 5 22 kW gt 10 B 2 200 mm 2 22 37 gt 50mm B2 200 mm MD380 37 630 kW gt 50 B2 300 mm 2 ZY 7 F 222 The AC drive shall be installed vertically upward Cold air 30 MD380 User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation The MD380 series AC drive dissipates heat from the bottom to the top When multiple AC drives are required to work together install them side by side For application installing multiple AC drives if one row of AC drives need to be installed above another row install an insulation guide plate to prevent AC drives in the lower row from heating t
300. requency 2 00 Hz F8 01 JOG acceleration time 0 0 6500 05 20 0s F8 02 JOG deceleration time 0 0 6500 0s 20 0s These parameters are used to define the set frequency and acceleration deceleration time of the AC drive when jogging The startup mode is Direct start F6 00 0 and the stop mode is Decelerate to stop F6 10 0 during jogging 187 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 03 Acceleration time 2 0 0 6500 05 Model dependent F8 04 Deceleration time 2 0 0 6500 05 Model dependent F8 05 Acceleration time 3 0 0 6500 05 Model dependent F8 06 Deceleration time 3 0 0 6500 05 Model dependent F8 07 Acceleration time 4 0 0 500 05 Model dependent F8 08 Deceleration time 4 0 0 6500 05 Model dependent The MD380 provides a total of four groups of acceleration deceleration time that is the preceding three groups and the group defined by F0 17 and FO 18 Definitions of four groups are completely the same You can switch over between the four groups of acceleration deceleration time through different state combinations of DI terminals For more details see the descriptions of F4 01 to F4 05 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 09 Jump frequency 1 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz F8 10 Jump frequency 2 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency 0 00 Hz F8 11 Frequency jump amplitude 0 00 Hz to maximum freque
301. requency and output voltage of the AC drive are independent The output frequency is determined by the frequency source and the output voltage is determined by Voltage source for V F separation F3 13 It is applicable to induction heating inverse power supply and torque motor control 11 V F half separation In this mode V and F are proportional and the proportional relationship can be set in F3 13 The relationship between V and F are also related to the rated motor voltage and rated motor frequency in Group F1 Assume that the voltage source input is X 0 to 100 the relationship between V and F is 2 2x X x Rated motor voltage Rated motor frequency 156 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 01 Torque boost 0 0 30 Mogel dependent F3 02 Cut off frequency of 0 00 Hz to maximum output 50 00 Hz torque boost frequency To compensate the low frequency torque characteristics of V F control you can boost the output voltage of the AC drive at low frequency by modifying F3 01 If the torque boost is set to too large the motor may overheat and the AC drive may suffer overcurrent If the load is large and the motor startup torque is insufficient increase the value of F3 01 If the load is small decrease the value of F3 01 If it is set to 0 0 the AC drive performs automatic torque boost In this case the AC drive automaticall
302. rge suppressor 2 Inputs Outputs main circuit of the AC drive contain harmonics which may interfere with the communication device connected to the AC drive Therefore install an anti interference filter to minimize the interference 3 For more details on peripheral devices refer to related selection manual 25 Product Information 2 4 2 Description of Optional Parts MD380 User Manual The optional parts include braking unit extension cards of different functions and external operation panel etc If any optional part is required specify it in your order Table 2 4 Optional parts of the MD380 programmable card series PLC Name Model Function Remark The models of single phase AC drive model 9 42 2 kW and three phase Internal braking unit is followed by 0 75 15 kW are installed with the optional for the models braking unit n letter B internal braking unit as standard of 18 5 30 kW configuration The MD380 AC drives of 37 kW and Multiple braking units External are connected above need to be configured with braking unit am extemal brakina Unit parallel for the models 9 of 75 kW above As an energy saving part it feeds Regenerative neg back the electricity of the AC drive unit to the AC mains Rectifying unit MDRU It is used in common bus and has energy saving function It can extend 5 Dis 1 Al A
303. rive If this function is enabled the AC drive s UVW will have voltage output a while after power on Function Code F9 09 Parameter Name Fault auto reset times Setting Range 0 20 Default 0 It is used to set the times of fault auto resets if this function is used After the value is exceeded the AC drive will remain in the fault state Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Not act F9 10 DO action during fault auto reset 0 function is selected It is used to decide whether the DO acts during the fault auto reset if the fault auto reset Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 11 Time interval of fault auto reset 0 1s 100 0s 1 0s It is used to set the waiting time from the alarm of the AC drive to fault auto reset 200 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit Input phase loss protection Input phase loss Ten s digit Contactor energizing 9 12 protection contactor protection 11 energizing protection selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled It is used to determine whether to perform input phase loss or contactor energizing protection The MD380 models that provide this function are listed in the following table Table 6 8 MD380 models providing the input phase loss or contactor energizin
304. rive continues to run Two groups of PID parameters can be switched over via terminals or can be automatically switched over according to deviation PID feedback loss detection The PID feedback loss value can be set to realize PID protection DI DO positive or negative logic You can set the DI DO positive or negative logic DI DO response delay You can set DI DO response delay time Power dip ride through It ensures that the AC drive continues to run for a short time when an instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage reduction occurs Timing operation The AC drive supports timing operation for 6500 minutes at maximum User programmable function The externally connected programmable card helps you to realize secondary development Load allocation Load allocation can be implemented between two MD380 series AC drives through point to point communication Introduction MD380 User Manual Product Checking Upon unpacking check Whether the nameplate model AC drive ratings are consistent with your order The box contains the AC drive certificate of conformity user manual and warranty card Whether the AC drive is damaged during transportation If you find any omission or damage contact Inovance or your supplier immediately First time Use For the users who use this product for the first time read the manual carefully If in doubt concerning some functions or
305. rly with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact Figure 7 2 Cabling diagram Power cable Power cable Min 200 90 ee Min 300mm 7 Motor cable Control cable MD380 AC drive Control cable 1 90 Min 500mm 2 Braking resistor cable Motor cable Control cable 20 Min 500 mm Power cable m Control cable 257 MD380 User Manual 7 5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems The AC drive generates very strong interference Although EMC measures are taken the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use When the AC drive interferes with other devices adopt the following solutions Interference Type Solution Connect the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive Leakage protection Connect the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains power supply switch tripping Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable Connect the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive Connect the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains voltage Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal cable with magnetic rings Connect the equipment to the common ground Connect the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive Connec
306. rminals of the MD380 size H 11 RIS T 62 olo f a lolo 45 37 ped p 4 Tholl ollol o ollolo o 1 1 T 45 1 M10 combination screw z C P MOTOR E Table 8 9 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size H Torque of Recommended Rated Input Output Power we AC Drive Model Torque Driver Cable Lug Current A Cable Diameter 2 N m Model mm MD380T110G 214 00 120 GTNR120 12 MD380T132G 256 00 120 GTNR120 12 MD380T160G 307 00 150 m GTNR150 12 MD380 5T110G 214 00 120 GTNR120 12 MD380 5T132G 256 00 120 GTNR120 12 MD380 5T160G 307 00 150 GTNR150 12 271 Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Figure 8 10 Dimensions of power terminals of the MD380 size 1 M16 combination scew Table 8 10 Recommended cable diameter and cable lug model size 1 Rated Input Recomimenet Torque of Output Power Recommended AC Drive Model Current Torque Driver Cable Diameter Cable Lug Model A N m mm2 MD
307. rrent AC Tod Three phase 380 V 50 60 Hz MD380T0 7GB 2 1 OCL 0005 EISC E1M4 MD380T1 5GB 3 8 OCL 0005 EISC E1M4 MD380T2 2GB 5 1 OCL 0007 EISC E1MO MD380T3 7GB 9 OCL 0010 EISC EM70 MD380T5 5GB 13 OCL 0015 EISC EM47 MD380T7 5GB 17 OCL 0020 EISC EM35 MD380T11GB 25 OCL 0030 EISC EM23 MD380T15GB 32 OCL 0040 EISC EM18 MD380T18 5G 37 OCL 0050 EISC EM14 MD380T22G 45 OCL 0060 EISC EM12 MD380T30G 60 OCL 0080 EISC E87U MD380T37G 75 OCL 0090 EISC E78U MD380T45G 91 OCL 0120 EISC E58U MD380T55G 112 OCL 0150 EISH E47U MD380T75G 150 OCL 0200 EISH E35U MD380T90G 176 OCL 0200 EISH E35U MD380T110G 210 OCL 0250 EISH E28U MD380T132G 253 OCL 0290 EISH E24U MD380T160G 304 OCL 0330 EISH E21U MD380T200G 377 OCL 0490 EISH E14U MD380T220G 426 OCL 0490 EISH E14U MD380T250G 465 OCL 0530 EISH E13U MD380T280G 520 OCL 0600 EISH E12U MD380T315G 585 OCL 0660 EISH E4U0 MD380T355G 650 OCL 0800 EISH E5U0 254 MD380 User Manual AC Drive Model Rated Output Current A AC Output Reactor Model Shanghai Eagtop MD380T400G 725 OCL 0800 EISH E5U0 Three phase 480 V 50 60 Hz MD380 5T0 7GB MD380 5T1 5GB MD380 5T2 2GB MD380 5T3 7GB MD380 5T5 5GB MD380 5T7 5GB MD380 5T 11GB MD380 5T 15GB MD380 5T 18 5G MD380 5T22G MD380 5T30G MD380 5T37G MD380 5T45G MD380 5T55G MD380 5T75G MD380 5T90G MD380 5T 110G MD380 5T 132G MD380 5T 160G MD
308. s RUN ON indicates that the AC drive is in the running state and OFF indicates that the AC drive is in the stop state LOCAL REMOT It indicates whether the AC drive is operated by means of operation panel terminals or communication OLOCAL REMOT OFF Operation panel control LOCAL REMOT Terminal control Q LOCAL REMOT blinking Communication control 46 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example FWD REV ON indicates reverse rotation and OFF indicates forward rotation TUNE TC When the indicator is ON it indicates torque control mode When the indicator is blinking slowly it indicates the auto tuning state When the indicator is blinking quickly it indicates the fault state Unit Indicators means that the indicator is ON and means that the indicator is OFF Hz s 0 Hz unit of frequency A unit of current V unit of voltage A RPM unit of rotational speed Hz A O RPM percentage Digital Display The 5 digit LED display is able to display the set frequency output frequency monitoring data and fault codes 4 1 2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel Table 4 1 Description of keys on the operation panel Key Name Function Programming Enter or exit Level menu Enter the menu interfaces level by level and confirm the Confirm parameter setting Increment Increa
309. s added before the function code For example F1 00 is displayed as uF 1 00 You modified parameters are grouped together convenient for on site troubleshooting In you modified parameter mode symbol c is added before the function code For example F1 00 is displayed as cF1 00 Function Code Name Setting Range Default mI 0 Modifiable FP 04 Parameter modification property 0 1 Not modifiable It is used to set whether the parameters are modifiable to avoid mal function If it is set to 0 all parameters are modifiable If it is set to 1 all parameters can only be viewed Group AO Torque Control and Restricting Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Speed control 0 00 Speed Torque control selection 0 1 Torque control It is used to select the AC drive s control mode speed control or torque control The MD380 provides DI terminals with two torque related functions function 29 Torque control prohibited and function 46 Speed control Torque control switchover The two DI terminals need to be used together with 0 00 to implement speed control torque control Switchover If the DI terminal allocated with function 46 Speed control Torque control switchover is OFF the control mode is determined by 0 00 If the DI terminal allocated with function 46 is ON the control mode is reverse to the value of A0 00 However if the DI terminal with fun
310. s have 16 state combinations corresponding to 16 reference values as listed in the following table Table 6 2 State combinations of the four multi reference terminals KA K2 Reference Setting EE OFF OFF OFF OFF Reference 0 FC 00 OFF OFF OFF ON Reference 1 FC 01 OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 2 FC 02 OFF OFF ON ON Reference 3 FC 03 OFF ON OFF OFF Reference 4 FC 04 OFF ON OFF ON Reference 5 FC 05 OFF ON ON OFF Reference 6 FC 06 OFF ON ON ON Reference 7 FC 07 ON OFF OFF OFF Reference 8 FC 08 ON OFF OFF ON Reference 9 FC 09 ON OFF ON OFF Reference 10 FC 10 ON OFF ON ON Reference 11 FC 11 ON ON OFF OFF Reference 12 FC 12 ON ON OFF ON Reference 13 FC 13 ON ON ON OFF Reference 14 FC 14 ON ON ON ON Reference 15 FC 15 164 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes If the frequency source is multi reference the value 100 of FC 00 to FC 15 corresponds to the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency Besides the multi speed function the multi reference can be also used as the PID setting Source or the voltage source for V F separation satisfying the requirement on switchover of different setting values Two terminals for acceleration deceleration time selection have four state combinations as listed in the following table Table 6 3 State combinations of two terminals for acceleration deceleration time selection Terminal 2
311. se data or function code Decrement Decrease data or function code Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running Shift state and select the digit to be modified when modifying parameters RUN Start the AC drive in the operation panel control mode 47 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual Name Function Stop the AC drive when it is in the running state and perform the Stop Reset reset operation when it is in the fault state The functions of this key are restricted in F7 02 Multifunction Perform function switchover such as quick switchover of command source or direction according to the setting of F7 01 Menu mode Perform switchover between menu modes according to the selection setting of FP 03 4 2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes The operation panel of the MD380 adopts three level menu The three level menu consists of function code group Level 1 function code Level II and function code setting value level III as shown in the following figure Figure 4 2 Operation procedure on the operation panel Status parameter Level menu _ If there is blinking digit E press default display Goleada naon A V D to modify the digit PRG F lt _ e M gt 50 00 Y UT PRG FO 03 _ENTER F0 04 ENTER function code Y Next func
312. setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator To achieve a faster system response increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation The recommended adjustment method is as follows If the factory setting cannot meet the requirements make proper adjustment Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot Note Improper PI parameter setting may cause too large speed overshoot and overvoltage fault may even occur when the overshoot drops Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 06 Vector control slip gain 50 200 100 For SFVC it is used to adjust speed stability accuracy of the motor When the motor with load runs at a very low speed increase the value of this parameter when the motor with load runs at a very large speed decrease the value of this parameter 153 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual For CLVC it is used to adjust the output current of the AC drive with same load Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 07 Time constant of speed loop filter 0 000 0 100s 0 000s In the vector control mode the output of the speed loop regulator is torque current reference This parameter is used to filter
313. t By with load auto tuning the AC drive obtains the initial position angle of the synchronous motor which is a necessary prerequisite of the motor s normal running Before the first use of the synchronous motor after installation motor auto tuning must be performed Set this parameter to 11 and press Then the AC drive starts with load auto tuning 12 Synchronous motor no load auto tuning If the synchronous motor can be disconnected from the load no load auto tuning is recommended which will achieve better running performance compared with with load auto tuning During the process of no load auto tuning the AC drive performs with load auto tuning first and then accelerates to 80 of the rated motor frequency within the acceleration time set in F0 17 The AC drive keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop within the deceleration time set in 18 Before performing no load auto tuning properly set the motor type motor nameplate parameters of F1 00 to F1 05 Encoder type F1 28 and Encoder pulses per revolution F1 27 and Number of pole pairs of resolver F 1 34 first The AC drive will obtain motor parameters of F1 16 to F1 20 encoder related parameters of F1 30 to F1 33 and vector control current loop PI parameters of F2 13 to F2 16 by no load auto tuning Set this parameter to 12 and press Then the AC drive starts no load auto tuning Note Motor auto tuning can be p
314. t and capacitive current of the cable If the motor cable is over 100 meters long an output filter or reactor is required It is recommended that all control cables be shielded It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the AC drive the cable shield must be well grounded For devices suffering from interference shielded twisted pair STP cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield must be well grounded 7 4 2 Cabling Requirements 1 2 The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables The motor cables of several AC drives can be laid side by side It is recommended that the motor cables power input cables and control cables be laid in different ducts To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the output voltage of the AC drive the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side by side for a long distance If the control cable must run across the power cable make sure they are arranged at an angle of close to 90 Other cables must not run across the AC drive The power input and output cables of the AC drive and weak current signal cables such as control cable should be laid vertically if possible rather than in parallel The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded Aluminium ducts can be used to improve electric potential The filter AC drive and motor should be connected to the system machinery or appliance prope
315. t loosen the fixed screws of the components especially During the screws with red mark installation Do not drop wire end or screw into the AC drive Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive N warnine Install the AC drive in places free of vibration and direct sunlight When two AC drives are laid in the same cabinet arrange the installation positions properly to ensure the cooling effect 10 MD380 User Manual Safety Information and Precautions Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions At wiring A DANGER Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the AC drive Failure to comply may result in a fire Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring Failure to comply may result in electric shock Tie the AC drive to ground properly by standard Failure to comply may result in electric shock A warnine Never connect the power cables to the output terminals U V W of the AC drive Pay attention to the marks of the wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals and Failure to comply may result in a fire Use wire sizes recommended in the manual Failure to compl
316. t signal it adjusts the output frequency and constitutes a feedback system to stabilize the controlled counter around the target value It is applied to process control such as flow control pressure control and temperature control The following figure shows the principle block diagram of PID control Figure 6 27 Principle block diagram of PID control Target PID output Feedback Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 FA 01 1 Al1 2 12 FA 00 PID setting source 3 AI3 0 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting 6 Multi reference FA 01 PID digital setting 0 0 100 0 50 0 00 is used to select the channel of target process PID setting PID setting is relative value and ranges from 0 0 to 100 0 The PID feedback is also a relative value The purpose of PID control is to make the PID setting and PID feedback equal 207 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 AM 1 AI2 2 AI3 3 11 12 FA 02 PID feedback source 4 Pulse setting DI5 0 5 Communication setting 6 AI AI2 7 11 AI2 8 MIN AI1 AI2 This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID The PID feedback is a relative value and ranges from 0 096 to 100 096 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FA 03 PID action direction
317. t the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains voltage AC drive interference during running Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable with magnetic rings Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source and the load side Communication interference Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable Usea shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the cable shield to the common grounding point Enlarge the capacitance at the low speed DI A maximum of 0 11 uF capacitance is suggested Enlarge the capacitance at the Al A maximum of 0 22 uF is suggested I O interference 258 Selection and Dimensions Selection and Dimensions MD380 User Manual Chapter 8 Selection and Dimensions 8 1 Electrical Specifications of the MD380 Table 8 1 Models and technical data of the MD380 Power Input Output Adaptable Thermal Power Model Capacity Current A Current Motor Consumption kVA A kW HP kW Single phase 220 V 50 60 Hz MD380S0 4GB 1 5 4 2 3 0 4 0 5 0 016 MD380S0 7GB 1 5 8 2 0 75 0 030 MD38081 5GB 3 14 1 5 0 055 MD38082 2GB 4 23 9 6 2 2 0 072 Three phase 220 V 50 60 Hz MD380 2TO 4GB 1 5 3 4 2 1 0 4 0 5 0 016 MD380 2T0 75GB 5 3 8 0 75 1 0 030 MD380 2T1 5GB 5 8 5 1 1 5 2 0 055 MD380 2T2 2GB 5 9 10 5 9 2 2 3 0 072 MD380
318. tage are limited automatically during Overcurrent stall the running process so as to avoid frequent tripping due to control overvoltage overcurrent M It can limit the torque automatically and prevent frequent limitand over current tripping during the running process contro Torque control can be implemented in the CLVC mode Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor are High performance implemented through the high performance current vector control technology m The load feedback energy compensates the voltage Power dip ride reduction so that the AC drive can continue to run for a Individualized through short time functions Rapid current limit It helps to avoid frequent overcurrent faults of the AC drive Virtual I Os Five groups of virtual DI Dos can realize simple logic control Timing control Time range 0 0 6500 0 minutes 21 Product Information MD380 User Manual Item Specifications Multi motor Four motors can be switched over via four groups of motor switchover parameters 240 It supports communication via Modbus RTU PROFIBUS DP CANlink and CANopen protocols Mator overheat The optional I O extension card enables Al3 to receive the motor temperature sensor input PT100 1000 so as to protection realize motor overheat protection Individualized F Kedi J functions t supports various encoders such as
319. tall the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage sensitive resistor on the output side of the AC drive because the output of the AC drive is PWM wave Otherwise the AC drive may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged AC drive UIVWI 9 Contactor at the I O terminal of the AC drive X Capacitor or voltage sensitive resistor When a contactor is installed between the input side of the AC drive and the power supply the AC drive must not be started or stopped by switching the contactor on or off If the AC drive has to be operated by the contactor ensure that the time interval between switching is at least one hour since frequent charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the capacitor inside the AC drive When a contactor is installed between the output side of the AC drive and the motor do not turn off the contactor when the AC drive is active Otherwise modules inside the AC drive may be damaged Contactor KM or other switches Contactor KM 380 VAC 50 60 Hz 22 10 11 Do not start stop the AC drive by switching the contactor on off If the AC drive has to be operated by the contactor ensure that the time interval is at least one hour Turn on off the contactor when the AC drive has no output Otherwise modules inside the AC drive may be damaged When external voltage is out of rated v
320. te FA 28 1 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 53 Current running time reached 0 0 6500 0 min 0 0 min If the current running time reaches the value set in this parameter the corresponding DO becomes ON indicating that the current running time is reached Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F8 54 Output power correction coefficient 0 00 200 0 100 0 When the output power U0 05 is not equal to the required value you can perform linear correction on output power by using this parameter 197 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Group F9 Fault and Protection Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F9 00 Mot load protecti lecti 2 1 otor overload protection selection 4 Enabled F9 01 Motor overload protection gain 0 20 10 00 1 00 F9 00 0 The motor overload protective function is disabled The motor is exposed to potential damage due to overheating A thermal relay is suggested to be installed between the AC drive and the motor F9 00 1 The AC drive judges whether the motor is overloaded according to the inverse time lag curve of the motor overload protection The inverse time lag curve of the motor overload protection is 22096 x F9 01 x rated motor current if the load remains at this value for one minute the AC drive reports motor overload fault or 150 x F9 01 x rated mot
321. tegral regulator is integral gain rather than integral time Note that too large current loop PI gain may lead to oscillation of the entire control loop Therefore when current oscillation or torque fluctuation is great manually decrease the proportional gain or integral gain here Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No field weakening F2 18 Field weakening made of 1 Direct calculation 1 synchronous motor 2 Automatic adjustment F2 19 Field weakening depth of 50 500 100 synchronous motor F2 20 Maximum field weakening current 1 300 50 2 21 Field weakening automatic 409550096 100 adjustment gain F2 22 Field weakening integral multiple 2 10 2 These parameters are used to set field weakening control for the synchronous motor If F2 18 is set to 0 field weakening control on the synchronous motor is disabled In this case the maximum rotational speed is related to the AC drive bus voltage If the motor s maximum rotational speed cannot meet the requirements enable the field weakening function to increase the speed The MD380 provides two field weakening modes direct calculation and automatic adjustment In direct calculation mode directly calculate the demagnetized current and manually adjust the demagnetized current by means of F2 19 The smaller the demagnetized current is the smaller the total output current is However the desired field weakening effect may
322. terminal AO2 a relay terminal relay 2 and a DO terminal DO2 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Pulse output FMP F5 00 FM terminal output mode 0 1 Switch signal output FMR The FM terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal It can be used for high speed pulse output FMP with maximum frequency of 50 kHz Refer to F5 06 for relevant functions of FMP It can also be used as open collector switch signal output FMR Function Code Parameter Name Default F5 01 FMR function open collector output terminal 0 F5 02 Relay function T A T B T C 2 F5 03 Extension card relay function P A P B P C 0 F5 04 function selection open collector output terminal 1 F5 05 Extension card DO2 function 4 These five parameters are used to select the functions of the five digital output terminals T A T B T C and P A P B P C are respectively the relays on the control board and the extension card The functions of the output terminals are described in the following table 172 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Table 6 5 Functions of output terminals Value Function Description 0 No output The terminal has no function When the drive is running and has output frequency Aave img can be zero the terminal becomes ON When the AC drive stops due to a fault the t
323. the braking resistor are effective only for the configured with the built in braking unit cable length of the braking resistor shall be less than 5 m Otherwise it may damage the AC drive External reactor connecting terminals P For the AC drive of 37 kW and above 220 V and 75 kW and above other voltage classes remove the jumper bar across terminals P and and install the reactor between the two terminals AC drive output terminals U V W The specification and installation method of external power cables must comply with the local safety regulations and related IEC standards Use copper conductors of a proper size as power cables according to the recommended values in section 8 3 capacitor or surge absorber cannot be connected to the output side of the AC drive Otherwise it may cause frequent AC drive fault or even damage the AC drive f the motor cable is too long electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact of distributed capacitance This will damage the motor insulation or generate higher leakage current causing the AC drive to trip in overcurrent protection If the motor cable is greater than 100 m long an AC output reactor must be installed close to the AC drive Terminal D PE This terminal must be reliably connected to the main earthing conductor Otherwise it may cause electric shock mal function or even damage to the AC drive 38 MD380 User
324. the motor rotate in the reverse direction as shown in the following figure Figure 4 26 Reversing the motor rotating direction Rotating Command source Set frequency direction setting Reverse control operation panel control 4 esm operation panel control gt ou enabled Forward Forward rotation nm rotation command terminal __ Reverse communication lt 0 0 rotation Reverse rotation command terminal communication If the command source is terminal control and reverse rotation is required use the default value 0 of F8 13 to enable reverse control According to the preceding figure when the running frequency of the AC drive is set by means of communication F0 03 9 and reverse control is enabled F8 13 0 the AC drive instructs the reverse direction if the set frequency Fs is a negative value If the give running command is reverse rotation or the set frequency is a negative value but reverse control is disabled F8 13 1 the AC drive will run at 0 Hz and has no output In some applications where reverse rotation is prohibited do not change the rotating direction by modifying the function codes because the function codes will be restored once the AC drive restores the default settings 4 8 10 Setting the Fixed Length Control Mode The MD380 has the fixed length control function The length pulses are sampled by the DI allocated with function 27 Lengt
325. the set frequency For details see the description of group A8 If PROFIBUS DP communication is valid and PZD1 is used for frequency setting data transmitted by PDZ1 is directly used as the frequency source The data format is 100 00 to 100 0096 100 corresponds to the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency In other conditions data is given by the host computer through the communication address 0x1000 The data format is 100 00 to 100 0096 100 0096 corresponds to the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency The MD380 supports four host computer communication protocols Modbus PROFIBUS DP CANopen and CANlink They cannot be used simultaneously If the communication mode is used a communication card must be installed The MD380 provides four optional communication cards and you can select one based on actual requirements If the communication protocol is Modbus PROFIBUS DP or CANopen the corresponding serial communication protocol needs to be selected based on the setting of F0 28 The CANlink protocol is always valid 139 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Digital setting non retentive at power failure 1 Digital setting retentive at power failure 2 AM Auxiliary 2 F0 04 frequency source 4 AI3 0 Y selection 5 Pulse setting DI5 6 Multi reference 7 Simple PLC 8 PID 9 Communication setting When used as an in
326. the torque references It need not be adjusted generally and can be increased in the case of large speed fluctuation In the case of motor oscillation decrease the value of this parameter properly If the value of this parameter is small the output torque of the AC drive may fluctuate greatly but the response is quick Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F2 08 Vector control over excitation gain 0 200 64 During deceleration of the AC drive over excitation control can restrain rise of the bus voltage to avoid the overvoltage fault The larger the over excitation gain is the better the restraining effect is Increase the over excitation gain if the AC drive is liable to overvoltage error during deceleration Too large over excitation gain however may lead to an increase in output current Therefore set this parameter to a proper value in actual applications Set the over excitation gain to 0 in applications of small inertia the bus voltage will not rise during deceleration or where there is a braking resistor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 F2 10 1 AM imi i 2 AI2 F2 09 Torque upper limit source in 0 speed control mode 3 AI3 4 Pulse setting DI5 5 Communication setting Digital setting of torque upper moe 0 0 200 0 150 0 limit speed control mode F2 10 In the speed control mode the maximum output torque of the AC drive is r
327. ting unrelated to A0 03 If zero offset of the slave is 0 0096 and the gain is 1 00 it means that the slave directly takes the output torque of the master as the target torque When the AC drive is a slave in point point communication and receives data for frequency setting 100 0096 of the received data corresponds to the value of F0 10 Maximum frequency For example to balance the load do the following settings Table 6 14 Settings for balancing the load Master Slave 0 00 0 Speed control 0 00 1 Torque control A8 00 1 Point point communication A8 00 1 Point point communication enabled enabled A8 01 0 Master in point point A8 01 1 Slave in point point communication communication A8 02 0 Data source from master being A8 03 0 Slave receiving data for torque setting output torque 0 01 Torque source in torque control set to communication setting Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A8 04 Zero offset of received data torque 100 00 100 00 0 00 8 05 Gain of received data torque 10 00 10 00 1 00 These two parameters are used to adjust data received from the master and define the torque reference relationship between the master and the slave 237 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual If b expresses the zero offset of received data expresses the gain and y expresses the actually used data Th
328. ting Range Default AC 12 AO1 target voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 14 AO 1 target voltage 2 6 000 999 V Factory corrected AC 15 AO measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 16 2 target voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 17 AO2 measured voltage 1 0 500 4 000 V Factory corrected AC 18 2 target voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 19 AO2 measured voltage 2 6 000 9 999 V Factory corrected AC 20 12 measured current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 21 AI2 sampling current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 22 AI2 measured current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 23 12 sampling current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 24 AO ideal current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 25 AO1 sampling current 1 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 26 AO1 ideal current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected AC 27 AO1 sampling current 2 0 000 20 000 mA Factory corrected These parameters are used to correct the AO They have been corrected upon delivery When you resume the factory values these parameters will be restored to the factory corrected values You need not perform correction in the applications Target voltage indicates the theoretical output voltage of the AC drive Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter Group UO Monitoring Parameters Grou
329. tion 0 100 Model suppression gain dependent 231 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Group A5 Control Optimization Parameters Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default A5 00 DPWM switchover frequency upper limit 0 00 15 00 Hz 12 00 Hz This parameter is valid only for V F control It is used to determine the wave modulation mode in V F control of asynchronous motor If the frequency is lower than the value of this parameter the waveform is 7 segment continuous modulation If the frequency is higher than the value of this parameter the waveform is 5 segment intermittent modulation The 7 segment continuous modulation causes more loss to switches of the AC drive but smaller current ripple The 5 segment intermittent modulation causes less loss to switches of the AC drive but larger current ripple This may lead to motor running instability at high frequency Do not modify this parameter generally For instability of V F control refer to parameter F3 11 For loss to AC drive and temperature rise refer to parameter F0 15 Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 Asynchronous modulation A5 01 PWM modulation mode 1 Synchronous modulation This parameter is valid only for V F control Synchronous modulation indicates that the carrier frequency varies linearly with the change of the output frequency ensuring that the ratio of carrier frequency to output
330. tion Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FE 00 User defined function code 0 1 PONG rote FE 01 User defined function code 1 Same as FE 00 F0 02 FE 02 User defined function code 2 Same as FE 00 F0 03 FE 03 User defined function code 3 Same as FE 00 F0 07 FE 04 User defined function code 4 Same as FE 00 F0 08 FE 05 User defined function code 5 Same as FE 00 F0 17 FE 06 User defined function code 6 Same as FE 00 F0 18 FE 07 User defined function code 7 Same as FE 00 F3 00 FE 08 User defined function code 8 Same as FE 00 F3 01 FE 09 User defined function code 9 Same as FE 00 F4 00 FE 10 User defined function code 10 Same as FE 00 F4 01 FE 11 User defined function code 11 Same as FE 00 F4 02 FE 12 User defined function code 12 Same as FE 00 F5 04 FE 13 User defined function code 13 Same as FE 00 F5 07 FE 14 User defined function code 14 Same as FE 00 F6 00 FE 15 User defined function code 15 Same as FE 00 F6 10 FE 16 User defined function code 16 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 17 User defined function code 17 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 18 User defined function code 18 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 19 User defined function code 19 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 20 User defined function code 20 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 21 User defined function code 21 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 22 User defined function code 22 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 23 User defined function code 23 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 24 User defined function code 24 Same as FE 00 F0 00 FE 25 User defined function code 25 Same
331. tion Y de ENTE e ENTER RP menu PRG Set the value of A E function codd Not to save To save the setting the setting You can return to Level Il menu from Level III menu by pressing After you press N the system saves the parameter setting first and then goes back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code After you press 3 5 the system does not save the parameter setting but directly returns to Level menu and remains at the current function code Here is an example of changing the value of F3 02 to 15 00 Hz Figure 4 3 Example of changing the parameter value PRG 5000 gt ro E IBN m ZN Tono F804 ff 0000 Hoo ke 010 0 JIN 48 MD380 User Manual Operation Display and Application Example In Level Ill menu if the parameter has no blinking digit it means that the parameter cannot be modified This may be because Such a function code is only readable such as AC drive model actually detected parameter and running record parameter Such a function code cannot be modified in the running state and can only be changed at stop 4 3 Structure of Function Codes The MD380 an advanced product based on MD320 groups A and U and new function codes to group F Function A Code Gro
332. tion deceleration time of simple hee PLC reference 2 dnd FC 24 Running time of simple PLC reference 3 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h FC 25 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 3 FC 26 Running time of simple PLC reference 4 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple PLC reference 4 FC 28 Running time of simple PLC reference 5 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple FC 27 0 3 0 ded PLC reference 5 1 0 30 Running time of simple PLC reference 6 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple FE PLC reference 6 0 2 0 32 Running time of simple PLC reference 7 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h 33 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 7 217 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default FC 34 Running time of simple PLC reference 8 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple duos PLC reference 8 152 9 FC 36 Running time of simple PLC reference 9 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h Acceleration deceleration time of simple FEST PLC reference 9 FC 38 Running time of simple PLC reference 10 0 0 6553 55 h 0 0s h FC 39 Acceleration deceleration time of simple 0 3 0 PLC reference 10 FC 40 Running time of simple PLC reference 11
333. tion will cause the aging of the devices in the AC drive which may cause potential faults or reduce the service life of the AC drive Therefore it is necessary to carry out routine and periodic maintenance Routine maintenance involves checking Whether the motor sounds abnormally during running Whether the motor vibrates excessively during running Whether the installation environment of the AC drive changes Whether the AC drive s cooling fan works normally Whether the AC drive overheats Routine cleaning involves Keep the drive clean all the time Remove the dust especially metal powder the surface of the AC drive to prevent the dust from entering the AC drive Clear the oil stain on the cooling fan of the AC drive 9 1 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection in places where inspection is difficult Periodic inspection involves Check and clean the air duct periodically Check whether the screws become loose Check whether the AC drive is corroded Check whether the wiring terminals show signs of arcing Main circuit insulation test Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter 500 VDC megameter recommended disconnect the main circuit from the AC drive Do not use the insulating resistance meter to test the insulation of the control circuit The high voltage test need not be performed again because it has been completed before delivery 286 MD380 User Manu
334. tional gain Kp1 0 0 100 0 20 0 06 Integral time Ti1 0 01 10 005 2 005 FA 07 Differential time Td1 0 00 10 000 0 0005 FA og Cutofffrequency of PID 00 to maximum frequency 2 00 Hz reverse rotation FA 09 PID deviation limit 0 0 100 0 0 0 FA 10 PID differential limit 0 00 100 00 0 10 11 setting change time 0 00 650 005 0 005 FA 12 PID feedback filter time 0 00 60 00s 0 00s FA 13 PID output filter time 0 00 60 00s 0 00s FA 14 Reserved FA 15 Proportional gain Kp2 0 0 100 0 20 0 FA 16 Integral time Ti2 0 01 10 005 2 005 FA 17 Differential time Td2 0 000 10 0005 0 0005 0 No switchover FA 18 PID parameter switchover 1 Switchover via DI 0 condition 2 Automatic switchover based on deviation 19 UID Parameter switchover 9 0 to FA 20 20 0 FA 20 ie switchover E 49 to 100 0 80 0 FA 21 PID initial value 0 0 100 0 0 0 FA 22 PID initial value holding time 0 00 650 00s 0 00s Maximum deviation between FA 23 two PID outputs in forward 0 00 100 00 1 0096 direction 107 Function Code Table MD380 User Manual Parameter Setting Range Default Property Maximum deviation between FA 24 two PID outputs in reverse 0 00 100 00 1 00 direction Unit s digit Integral separated 0 Invalid 1 Valid 25 PID integral property Ten s digit Whether to stop 00 integral operation when the out
335. tional speed dependent Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V F control or vector control is adopted To achieve better V F or vector control performance motor auto tuning is required The motor auto tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor nameplate parameters Function Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1 06 Stator resistance 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent F1 07 Rotor resistance 0 001 65 535 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 0001 6 5535 Q AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent Leakage inductive 4 64 555 35 mH drive power lt 55 kW F1 08 reactance p 7 0 001 65 535 mH AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent asynchronous motor 148 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Mutual inductive 1 09 reactance 0 1 6553 5 mH AC drive power x 55 kW Model 0 01 655 35 mH AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent asynchronous motor 1 10 No load current 0 01 to F1 03 AC drive power lt 55 kW Model asynchronous motor 0 1 to F1 03 AC drive power gt 55 kW dependent The parameters in F1 06 to F 10 are asynchronous motor parameters These parameters are unavailable on the motor nameplate
336. twork which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Category C1 AC drive Power Drive System PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V intended for use in the first environment Category C2 AC drive PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and when used in the first environment is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional Category C3 AC drive PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C4 AC drive PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V or rated current equal to or above 400 A or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment 7 2 Introduction to EMC Standard 7 2 1 EMC Standard The MD380 series AC drive satisfies the requirements of standard EN 61800 3 2004 Category C2 The AC drives are applied to both the first environment and the second environment 248 MD380 User Manual EMC 7 2 2 Installation Environment The system manufacturer using the AC drive is responsible for compliance of the system with the European EMC directive Based on the application of the system the integrator must ensure that the system complies with st
337. ty FC 05 Reference 5 100 0 100 0 0 0 06 Reference 6 100 0 100 0 0 0 07 Reference 7 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 08 Reference 8 100 0 100 0 0 0 09 Reference 9 100 0 100 0 0 0 10 Reference 10 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 11 Reference 11 100 0 100 0 0 0 12 Reference 12 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 13 Reference 13 100 0 100 0 0 0 14 Reference 14 100 0 100 0 0 0 FC 15 Reference 15 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 Stop after the AC drive runs one cycle FC 16 Simple PLC running mode 1 Keep values antene AC 0 drive runs one cycle 2 Repeat after the AC drive runs one cycle Unit s digit Retentive upon power failure 0 No FC 47 Simple PLC retentive 1 Yes 00 selection Ten s digit Retentive upon stop 0 No 1 Yes FC 48 Running time of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h 0 Acceleration deceleration time 19 of simple PLC reference 0 0 3 0 FC 20 Running time of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h de reference 1 Acceleration deceleration time Feed of simple PLC reference 1 0 3 0 FC 22 Running time of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h reference 2 Acceleration deceleration time 23 of simple PLC reference 2 0 3 0 24 Running time of simple PLC 0 0 6553 5s h 0 0s h reference 3 FC 25 Acceleration deceleration time 0 3 0 X of simple PLC reference 3 109 Function Code Table MD380 User M
338. uits and PCB may explode when they are burnt Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt Treat them as ordinary industrial waste Adaptable Motor The standard adaptable motor is adaptable four pole squirrel cage asynchronous induction motor or PMSM For other types of motor select a proper AC drive according to the rated motor current The cooling fan rotor shaft of non variable frequency motor coaxial which results in reduced cooling effect when the rotational speed declines If variable speed is required add a more powerful fan or replace it with variable frequency motor in applications where the motor overheats easily standard parameters of the adaptable motor have been configured inside the AC drive It is still necessary to perform motor auto tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions Otherwise the running result and protection performance will be affected The AC drive may alarm or even be damaged when short circuit exists on cables or inside the motor Therefore perform insulation short circuit test when the motor and cables are newly installed or during routine maintenance During the test make sure that the AC drive is disconnected from the tested parts 15 Safety Information and Precautions MD380 User Manual 16 Product Information Product Information MD380 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information 2 1 Designation Rules and Nameplate o
339. unction Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 No PID operation at stop FA 28 PID operation at stop i 0 1 PID operation at stop It is used to select whether to continue PID operation in the state of stop Generally the PID operation stops when the AC drive stops Group FB Swing Frequency Fixed Length and Count The swing frequency function is applied to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the applications where traversing and winding functions are required The swing frequency function indicates that the output frequency of the AC drive swings up and down with the set frequency as the center The trace of running frequency at the time axis is shown in the following figure 212 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes The swing amplitude is set in FB 00 and FB 01 When FB 01 is set to 0 the swing amplitude is 0 and the swing frequency does not take effect Figure 6 30 Swing frequency control Output frequency Hz Swing amplitude _ 7 Aw Fset x FB 01 Swing frequency upper limit Set frequency Fset Swing frequency lower limit kick frequency 1 x 2 1 I 1 TS Swing t Accelerate by M Triangular Decelerate by time cycle rising timeldeceleration time 1 RUN command Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default i 0 Relative to the central frequenc 00 Swing frequency
340. up Function Description FO to F9 FA Standard AC drive Compatible with MD320 series function codes and to FE FP function code group adding some function codes Advanced function Multi motor parameters Al AO correction optimization AO to A8 AC code group control PLC card extension function setting UO to U3 Running state Display of AC drive basic parameters function code group In the function code display state select the required function code by pressing the key A or 2 as shown the following figure Figure 4 4 Selecting the required function code Status parameters Default display ___y___ Press A to display the N PRG FO function code groups in turn 50 00 Shift sa l Press V to display the function code groups reversed turn FP dodi c gt _ When 02 Ox the value Of ten s digit is 0 group A is 0 l invisible When FP 02 eae When FP 02 x0 the value A aN of unit s digit is 0 group U is I 00 1 invisible l U3 Level menu Select the function code group 49 Operation Display and Application Examples MD380 User Manual FP 02 is used to determine whether group A and group U are displayed Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit s digit group U display select
341. ve is liable to overvoltage error during deceleration However too large over excitation gain may lead to an increase in the output current Set F3 09 to a proper value in actual applications 158 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Set the over excitation gain to 0 in the applications where the inertia is small and the bus voltage will not rise during motor deceleration or where there is a braking resistor Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 11 V F oscillation suppression gain 0 100 Model dependent Set this parameter to a value as small as possible in the prerequisite of efficient oscillation suppression to avoid influence on V F control Set this parameter to 0 if the motor has no oscillation Increase the value properly only when the motor has obvious oscillation The larger the value is the better the oscillation suppression result will be When the oscillation suppression function is enabled the rated motor current and no load current must be correct Otherwise the V F oscillation suppression effect will not be satisfactory Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Digital setting F3 14 Alt Al2 Al3 Pulse setting DI5 Multi reference 0 Simple PLC PID 8 Communication setting Voltage source for V F F3 13 separation 100 096 corresponds to the rated motor voltage F 1 02 A4 02 A5 02 A6 02 Voltage digital sett
342. ward JOG You can perform forward JOG FJOG by using the MF K key 4 Reverse JOG You can perform reverse JOG FJOG by using the MF K key Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 STOP RESET key enabled only in STOP RESET key operation panel control function 1 STOP RESET key enabled in any operation mode F7 02 183 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual Function Parameter Setting Range Default 0000 FFFF 71615 41312110 Running frequency1 Hz Set frequency Hz Bus voltage V Output voltage V Output current A Output power kW Output torque Dl input status V LED display 15 14 13 12 41 1019 8 F7 03 running parameters 1 1F DO output status 11 voltage V 2 voltage V voltage V Count value Length value Load speed display PID setting If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running set the corresponding bit to 1 and set F7 03 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number 184 MD380 User Manual Description of Function Codes Function Parameter Setting Range Default 0000 FFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PID feedback PLC stage Pulse setting frequency
343. xample 1 To use the DIP switch as the start stop source and allocate the forward rotation switch signal to DI2 and the reverse rotation switch signal to DI3 perform the setting as shown in the following figure Figure 4 6 Setting of using the DIP switch for start stop Function Setting Command source Control switch Terminal code value Terminal control selection P catal RUN Be ipe Forward RUN l oman Reverse RUNI Foo2 i gt 1 F402 47 2 E Runhing l swa et F49 Terminal Reverse FA0A control Bs Twodine mode 1 COM In the preceding figure when SW1 is ON the AC drive instructs forward rotation when SW1 is OFF the AC drive stops When SW2 is ON the AC drive instructs reverse running when SW2 is OFF the AC drive stops If SW1 and SW2 are ON or OFF simultaneously the AC drive stops Example 2 To use the electromagnetic button as the start stop source and allocate the startup signal to 012 stop signal to 013 and reverse rotation signal to 014 perform the setting as shown in the following figure Figure 4 7 Setting of using the electromagnetic button for start stop Function Command perius Terminal code vna Terminal control source selection utton 3 RON 0 Forward RUN 58279 e DI2 Reverse RUN 0 02 1 SBI elle D DI3 Sto Runni p unning l oe RUN P p gt Ter
344. y may result in accidents Use a shielded cable for the encoder and ensure that the shielding layer is reliably grounded Before power on DANGER Check that the following requirements are met The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the AC drive The input terminals R S T and output terminals U V W are properly connected No short circuit exists in the peripheral circuit The wiring is secured Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the AC drive because such test has been done in the factory Failure to comply will result in accidents A warnine Cover the AC drive properly before power on to prevent electric shock All peripheral devices must be connected properly under the instructions described in this manual Failure to comply will result in accidents After power on N pANGER Do not open the AC drive s cover after power on Failure to comply may result in electric shock Do not touch any I O terminal of the AC drive Failure to comply may result in electric shock A warnine Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor auto tuning or running Failure to comply will result in accidents Do not change the default settings of the AC drive Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive 41 Safety In
345. y calculates the torque boost value based on motor parameters including the stator resistance F3 02 specifies the frequency under which torque boost is valid Torque boost becomes invalid when this frequency is exceeded as shown in the following figure Figure 6 4 Manual torque boost Output voltage VD SS SS Vb Maximum output voltage manual torque boost 1 Voltage of V1 n fb Output frequency f1 Cutoff frequency of fb Rated running manual torque boost frequency Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3 03 Multi point V F frequency 1 F1 0 00 Hz to F3 05 0 00 Hz F3 04 Multi point V F voltage 1 V1 0 0 100 0 0 0 05 Multi point V F frequency 2 2 F3 03 to F3 07 0 00 Hz F3 06 Multi point V F voltage 2 V2 0 0 100 0 0 0 05 to rated motor frequency F1 04 F3 07 Multi point V F frequency 3 F3 Note The rated frequencies 0 00 Hz of motors 2 3 and 4 are respectively set in A2 04 A3 04 and A4 04 F3 08 Multi point V F voltage 3 V3 0 0 100 0 0 0 157 Description of Function Codes MD380 User Manual These six parameters are used to define the multi point V F curve The multi point V F curve is set based on the motor s load characteristic The relationship between voltages and frequencies is V1 lt V2 lt V3 F1 lt F2 lt F3 At low frequency higher voltage may cause overheat or even burnt out of the
346. ype 0 5 Hz 100 Speed range 1 100 SFVC 1 1000 CLVC Speed stability 0 5 SFVC accuracy 0 02 CLVC Torque control accuracy 5 20 MD380 User Manual MD380 User Manual Product Information Item Specifications G type 60s for 150 of the rated current 3s for 180 of the rated current Overload capacity P type 60s for 120 of the rated current 3s for 150 of the rated current Fixed boost Torque boost Customized boost 0 1 30 0 Straight line V F curve VIF curve Multi point V F curve N power V F curve 1 2 power 1 4 power 1 6 power 1 8 power square V F separation Two types complete separation half separation Straight line ramp Ramp mode S curve ramp Four groups of acceleration deceleration time with the range of 0 0 6500 0s Standard DC braking frequency 0 00 Hz to maximum frequency functions DC braking Braking time 0 0 36 0s Braking action current value 0 0 100 0 JOG frequency range 0 00 50 00 Hz JOG control ERA JOG acceleration deceleration time 0 0 6500 0s Onboard multiple It implements up to 16 speeds via the simple PLC function preset speeds or combination of DI terminal states Onboard PID It realizes process controlled closed loop control system easily Auto voltage It can keep constant output voltage automatically when the regulation AVR mains voltage changes Overvoltage The current and vol

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Da-Lite Motorized Scenic Roller  Installation Manual for Solar Lighting Kit  RL 550B - Dillon Help  MELSECNET/10 Network Module User`s Manual (Hardware)  1 - Megep  Gigabyte GA-H67A-D3H-B3 motherboard  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file